Nokia Solutions and Networks T6EQ1 SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS User Manual Exhibit 8

Nokia Solutions and Networks SC4812ET 1X/1X-EVDO @ 1.9 GHz CDMA BTS Exhibit 8

Exhibit 8

SCt4812ET Optimization/ATPManualSoftware Release R16.1.x.x800 and 1900 MHzCDMAEnglishAug 200268P09255A57-2PRELIMINARY
NoticeWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resultingfrom any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in thisdocument has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed forinaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves theright to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any personof revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product,software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines andprograms), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not beconstrued to mean that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.CopyrightsThis instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describecopyrighted Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws inthe United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, includingthe exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola material contained herein or in the Motorola products described in thisinstruction manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the expresswritten permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant eitherdirectly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications ofMotorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.Usage and Disclosure RestrictionsLicense AgreementThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. It is furnished by express license agreementonly and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.Copyrighted MaterialsSoftware and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of thesoftware or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into anylanguage or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.High Risk ActivitiesComponents, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOTdesigned, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environmentsrequiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems,Air Traffic Control, Life Support, or Weapons Systems (“High Risk Activities”). Motorola and its supplier(s) specificallydisclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.Trademarks and Motorola are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.Product and service names profiled herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Other manufacturers’ products or servicesprofiled herein may be referred to by trademarks of their respective companies.Copyright Copyright 2002 Motorola, Inc. All Rights ReservedPrinted on Recyclable PaperREV012501SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYiAug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATPManualTable of Contents...
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYii Aug 2002ContentsFCC Requirements xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Content xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Part 15 Requirements xviii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCC Part 68 Requirements xix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword xx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Safety xxii. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revision History xxiv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scope of This Document 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Composition 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA LMF Product Description 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Help 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Why Optimize? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Is Optimization? 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Optimize 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documentation 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Documents 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Documentation 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Hardware Requirements 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Guidelines 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Calibration 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Cable Calibration 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment List 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Equipment 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Overview 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Components 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet Internal FRUs 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cabinet 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal FRUs 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 2 Power Up Procedures 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepower-up 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cellsite Types 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration Switch 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking for shorts 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Inspection and Setup 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Check 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYiiiAug 2002AC Power Up Sequence 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying AC Power 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Cabinet Power Tests 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Pre-test 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Checks 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet Power Up 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Test 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Exchanger Power Up 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3 Optimization/ATP 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Optimization 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Process 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell-site Types 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell-site Data File 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS System Software Download 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configure Channel Service Unit 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Operation 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Operating System Installation 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA LMF Home Directory 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF Computer 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Connection 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folder Structure Overview 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Log into and out of the BTS 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download Files to the LMF - Master-bts-cdma Files 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create BTS Specific CDF File 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version and Site Type 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Antenna Mapping Files 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating the LMF 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Operation 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging into a BTS 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Out 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing an MMI Communication Session 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Download Overview 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLI 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Tests 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYiv Aug 2002Select CSM Clock Source 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable CSMs 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable MCCs 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization Manager System Time 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR/HSO 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Frequency Verification 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Initialization/Verification 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LORAN-C Initialization/Verification 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration and Test Equipment 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment GPIB Address Settings 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Test Sets 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Preparation 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Connection Charts 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Cable Calibration Set-up 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Cable Calibration 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set-up for TX Calibration 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set-up for Optimization/ATP 3-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX ATP Setup 3-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loss/Gain Offset 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPIB Addresses 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Test Equipment 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Equipment 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables with a CDMA Analyzer 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Cable Loss Values 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Coupler Loss Value 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting for loss 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Calibrate BLOs 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Calibration 3-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLO Calibration Data File 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup: RF Path Calibration 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Calibration 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download BLO Procedure 3-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Introduction 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Audit 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Audit Test 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Cal/Audit Test 3-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create CAL File 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Description 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Parameters 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and Setting RFDS Parameters 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYvAug 2002RFDS TSU NAM Programming 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAM 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valid NAM Ranges 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Antenna Map Data 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Calibration 3-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Calibration Procedure 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program TSU NAM 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Reporting Display 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Exchanger Alarm Test 3-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Fail Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minor Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Alarms 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System) 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Rectifier Failure 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System) 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional) 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before Leaving the site 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4 Automated Test Procedures (ATP) 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Tests 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced ATP 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Prerequisites 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX/RX OUT Connections 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Procedure 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA 2000 Testing 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Procedure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Tx Mask Test 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Rho Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance Test 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: Code Domain Power Test 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background: FER Test 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5 Prepare to Leave the Site 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing Active Service 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Test Equipment Removal 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSC 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS Site Span Configuration Verification 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set BTS Site Span Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame Modem 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF Removal 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYvi Aug 2002Overview 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Log into Cell-Site 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Power Meter 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Communicate to Communications Analyzer 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Download Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card) 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot ENABLE Device 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward link problem 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Txmask Measurement 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset Measurement 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cannot Perform Carrier Measurement 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-FER Test Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Description 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver Operation 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No GPS Reference Source 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checksum Failure 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Bad RX Message Type 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM Reference Source Configuration Error 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Takes Too Long for CSM to Come INS 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Backplane 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Functionality 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting Procedure 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Control Problems 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Problems 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX and TX paths fail 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All tests fail on a single antenna 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Status Indicators 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI3, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E) 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSM LED Status Combinations 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI3 LED Status Combinations 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GLI3 Pushbuttons and Connectors 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC LED Status Combinations 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Problems(No Control Link) 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A System Data A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Operation Verification A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Checklist A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Operations A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Power and Initial Power Tests A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Optimization Checklist A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Receiver Operation A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LFR Receiver Operation A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPA IM Reduction A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYviiAug 2002TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations A-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations A-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Verification A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Shelf A-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAs A-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B ATP Matrix Table B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-optimization B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix C BBX Gain C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBX Gain Set Point C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage & Background C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D CDMA Operating Frequency Programming D-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Frequencies D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1900 MHz PCS Channels D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 1900 MHz Center Frequencies D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800 MHz CDMA Channels D-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating 800 MHz Center Frequencies D-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix E PN Offset E-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PN Offset E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usage E-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix F Test Preparation F-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Test Equipment Connections F-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A System Connectivity Test F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Connection F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setup F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment Interconnection F-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing HP PCS Interface (HP83236) F-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465 F-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating HP 437 Power Meter F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter F-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix G Power Calibration G-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Output Power G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Calibration G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm up G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYviii Aug 2002Power Delta Calibration Introduction G-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8921A Power Delta Calibration G-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 Power Delta Calibration G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8935 Power Delta Calibration G-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration G-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Service Calibration G-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix H Cable Interconnection H-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intra-Cabinet Cabling H-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling H-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-CCP Cables and Cable Connectors H-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet LPA Cables H-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LPAC Cabling H-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors H-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram H-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections H-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPC Functional Description H-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RFDS Cabling Details H-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Pair Punchblock H-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information H-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Cabinet Parts Locator H-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix I GPIB Addressing I-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPIB I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPIB Introduction I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HP8935 Test Set GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB Address I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3465 GPIB Address I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS232 GPIB Interface Box I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB Address I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB Address I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB Address I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix J Downloading ROM J-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downloading ROM Code J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception Procedure - Downloading ROM Code J-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix K Companion Frame Optimization K-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing the Companion Frame K-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing the TX section K-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimizing the RX section K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index Index-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYixAug 2002List of FiguresFigure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail 1-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal FRUs 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View) 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate Diagram 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF Cabinet 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-8: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-9: Power Cabinet 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity) 1-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch Settings 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm Panel 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation Panel 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27Vdc Terminal Locations 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower Assembly 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker Assemblies 2-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers 2-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit Breakers 2-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSU 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch Block 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structure 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4: LMF Connection Detail 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect Diagram 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-6: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI Connections 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal Connection 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921A . . . 3-54Figure 3-9: Cable Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562 3-55Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power Meter 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X) 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown - CyberTest and Advantest R3465 . 3-59Figure 3-14: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921A 3-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs - Agilent Test Equipment 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs - Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-17: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs - Agilent Test Equipment 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxAug 2002Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs - Advantest R3267/3562 Test Equipment 3-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-19: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS) 3-65. . . Figure 3-20: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS) 3-66. . . . . Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-22: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer) 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-23: Battery Over-temperature Sensor 3-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-24: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm Panel 3-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port Connection 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor Ports 6-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2: GLI3 Front Panel Operating Indicators 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED Indicators 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation) D-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation). D-4Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without Rubidium F-3. . . Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with Rubidium F-5. . . . . . . . . Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium Standard F-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium Standard F-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-5: Agilent 10 MHz Reference Connections F-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-6: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface F-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-7: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465 F-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-8: Power Meter Detail F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail F-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437B G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921A G-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437B G-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465 G-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437B G-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935 G-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437 G-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406A G-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS G-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure G-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDS G-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations H-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and Connectors H-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-3: C-CCP Backplane H-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET H-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables H-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxiAug 2002Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board Cables H-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO Card H-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers H-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable Numbers H-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and Connectors H-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-18. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection H-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections H-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-16: RFDS Component Identification H-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection H-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-18: 50 Pair Punchblock H-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts Locator H-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-1: HP437 Power Meter I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter Detail I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-3: HP8935 Test Set I-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/B I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-5: R3465 Communications Test Set I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-6: RS232 GPIB Interface Box I-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB Address I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting I-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB Address I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure I-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB Address I-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure K-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector) K-2. Figure K-2: WinLMF Display Screen K-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxii Aug 2002List of TablesFCC Part 68 Registered Devices xix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support Table 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-2: Abbreviations and Acronyms 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf) 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf) 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-5: BTS Sector Configuration 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 1-6: Sector Configurations 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and Setup 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-3: AC Voltage Measurements 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-4: Applying AC Power 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up Tests 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power Up 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries) 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-9: Battery Discharge Test 2-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power Up 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span Isolation 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-3: LMF Operating System Installation 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMF 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI Connection 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-6: LMF to BTS Connection 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-7: Pinging the Processors 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-8: Logging into the BTS 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-9: Downloading Site Specific BTS Files 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loads 3-23. . . . . . . . . Table 3-11: Create BTS Specific CDF File 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-12: Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version 3-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-13: Update Antenna Mapping Files 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-14: BTS GUI Login Procedure 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-15: BTS CLI Login Procedure 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-16: BTS GUI Logout Procedure 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-17: BTS CLI Logout Procedure 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-18: Establishing MMI Communications 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-19: Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI Devices 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI Devices 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-22: Select CSM Clock Source 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxiiiAug 2002Table 3-23: Enable CSMs 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-24: Enable MCCs 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification) 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/Verification 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/Verification 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-28: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment Interconnection 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-29: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment Interconnection 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-30: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection Tab 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-31: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-Detect 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-32: Test Equipment Calibration 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-33: Cable Calibration 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-34: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-35: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer 3-73. . . . . . . . . . Table 3-36: Setting Cable Loss Values 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-37: Setting Coupler Loss Values 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-38: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch Assignments 3-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-39: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector) 3-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration) 3-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-41: BTS TX Path Calibration 3-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-42: Download BLO 3-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-43: BTS TX Path Audit 3-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-44: All Cal/Audit Test 3-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-45: Create CAL File 3-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter Settings 3-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-47: Definition of Parameters 3-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-48: Valid NAM Field Ranges 3-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-49: Set Antenna Map Data 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration Data 3-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-51: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel Frequencies 3-93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-52: RFDS Calibration 3-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-53: Program NAM Procedure 3-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-54: Heat Exchanger Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-55: Door Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-56: AC Fail Alarm 3-97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-57: Minor Alarm 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-58: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-60: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor Alarm 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-61: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major Alarm 3-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-62: Battery Over Temperature Alarm 3-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3-63: Rectifier Over Temperature Alarm 3-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxiv Aug 2002Table 3-64: Check Before Leaving the Site 3-103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-1: ATP Test Procedure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-1: External Test Equipment Removal 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a Diskette 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter Configuration 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM Connections 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMF 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download Failure 6-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) Failure 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-7: LPA Errors 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration Failure 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit Failure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP) 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement Failure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement Failure 6-7. . . . . . . Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER Failure 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-16: No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-17: No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI3s) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-18: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-19: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over AMR 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-20: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3s 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line Traffic 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel Elements 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply Module 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf Module 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths fail 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna path 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link Failure 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-1: Verification of Test Equipment Used A-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-2: Site Checklist A-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxvAug 2002Table A-3: Preliminary Operations A-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A3a: Pre-power Checklist A-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A3b: Pre-power Checklist A-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-4: GPS Receiver Operation A-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-5: LFR Receiver Operation A-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-6: LPA IM Reduction A-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) . . A-10Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-11. . . . . . . . . . Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels) A-12. . . . . . Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels) A-15. . . . . . Table A-11: TX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-12: RX Antenna VSWR A-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table A-13: CDI Alarm Input Verification A-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix B-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm) C-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. Channel D-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn E-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without Rubidium F-2. Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With Rubidium F-4. . . Table F-3: System Connectivity F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB Address F-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921A F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935 F-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock Setup F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465 F-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface) F-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465 F-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration Procedure F-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter F-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration Procedure G-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table G-5: In-Service Calibration G-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES H-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table H-23. . . Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling Table H-24. . . Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair Punchblock H-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB Address I-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxvi Aug 2002Table I-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB Address I-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB Address I-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB Addresses I-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB Address I-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB Address I-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB Address I-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB Address I-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to Devices J-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table K-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion Frame K-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table K-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion Frame K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table K-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single Frame K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table K-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion Site K-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC RequirementsSCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxviiAug 2002FCC RequirementsContentThis section presents Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules Parts 15 and 68 requirements and compliance information for theSCt4812T/ET/ET Lite series Radio Frequency Base TransceiverStations.FCC Part 15 RequirementsPart 15.19a(3) - INFORMATION TO USERNOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and2. This device must accept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation.Part 15.21 - INFORMATION TO USERCAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorolacould void your authority to operate the equipment.15.105(b) - INFORMATION TO USERNOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with thelimits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of theFCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interference in a residentialinstallation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radiocommunications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interference to radio or televisionreception, which can be determined by turning the equipmentOFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of the following measures:SReorient or relocate the receiving antenna.SIncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver.SConnect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit differentfrom that to which the receiver is connected.SConsult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician forhelp.
FCC Requirements 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxviii Aug 2002FCC Part 68 RequirementsThis equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules. A label on the GLI3 board, easily visiblewith the board removed, contains the FCC Registration Number for thisequipment. If requested, this information must be provided to thetelephone company.FCC Part 68 Registered DevicesDevice FCC Part 68 IDGroup Line Interface (GLI3) See Note US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1XCisco Model 1900-27 Router US: 5B1DDNDN0006ADC KENTROX Model 537 US: F81USA-31217-DE-NNOTE The BTS equipment is always equipped with the GLI3, < US: IHEXDNANGLI3-1X>, and may be used in conjunction withone or both of the listed registered CSU devices, or another registeredCSU device not listed above.The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment,operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of your T1. Ifthis happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice so thatyou can modify your equipment as required to maintain uninterruptedservice.If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephonecompany will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance ofservice may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephonecompany will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advisedof your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it isnecessary.If you experience trouble operating this equipment with the T1, pleasecontact:Global Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC)1501 W. Shure Drive, 3436NArlington Heights, Illinois 60004Phone Number: (847) 632-5390for repair and/or warranty information. You should not attempt to repairthis equipment yourself. This equipment contains no customer oruser-serviceable parts.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola couldvoid your authority to operate this equipment.
Foreword68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxixAug 2002ForewordScope of manualThis manual is intended for use by cellular telephone systemcraftspersons in the day-to-day operation of Motorola cellular systemequipment and ancillary devices.This manual is not intended to replace the system and equipmenttraining offered by Motorola, although it can be used to supplement orenhance the knowledge gained through such training.Obtaining ManualsTo view, download, order manuals (original or revised), visit theMotorola Lifecycles Customer web page at http://services.motorola.com,or contact your Motorola account representative.If Motorola changes the content of a manual after the original printingdate, Motorola publishes a new version with the same part number but adifferent revision character.Text conventionsThe following special paragraphs are used in this manual to point outinformation that must be read. This information may be set-off from thesurrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title in capital letters.The three categories of these special paragraphs are:NOTE Presents additional, helpful, non-critical information that you canuse. Bold-text notes indicate information to help you avoidan undesirable situation or provides additional informationto help you understand a topic or concept.CAUTION Presents information to identify a situation in which equipmentdamage could occur, thus avoiding damage to equipment.WARNING Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardoussituation in which there is a possibility of personal injury.The following typographical conventions are used for the presentation ofsoftware information:SIn text, sans serif BOLDFACE CAPITAL characters (a type stylewithout angular strokes: i.e., SERIF versus SANS SERIF) are used toname a command.SIn text, typewriter style characters represent prompts and thesystem output as displayed on an operator terminal or printer.SIn command definitions, sans serif boldface characters represent thoseparts of the command string that must be entered exactly as shown andtypewriter style characters represent command output responsesas displayed on an operator terminal or printer.SIn the command format of the command definition, typewriterstyle characters represent the command parameters.
Foreword 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxx Aug 2002Reporting manual errorsTo report a documentation error, call the CNRC (Customer NetworkResolution Center) and provide the following information to enableCNRC to open an MR (Modification Request):- the document type - the manual title, part number, and revision character- the page number(s) with the error- a detailed description of the error and if possible the proposed solutionMotorola appreciates feedback from the users of our manuals.Contact usSend questions and comments regarding user documentation to the emailaddress below:cdma.documentation@motorola.comMotorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.Manual banner definitionsA banner (oversized text on the bottom of the page, for example,PRELIMINARY) indicates that some information contained in themanual is not yet approved for general customer use.24-hour support serviceIf you have problems regarding the operation of your equipment, pleasecontact the Customer Network Resolution Center for immediateassistance. The 24 hour telephone numbers are:NA CNRC +1-800-433-5202EMEA CNRC +44- (0) 1793-565444ASPAC CNRC +86-10-88417733Japan & Korea CNRC +81-3-5463-3550LAC CNRC +51-1-212-4020For further CNRC contact information, contact your Motorola accountrepresentative.
General Safety68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxxiAug 2002General SafetyRemember! . . . Safetydepends on you!!The following general safety precautions must be observed during allphases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described inthis manual. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specificwarnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design,manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumesno liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.The safety precautions listed below represent warnings of certain dangersof which we are aware. You, as the user of this product, should followthese warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safeoperation of the equipment in your operating environment.Ground the instrumentTo minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must beconnected to an electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with athree-conductor ac power cable, the power cable must be either pluggedinto an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with athree-contact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contactadapter must have the grounding wire (green) firmly connected to anelectrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The power jack andmating plug of the power cable must meet International ElectrotechnicalCommission (IEC) safety standards.NOTE Refer to Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations -68P81150E62.Do not operate in an explosiveatmosphereDo not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases orfumes. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an environmentconstitutes a definite safety hazard.Keep away from live circuitsOperating personnel must:Snot remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized ServicePersonnel or other qualified maintenance personnel may removeequipment covers for internal subassembly, or componentreplacement, or any internal adjustment.Snot replace components with power cable connected. Under certainconditions, dangerous voltages may exist even with the power cableremoved.Salways disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them.Do not service or adjust aloneDo not attempt internal service or adjustment, unless another person,capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation, is present.
General Safety 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxxii Aug 2002Use caution when exposing orhandling the CRTBreakage of the Cathode-Ray Tube (CRT) causes a high-velocityscattering of glass fragments (implosion). To prevent CRT implosion,avoid rough handling or jarring of the equipment. The CRT should behandled only by qualified maintenance personnel, using approved safetymask and gloves.Do not substitute parts ormodify equipmentBecause of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not installsubstitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment.Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service and repair to ensurethat safety features are maintained.Dangerous procedurewarningsWarnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerousprocedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in thewarnings must be followed. You should also employ all other safetyprecautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipmentin your operating environment.WARNING Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in thisequipment. Use extreme caution when handling, testing, andadjusting.
Revision History68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYxxiiiAug 2002Revision HistoryManual Number68P09255A57-2Manual TitleSCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xVersion InformationThe following table lists the manual version, date of version, andremarks on the version. Revision bars printed in page margins (as shownto the side) identify material which has changed from the previousrelease of this publication.VersionLevel Date of Issue Remarks1Mar 2002 Preliminary manual submitted for engineering markup2Jul 2002 LMF software updates. Preliminary manual submitted for DV&Vevaluation
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-1Chapter 1Introduction1
Introduction 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-2IntroductionScope of This DocumentThis document provides information pertaining to the optimization andaudit tests of Motorola SC 4812ET Base Transceiver Subsystem (BTS)equipment frames equipped with trunked high-power Linear PowerAmplifiers (LPAs) and their associated internal and external interfaces.Also covered is software release 2.16.1.X and can support the followingversions of SC 4812ET BTS sites:- 1X Packet Backhaul BTS- 1X Circuit BTS- 1X Packet backhaul BTSThe 1X packet BTS has a packet backhaul network interface whichprovided via a pair of external routers together with a GLI upgrade(GLI3) that can handle voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data (IS-95B, 1X).This BTS equipment is configured with all 1X cards (BBX-1XandMCC1X) or a mix of 1X cards and non-1X cards (BBX2 andMCC8E/24E). This configuration is compliant with all applicablecdma2000 1X specifications. It provides the forward link and reverselink RF functions to support 2G features and 3G-1X features (i.e., highcapacity voice & high bit rate data).The 1X circuit BTS has a split backhaul (circuit/packet pipe) networkinterface that can handle circuit based voice (IS-95A/B, 1X) and data(IS-95B) as well as packet based data (1X).This document assumes the following prerequisites: The BTS framesand cabling have been installed per the BTS Hardware InstallationManual which covers the physical “bolt down” of all SC seriesequipment frames, and the specific cabling configurations.Document CompositionThis document covers the following major areas:SIntroduction, consisting of preliminary background information (suchas component and subassembly locations and frame layouts) to beconsidered by the Cell Site Field Engineer (CFE) before optimizationor tests are performed.SPreliminary Operations, consisting of cabinet power up and powerdown procedures.SOptimization/calibration, covering topics of Local MaintenanceFacility (LMF) connection to the BTS equipment, Global PositioningSystem (GPS) Verification, test equipment setup, downloading allBTS processor boards, RF path verification, Bay Level Offset (BLO)calibration and calibration audit, and Radio Frequency DiagnosticSystem (RFDS) calibration.SAcceptance Test Procedures (ATPs), consisting of ATP tests executedby the LMF and used to verify all major transmit (TX) andreceive (RX) performance characteristics on all BTS equipment.SPreparing to leave the site, presents instructions on how to properlyexit customer site, ensure that all equipment is operating properly, andall work is complete according to Motorola guidelines.1
Introduction68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-3SBasic troubleshooting, consisting of procedures for installation,calibration, transmit and receive tests, backplane problems, GPSfailures, and module connectors.SAppendices contain pertinent Pseudorandom Noise (PN) Offset,frequency programming, output power data tables, data sheets that arefilled out manually by the CFE at the site, an optimization/ATP testmatrix, BBX gain set point information, CDMA operating frequencyinformation, PN Offset programminginformation, information on testequipment preparation, manual cable calibration procedures, powerDelta calibration procedures, RF cabinet interconnect cableinformation, procedures for checking changing GPIB addresses, andproceduress for downloading ROM Code from the LMF.CDMA LMF Product DescriptionThe Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) LMF is a graphical userinterface (GUI) based LMF. This product is specifically designed toprovide cellular communications field personnel the vehicle to supportthe following CDMA BTS operations:SInstallationSMaintenanceSCalibrationSOptimizationThe LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLIcannot be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.Online HelpTask oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Helpfrom the menu bar.Why Optimize?Proper optimization and calibration assures:SAccurate downlink RF power levels are transmitted from the site.SAccurate uplink signal strength determinations are made by the site.What Is Optimization?Optimization compensates for the site-specific cabling and normalequipment variations. Cables that interconnect the BTS and Duplexerassemblies (if used), for example, are cut and installed at the time of theBTS frame installation at the site. Site optimization guarantees that thecombined losses of the new cables and the gain/loss characteristics andbuilt-in tolerances of each BTS frame do not accumulate, causingimproper site operation.Optimization identifies the accumulated loss (or gain) for all receive andtransmit paths at the BTS site, and stores that value in a database.SThe RX path starts at the ancillary equipment frame RFDS RXdirectional coupler antenna feedline port, through the RX input port1
Introduction 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-4on the rear of the frame, through the DDRCs, Multicoupler PreselectorCard (MPC), and additional splitter circuitry, ending at a CDMAChannel Processor (C-CCP) backplane Broad Band Transceiver(BBX) slot in the C-CCP shelf.SA transmit path starts at the BBX, through the C-CCP backplane slot,travels through the LPA/Combiner TX Filter and ends at the rear ofthe input/output (I/O) Panel. If the RFDS option is added, then theTX path continues and ends at the top of the RFDS TX directionalcoupler antenna feedline port installed in the ancillary equipmentframe. 1
Introduction68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-5These values are factored in by the BTS equipment internally, leavingonly site specific antenna feed line loss and antenna gain characteristicsto be factored in by the CFE when determining site Effective RadiatedPower (ERP) output power requirements.Each C-CCP shelf BBX board is optimized to a specific RX and TXantenna port. (One BBX board acts in a redundant capacity for BBXs1-12, and is optimized to all antenna ports). A single value is generatedfor each path, thereby eliminating the accumulation of error that wouldoccur from individually measuring and summing the gain and loss ofeach element in the path.When to OptimizeNew InstallationsAfter the initial site installation, the BTS must be prepared for operation.This preparation includes verifying hardware installation, initial powerup, and GPS verification. Basic alarm tests are also addressed.A calibration audit of all RF transmit paths is performed to verify factorycalibration.A series of ATP CDMA verification tests are covered using the actualequipment set up. An ATP is also required before the site can be placedin service.Site ExpansionOptimization is also required after expansion of a site.Periodic OptimizationPeriodic optimization of a site may also be required, depending on therequirements of the overall system.Repaired SitesVerify repair(s) made to the BTS by consulting an Optimization/ATPTest Matrix table. This table outlines the specific tests that must beperformed anytime a BTS subassembly or RF cable associated with it isreplaced.NOTE Refer to Appendix B for detailed basic guideline tables anddetailed Optimization/ATP Test Matrix.1
Documentation 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-6DocumentationSite DocumentsThe following documents are required to perform optimization of thecell site equipment:SSite document (generated by Motorola systems engineering), whichincludes:- General site information- Floor plans- Power levels- Site PN- Site paging and traffic channel allocation- Board placement- Site wiring lists- Cell-site Data Files (CDF)SDemarcation Document (Scope of Work Agreement)SEquipment manuals for non-Motorola test equipment.Product DocumentationFor other information, refer to the following manuals:SCDMA LMF Operator’s Guide; 68P64114A78SCDMA RFDS Hardware Installation manual; 68P64113A93SCDMA RFDS User’s GuideSEquipment Manuals for non-Motorola test equipmentSSC4812ET Field Replacable Units Guide Motorola part number68P09253A48SSC 4812ET RF & Power Cabinet Hardware Installation ManualMotorola part number 68P09253A94SLMF CLI Commands R16.X Motorola part number 68P09253A561
Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-7Test EquipmentOverviewThe LMF is used in conjunction with Motorola recommended testequipment, and it is a part of a “calibrated test set.” To ensure consistent,reliable, and repeatable optimization test results, only recommended testequipment supported by the LMF must be used to optimize the BTSequipment. Table 1-1 outlines the supported test equipment that meets thetechnical criteria required for BTS optimization.Table 1-1: CDMA LMF Test Equipment Support TableItem DescriptionHewlett Packard, modelHP 8921ACellular communications analyzer (includes83203B CDMA interface option)Agilent E4406A Analyzerwith Agilent E4432BGeneratorUsed for both IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000testingsAdvantest R3267 Analyzerwith Advantest R3562GeneratorUsed for both IS-95A/B and CDMA 2000testingsHewlett Packard, modelHP 83236APCS interface for PCS bandHewlett Packard, model HP8935 Cellular communications analyzerMotorola CyberTest Cellular communications analyzerAdvantest R3465 with 3561CDMA option Cellular communications analyzerGigatronix 8541C Power meterHP437B Power meter To ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used tooptimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute testequipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMFmeeting the same technical specifications.1
Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-8LMF Hardware RequirementsAn LMF computer platform that meets the following requirements (orbetter) is recommended:SNotebook computerS266 MHz (32-bit CPU) Pentium processorS4 GB internal hard disk driveSColor display with 1024 x 768 pixel resolution and capability todisplay more than 256 colorsSMemory requirements:- Minimum required RAM: 96 MB- Recommended RAM:- 128 MB for Windows 98 SE- 256 MB for Windows 2000SCD ROM drive and 3 1/2 inch floppy driveS56 kbps V.90ModemSSerial port (COM 1)SParallel port (LPT 1)SPCMCIA Ethernet interface card (for example, 3COM Etherlink III)with a 10Base-T-to-coax adapterSWindows 98SE operating system or Windows 2000 operating systemNOTE If 800 x 600 pixel resolution is used, the LMF window must bemaximized after it is displayed.Test Equipment GuidelinesTo ensure consistent, reliable, and repeatable optimization test results,test equipment meeting the following technical criteria should be used tooptimize the BTS equipment. You can, of course, substitute testequipment with other test equipment models supported by the LMFmeeting the same technical specifications.NOTE During manual testing, you can substitute test equipment withother test equipment models not supported by the LMF, butthose models must meet the same technical specifications.The customer has the responsibility of accounting for any measurementvariances and/or additional losses/inaccuracies that can be introducedas a result of these substitutions. Before beginning optimization ortroubleshooting, make sure that the test equipment needed is on handand operating properly.Test Equipment CalibrationOptimum system performance and capacity depend on regular equipmentservice, calibration, and characterization prior to BTS optimization.Follow the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) recommendedmaintenance and calibration schedules closely.1
Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-9Test Cable CalibrationEquipment test cables are very important in optimization. Motorolarecommends that the cable calibration be run at every BTS with the testcables attached. This method compensates for test cable insertion losswithin the test equipment itself. No other allowance for test cableinsertion loss needs to be made during the performance of tests.Another method is to account for the loss by entering it into the LMFduring the optimization procedure. This method requires accurate testcable characterization in a shop. The cable should be tagged with thecharacterization information prior to field optimization.Equipment Warm-upAfter arriving at the a site, the test equipment should be plugged in andturned on to allow warm up and stabilization to occur for as long aspossible. The following pieces of test equipment must be warmed-up fora minimum of 60 minutes prior to using for BTS optimization or RFDScalibration procedures.SCommunications test setSRubidium time baseSPower meterTest Equipment ListThe following pieces of test equipment are required during theoptimization procedure. Common assorted tools like screwdrivers andframe keys are not listed but are still required. Read the owner’s manualon all of the following major pieces of test equipment to understand theirindividual operation prior to use in optimization.NOTE Always refer to specific OEM test equipment documentation fordetailed operating instructions.10BaseT/10Base2 ConverterEthernet LAN transceiver (part of CGDSLMFCPQ1700)SPCMCIA Ethernet Adpater + Ethernet UTP adapter: 3COM model -Etherlink III 3C589BTransition Engineering model E-CX-TBT-03 10BaseT/10Base2converterNOTE Xircom model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used tointerface the LMF Ethernet connection to the frame.RS-232 to GPIB InterfaceSNational Instruments GPIB-232-CT with Motorola CGDSEDN04XRS232 serial null modem cable (see Figure 1-1) or equivalent; used tointerface the LMF to the test equipment.SStandard RS-232 cable can be used with the following modifications:1
Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-10- This solution passes only the three minimum electrical connectionsbetween the LMF and the GPIB interface. The control signals arejumpered as enabled on both ends of the RS-232 cable (9-pin D).TX and RX signals are crossed as null modem effect. Pin 5 is theground reference.- Short pins 7 and 8 together, and short pins 1, 4, and 6 together oneach connector.Figure 1-1: Null Modem Cable Detail53278146GNDRXTXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRGNDTXRXRTSCTSRSD/DCDDTRON BOTH CONNECTORSSHORT PINS 7, 8;SHORT PINS 1, 4, & 69-PIN D-FEMALE 9-PIN D-FEMALE52378146 DSR DSR FW00362Model SLN2006A MMI Interface KitSMotorola Model TRN9666A null modem board. Connectors onopposite sides of the board must be used as this performs a nullmodem transformation between cables. This board can used for10-pin to 8-pin, 25-pin to 25-pin and 10-pin to 10-pin conversions.SMotorola 30-09786R01 MMI cable or equivalent ; used to interfacethe LMF serial port connection to GLI3, CSM and LPA debug serialports.S25 pin D to 25 pin D serial cable from PC to null modem board.Communications System AnalyzerThe communication system analyzer is used during optimization andtesting of the RF communications portion of BTS equipment andprovides the following functions:(1) Frequency counter(2) RF power meter (average and code domain)(3) RF Signal generator (capable of CDMA modulation)(4) Spectrum analyzer(5) CDMA code domain analyzerThe following types of communication system analyzers are currentlysupported by the LMF:SHP8921A/600 Analyzer - Including 83203B CDMA Interface,manual control system card, and 83236A/B PCS Interface for 1900MHz BTSs.SAdvantest R3465 Analyzer - Including R3561L test source unitSAdvantest R3267 Analyzer - Including R3562 test source unitSAgilent E4406A Analyzer - including E4432 test source unitSHP8935 AnalyzerSCyberTest Communication AnalyzerGPIB CablesSHewlett Packard 10833A or equivalent; 1 to 2 meters (3 to 6 feet) longused to interconnect test equipment and LMF terminal.1
Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-11Power MeterOne of the following power meters is required for TX calibration andaudit if an HP8921A or Advantest R3465 analyzer is used:SHewlett Packard Model HP HP437B with HP8481A power sensorSGigatronix model 8541C with model 80601A power sensorTiming Reference CablesSTwo BNC-male to BNC-male RG316 cables; 3 meters (10 ft.) long,used to interconnect the HP8921A/600 or Advantest R3465communications analyzer to the CSM front panel timing references inthe BTS.NOTE Two Huber & Suhner 16MCX/11BNC/K02252D or equivalent;right angle MCX-male to standard BNC-male RG316 cables;3m long are required to interconnect the HP8921A/600communications analyzer to SGLN4132A and SGLN1145ACSM board timing references.SBNC “T” adapter with 50 ohm termination.NOTE This BNC “T” adapter (with 50 ohm termination) is required toconnect between the HP 8921A/600 (or Advantest R3465)EVEN SECOND/SYNC IN and the BNC cable. The BNC cableleads to the 2-second clock connection on the TIB. Erroneoustest results may occur if the “T” adapter with the 50 ohmtermination is not connected.Digital MultimeterSFluke model 8062A with Y8134 test lead kit or equivalent; used forprecision DC and AC measurements, requiring 4-1/2 digits.Directional CouplerSNarda model 30661 30 dB (Motorola part no. 58D09732W01) couplerterminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.RF AttenuatorsS20 dB fixed attenuators, 20 W (Narda 768-20); used with test cablecalibrations or during general troubleshooting procedures.SNarda Model 30445 30 dB (Motorola Part No. 58D09643T01) couplerterminated with two Narda Model 375BN-M loads, or equivalent.Miscellaneous RF Adapters, Loads, etcSAs required to interface test cables and BTS equipment and forvarious test set ups. Should include at least two 50 Ohm loads (typeN) for calibration and one RF short, two N-type female-to-femaleadapters.High-impedance Conductive Wrist StrapSMotorola model 42-80385A59; used to prevent damage fromElectrostatic Discharge (ESD) when handling or working withmodules.RF Load (at least three for trunked cabinets)S100 W non-radiating RF load; used (as required) to provide dummyRF loading during BTS transmit tests.1
Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-12RF Network Box (and calibrated cables)SMotorola model SGLN5531A 18:3 Passive Antenna Interface used tointerface test equipment to the BTS receive and transmit antennainputs during optimization/ATP or general troubleshootingprocedures.Optional EquipmentFrequency CounterSStanford Research Systems SR620 or equivalent. If directmeasurement of the 3 MHz or 19.6608 MHz references is required.Spectrum AnalyzerSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E with CDMA personality card) orequivalent; required for tests other than standard Receive band spectralpurity and TX LPA IM reduction verification tests performed by theLMF.Local Area Network (LAN) TesterSModel NETcat 800 LAN troubleshooter (or equivalent); used tosupplement LAN tests using the ohm meter.Span Line (T1/E1) Verification EquipmentSAs required for local applicationRF Test Cable (if not Provided with Test Equipment)SMotorola model TKN8231A; used to connect test equipment to theBTS transmitter output during optimization or during generaltroubleshooting procedures.OscilloscopeSTektronics model 2445 or equivalent; for waveform viewing, timing,and measurements or during general troubleshooting procedure.2-way SplitterSMini-Circuits model ZFSC-2-2500 or equivalent; provide thediversity receive input to the BTSHigh Stability 10 MHz Rubidium StandardSStanford Research Systems SR625 or equivalent. Required for CSMand Low Frequency Receiver/High Stability Oscillator (LFR/HSO)frequency verification.1
Abbreviations and Acronyms68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-13Abbreviations and AcronymsTable 1-2: Abbreviations and AcronymsAcronym DefinitionACLC AC Load CenterASU Antenna Selection UnitAMR Alarm Monitor ReportingATP Acceptance Test PlanBBX Broadband TransceiverBLO Bay Level OffsetBTS Base Transceiver SubsystemCBSC Centralized Base Station ControllerC-CCP Combined CDMA Channel ProcessorCCD CDMA Clock Distributioncdf command data fileCDMA Code Division Multiple AccessCE Channel ElementCHI Concentration Highway InterfaceCLI Command Line InterfaceCIO Combiner Input/OutputCMR Cellular Manual RevisionCSM Clock Synchronization ManagerCSU Clock Synchronization UnitDBPF Dual Bandpass FilterDBM Debug MonitorDLM Download ManagerDMAC Digital Metering and Alarm Control (also see MAP)DRDC Duplexer/RX Filter/Directional CouplerDSP Digital Signal ProcessorEMPC Expansion Multicoupler Preselector CardFRU Field Replaceable UnitFSI Frame Status IndicatorFWTIC Fixed Wireless Terminal Interface CardGFCI Ground Fault Connection InterruptGLI 2 Group Line Interface IIGPS Global Positioning SystemGUI Graphical User InterfaceHSO High Stability OscillatorIFM Integrated Frame ModemI&Q Interphase and QuadratureISB InterShelf Bus. . . continued on next page1
Abbreviations and Acronyms 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-14Table 1-2: Abbreviations and AcronymsAcronym DefinitionLAPD Link Access Protocol “D”LFR LORAN-C Frequency ReceiverLMF Local Maintenance FacilityLORAN LOng RAnge NavigationalLPA Linear Power AmplifierMAP Meter Alarm Panel (also refered to as DMAC)MCC Multi-Channel CDMAMGLI Master Group Line InterfaceMM Mobility ManagerMMI Man Machine InterfaceMPC Multicoupler Preselector Cardoos Out-of-ServiceOMCR Operations Maintenance Center - RadioPC Personal Communication SystemPDA Personal Communication System ControllerPN Pseudo-random NoiseQPSK Quadrature Phase Shift KeyedRFDS Radio Frequency Diagnostic SubsystemRGPS Remote Global Positioning SystemRSSI Received Signal Strength IndicatorSCAP Super Cell Application ProtocolTCH Traffic ChannelTCP Traffic ChannelTMPC Traffic ChannelTSIC Traffic ChannelTSI Time Slot Interchanger 1
BTS Overview68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-15BTS OverviewThe SC 4812ET BTS consists of an RF Cabinet that is an outdoor,weatherized version of the SC 4812T. The RF cabinet is powered by27 Vdc and each cabinet has the capability to support up to 4 carriers (at3 sector) or 2 carriers (at 6 sector).The RF Cabinet houses the fan modules, C-CCP, LPA modules, LPAtrunking backplane, Bandpass 2:1 & 4:1 Combiners, Duplexer/ReceiveFilter/Directional Couplers (DRDC) and a DC Power distributionassembly. The Power Cabinet (PC) provides +27 Vdc distribution andbattery backup for the SC 4812ET. The Power Cabinet houses batteries,battery heaters, rectifiers, an AC Load Center (ACLC), a powerdistribution assembly, and two duplexed GFCI convenience outlets.C-CCP Shelf Card/Module Device ID NumbersAll cards/modules/boards in the frames at a single site, assigned to asingle BTS number, are also identified with unique Device ID numbersdependent upon the Frame ID number in which they are located. Refer toTable 1-3 and Table 1-4 for specific C-CCP Shelf Device ID numbers.Table 1-3: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Top Shelf)Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)#Power(PS-1) Power(PS-2) Power(PS-3) AMR-1 GLI3-1 MCC BBX BBX-R MPC/EMPC-11 - - - 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 R1 -101 ---101 101 101 102 103 104 105 106 101 102 103 104 105 106 R101 -201 ---201 201 201 202 203 204 205 206 201 202 203 204 205 206 R201 -301 ---301 301 301 302 303 304 305 306 301 302 303 304 305 306 R301 -Table 1-4: C-CCP Shelf/Cage Card/Module Device ID Numbers (Bottom Shelf)Frame Card/Module ID Number (Left to Right)#HSO/LFR CSM-1 CSM-2 CCDACCDBAMR-2 GLI3-2MCC BBX SW MPC/EMPC-21 - 1 2 - - - 2 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 7 8 9 10 11 12 - -101 -101 102 - - - 102 102 107 108 109 110 111 112 107 108 109 110 111 112 - -201 -201 202 - - - 202 102 207 208 209 210 211 212 207 208 209 210 211 212 - -301 -301 302 - - - 302 102 307 308 309 310 311 312 307 308 309 310 311 312 - -1
BTS Overview 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-16Major ComponentsThe major components that make up the Motorola SC 4812ET areillustrated in this section: the RF Cabinet (see Figure 1-2) and the PowerCabinet (see Figure 1-9).Figure 1-2: SC 4812ET RF CabinetMain DoorLPA Door(Can only be opened after Main Door is open)RF I/OArea Cover PlateRear I/O DoorRear DC Conduit PanelRear Conduit PanelFW001891
BTS Overview68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-17RF Cabinet Internal FRUsFigure 1-3 shows the location of the Internal Field ReplaceableUnits (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in thefollowing paragraphs.Figure 1-3: RF Cabinet Internal FRUsDRDC LPAsCCP FansLPA TrunkingBackplane5 RU Rack SpaceRFDSDCPowerDist.PunchBlock(back)EBAC-CCP ShelfCombinerCageCircuitBreaker PanelETIBFW00163OPTIONAL AREADuplexer/RX Filter Directional CouplerThe DRDC combines, in a single module, the functions of antennaduplexing, receive band pass filtering, and surge protection (seeFigure 1-7).Combiner Cage (2:1, 4:1, or Band pass Filter)The Combiner Cage holds the transmit band pass filters, 2:1 combiners,or 4:1 combiners, depending on system configuration.1
BTS Overview 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-18Combined CDMA Channel Processor ShelfThe C-CCP shelf contains the following (see Figure 1-4):SHigh Stability Oscillator (HSO) or Low Frequency Receiver (LFR)card (1)SClock Synchronization Manager (CSM) cards (2)SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cards (2)SPower Supply cards (2 minimum, 3 maximum)SMulticoupler Preselector Cards (MPC) or Expansion MulticouplerPreselector Cards (EMPC) (2)SAlarm Monitoring and Reporting (AMR) cards (2)SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC8E, MCC24E or MCC-1X) cards (up to12)SBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cards (up to 13)SCombined Input/Output (CIO) card (1)SGroup Line Interface (GLI3) cards (2)SBBX Switch card (1)SModem (optional)SFiller Panels (as required)SFan Module (3)Figure 1-4: SC 4812ET C-CCP Shelf5 RU RACKSPACERFDSEBAETIBNOTE: MCCs may beMCC8Es, MCC24Esor MCC-1Xs. BBXsmay be BBX2s orBBX-1Xs.19 mm Filter PanelPower SupplyAMRCSMCSMMODEMAMRGLI3GLI3MCC24-6BBX2-1BBX2-2BBX2-3BBX2-4BBX2-5BBX2-6BBX2-RSwitchCIOBBX2-7BBX2-8BBX2-9BBX2-10BBX2-1 1BBX2-12MCC24-5MCC24-4MCC24-3MCC24-2MCC24-1MCC24-12MCC24-1 1MCC24-10MCC24-9MCC24-8MCC24-7Power SupplyPower SupplyCCD CCDREF FW00304SC 4812ET RF CabinetHSO/LFRMPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2Punch BlockThe Punch Block is the interface point of the RF Cabinet between theT1/E1 span lines, the Customer I/O, alarms, multi-cabinet timing(RGPS and HSO), and Pilot Beacon control (optional). (see Figure 1-6).1
BTS Overview68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-19Span I/O BoardThe Span I/O Board provides the interface for the span lines from theCSU to the C-CCP backplane (see Figure 1-6).RF Diagnostic SubsystemThe RFDS provides the capability for remotely monitoring the status ofthe SC 4812ET RF Transmit and Receive paths (Figure 1-7).Heat ExchangerThe Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the internal compartment of theRF Cabinet. The fan speed of the heat exchangers adjusts automaticallywith temperature. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary frontdoor of the RF Cabinet.SC 4812ET Interface Board (ETIB) & LPA Control Brd(LPAC)The ETIB is an interconnect board showing status LEDs for the RFCabinet, as well as providing secondary surge protection. The LPACboard provides the interface for the LPA connection.SC 4812ET Trunking BackplaneThe Trunking Backplane contains a complex passive RF network thatallows RF signals to share the resources of a bank of four LPAs. It alsoprovides DC Power and digital interconnect.Figure 1-5: SC 4812ET Intercabinet I/O Detail (Rear View)SPAN I/ORFGPSRF CABINET(Rear View)RFDS ExpansionRF ExpansionExp. PunchPunchBlockBlock27V27V RetDC ConduitPilot BeaconMicrowaveRF GPSLAN2 Sec Tick19 MHz ClockGround CableLugs1-3 Sector Antennas4-6 Sector AntennasSpan/AlarmExpansion 1Expansion 2RF CABINET(Rear Door closed)RGPSFW001471
BTS Overview 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-20Figure 1-6: SC 4812ET I/O Plate DiagramFW00171RF Expansion PortsPunchBlock Power Input27V RetAntenna’s1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B12RemoteASUGNDLugs50 Pair(Alarms/Spans)Punchblock20 Pair(RGPS)RGDBoardRGD/RGPSPower Input+27VMicro-waveRFGPSABIN OUTLAN19 MHz2 SecSpansAlamsModem1
BTS Overview68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-21Figure 1-7: RFDS Location in an SC 4812ET RF CabinetRFDSFRONT VIEW(door not shown for clarity)DRDC CAGEDRDCBTSCPLDANTCPLDWALLMOUNTINGBRACKET1A2A3A4A5A6A1B2B3B4B5B6BFW001701
Sector Configuration 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-22Sector ConfigurationThere are a number of ways to configure the BTS frame. Table 1-5outlines the basic requirements. When carrier capacity is greater thantwo, a 2:1 or 4:1 cavity combiner must be used. For one or two carriers,bandpass filters or cavity combiners may be used, depending onsectorization and channel sequencing.Table 1-5: BTS Sector ConfigurationNumber ofcarriers Number ofsectors Channel spacing Filter requirements13 or 6 N/A Bandpass Filter, Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)2 6 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)2 6 Adjacent Dual Band Pass Filter2 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)2 3 Adjacent Bandpass Filter3,4 3 Non-adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 or 4:1)3,4 3 Adjacent Cavity Combiner (2:1 Only)The matrix in Table 1-6 shows a correlation between the various sectorconfigurations and BBX cards.NOTE In Table 1-6, BBXs may be BBX2s or BBX-1Xs.1
Sector Configuration68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-23Table 1-6: Sector ConfigurationsConfig Ref. No. Description3-Sector/2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with optional 2:1 cavitycombiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels. Note that 2:1 cavity combiners are used (6total).1TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 26-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavitycombiners for 6 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.2TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 23-Sector/2-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavitycombiners for 3 sectors/2 carriers for non-adjacent channels.3TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 23-Sector/4-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 2:1 cavity combinersfor 3 sector/4 carriers for adjacent channels.TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#4BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2N/A N/A N/A BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 3N/A N/A N/A BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 43-Sector / 2-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with bandpass filters for3 sectors/2 carriers for adjacent channels.5TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1N/A N/A N/A BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 23-Sector/3 or 4-NON-ADJACENT Carriers - The configuration below maps TX with 4:1cavity combiners for 3 sectors/3 or 4 carriers for non-adjacent channels.TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#6BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 N/A N/A N/A 1BBX-7 BBX-8 BBX-9 N/A N/A N/A 2BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 N/A N/A N/A 3BBX-10 BBX-11 BBX-12 N/A N/A N/A 46-Sector/1-Carrier - The configuration below maps TX with either bandpass filters or 2:1 cavitycombiners for 6 sector/1 carrier.7TX1 TX2 TX3 TX4 TX5 TX6 Carrier#BBX-1 BBX-2 BBX-3 BBX-4 BBX-5 BBX-6 11
Sector Configuration 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-24Figure 1-8: SC4812ET LPA Configuration with Combiners/Filters5 RU RACKSPACERFDSEBAETIB5 RU RACKSPACESector3 SectorNumbering(6 Sector)4 to 1 Combiner3 Sector OnlyDual Bandpass Filter3 Sector 2 Carrier MaximumRFDSEBAETIB2 to 1 Combiner3 Sector or 6 SectorSector3 SectorNumbering(6 Sector)C1, S1-S3(C1, S1-S3)C2, S1-S3(C1, S4-S6)C3, S1-S3(C2, S1-S3)C4, S1-S3(C2, S4-S6)C1C2C3C4C1, S1-S3(C1, S1-S3)C2, S1-S3(C1, S4-S6)C3, S1-S3(C2, S1-S3)C4, S1-S3(C2, S4-S6)5 RU RACKSPACERFDSEBAETIBREF. FW001666 Sector 1 Carrier Maximum1
Power Cabinet68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-25Power CabinetFigure 1-9 illustrates the Power Cabinet design.Figure 1-9: Power CabinetGFCI OutletCoverRear I/ODoorRear AC ConduitPanelBattery DoorMain DoorRear DCConduit PanelFW001931
Power Cabinet 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-26Internal FRUsFigure 1-10 shows the location of the Internal Field ReplaceableUnits (FRUs). A brief description of each Internal FRU is found in thefollowing paragraphs.Figure 1-10: Power Cabinet with Batteries Installed (Doors Removed for Clarity)NOTEPunch Block is notvisible in this view.RectifierShelvesRectifierAlarm ModuleDC CircuitBreakersAC LoadCenterGFCI Outlets(Back)TemperatureControl ModuleFRONT VIEW POWER CABINETBatteries (BatteryHeaters locatedunder batteries)FW00164BatteriesThe batteries provide a +27 Vdc backup to the RF Cabinet should ACPower be lost. The Power Cabinet can accommodate a total of 24 12-Vbatteries, configured in 12 strings of 2 batteries each. The time durationof backup provided depends on system configuration.Battery HeaterThe battery heaters provide heating to the batteries in the Power Cabinet.A separate heater is required for each string of batteries. The heater is apad the batteries sit on located top of each battery shelf. The number ofheaters is dependent on system configuration.1
Power Cabinet68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-27Battery Compartment FanThe battery compartment fan provides air circulation for the two batterycompartments. It is located on the inside of the battery compartmentdoor.Heat ExchangerThe Heat Exchanger provides cooling to the rectifier compartment of thePower Cabinet. The Heat Exchanger is located in the primary front doorof the Power Cabinet.RectifiersThe +27 Vdc rectifiers convert the AC power supplied to the PowerCabinet to +27 Vdc to power the RF Cabinet and maintain the charge ofthe batteries.AC Load CenterThe ACLC is the point of entry for AC Power to the Power Cabinet. Itincorporates AC power distribution and surge protection.Punch BlockThe Punch Block is the interface for the alarm signalling between thePower Cabinet and the RF Cabinet.1
Power Cabinet 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY1-28Notes1
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-1Chapter 2Power Up Procedures2
Prepower-up 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-2Prepower-upThis section first verifies proper frame equipage. This includes verifyingmodule placement, jumper, and dual in-line package (DIP) switchsettings against the site-specific documentation supplied for each BTSapplication. Next, pre-power up and initial power-up procedures arepresented.Cellsite TypesSites are configured as with a maximum of 4 carriers, 3-sectored with amaximum of 4 carriers, and 6-sectored with a maximum of 2 carriers.Each type has unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.CDFThe Cell-site Data File (CDF) contains site type and equipage datainformation and passes it directly to the LMF during optimization. Thenumber of modem frames, C-CCP shelves, BBX and MCC boards (percage), and linear power amplifier assignments are some of the equipagedata included in the CDF.Site Equipage VerificationReview the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage datato the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspectand verify the equipment provided for the BTS or Modem frame andancillary equipment frame.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.After removal, the card/module should be placed on a conductivesurface or back into the anti-static bag it was shipped in.Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesTable 2-1: Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesStep Action1Refer to the site documentation and install all boards and modules into the appropriate shelves asrequired. Verify they are NOT SEATED at this time.2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial NumberChecklist” in the site logbook.2
Prepower-up68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-3Setting Frame C-CCP Shelf Configuration SwitchIf the frame is a Starter BTS, the backplane switch settings behind thefan module should be set to the ON position (see Figure 2-1).The switch setting must be verified and set before power is applied to theBTS equipment.Figure 2-1: Backplane DIP Switch SettingsSC 4812ETC-CCP SHELFFAN MODULEREMOVED5 RU RACK SPACERFDSEBAETIBONOFF STARTER FRAMEFW00167ONOFFEXPANSIONFRAME 1SETTINGONOFFEXPANSIONFRAME 2SETTINGBOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0BOTTOM / TOPRIGHT / LEFTMODEM_FRAME_ID_1MODEM_FRAME_ID_0Checking for shortsThe following information is used to check for any electrical shortcircuits and to verify the operation and tolerances of the cellsite and BTSpower supply units before applying power for the first time. It containsinstructional information on the initial proper power up procedures forthe SC 4812ET power cabinet and RF cabinet. Also presented are teststo be performed on the power cabinet. Please pay attention to allcautions and warning statements in order to prevent accidental injury topersonnel.2
Prepower-up 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-4Required ToolsThe following tools are used in the procedures.SDC current clamp (600 Amp capability with jaw size to accommodate2/0 cable).SHot Air Gun - (optional for part of the Alarm Verification)SDigital Multimeter (DMM)Cabling InspectionUsing the site-specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SReceive RF cabling - up to 12 RX cablesSTransmit RF cabling - up to six TX cablesNOTE For positive power applications (+27 V):SThe positive power cable is red.SThe negative power cable is black. (The black power cable isat ground potential.)Initial Inspection and SetupCAUTION Ensure all battery breakers for unused battery positions are open(pulled out) during any part of the power up process, and remainin the off position when leaving the site.Table 2-2: Initial Inspection and SetupStep Action1Verify that ALL AC and DC breakers are turned OFF in both the Power and RF cabinets. Verify thatthe DC power cables between the Power and RF cabinets are connected with the correct polarity2The RED cables connect to the uppermost three (3) terminals (marked +) in both cabinets. Confirmthat the split phase 240/120 AC supply is correctly connected to the AC load center input.CAUTION Failure to connect the proper AC feed will damage the surgeprotection module inside the AC load center.AC Power CheckThe first task in the power up sequence is to apply AC power to thePower cabinet. Once power is applied a series of AC Voltagemeasurements is required.Table 2-3: AC Voltage MeasurementsStep Action1Measure the AC voltages connected to the AC load center (access the terminals from the rear of thecabinet after removing the AC load center rear panel). See Figure 2-2.2Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally115 to 120 Vac.. . . continued on next page2
Prepower-up68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-5Table 2-3: AC Voltage MeasurementsStep Action3Measure the AC voltage from terminal L1 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally115 to 120 Vac.4Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to neutral. This voltage should be in the range of nominally115 to 120 Vac.5Measure the AC voltage from terminal L2 to ground. This voltage should be in the range of nominally115 to 120 Vac.6Measure L1 - L2 - should be from 208 to 240 Vac. CAUTION If the AC voltages are in excess of 120 V (or exceed 200 V)when measuring between terminals L1 or L2 to neutral orground, STOP and Do Not proceed until the cause of the highervoltages are determined. The power cabinet WILL be damagedif the Main breaker is turned on with excessive voltage on theinputs.Figure 2-2: AC Load Center Wiring G= GroundN = NeutralL1 = Line 1L2 = Line 2GNAC to Pilot BeaconL2L1FW003052
AC Power Up Sequence 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-6AC Power Up SequenceApplying AC PowerOnce AC Voltage Measurements are complete, apply AC power to thePower Cabinet. Table 2-4 provides the procedure for applying ACpower.Table 2-4: Applying AC PowerStep Action1When the input voltages are verified as correct, turn the Main AC breaker (located on the front of theACLC) ON. Observe that all eight (8) green LEDs on the front of the ACLC are illuminated (seeFigure 2-7).2Turn Rectifier 1 and Rectifier 2 AC branch breakers (on the AC Load Center) ON. All the installedrectifier modules (see Figure 2-7) will start up and should each have two green LEDs (DC and Power)illuminated.3Turn the Meter Alarm Panel module, ON (see Figure 2-3), while observing the K2 contact in thePDA assembly (see Figure 2-9). The contact should close. The Meter Alarm Panel voltage metershould read approximately 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc.4Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) ON, (see Figure 2-4). Verify that the Meter AlarmControl Panel does not have any alarm LEDs illuminated.5Check the rectifier current bargraph displays (green LED display on the rectifier module). Noneshould be illuminated at this point.NOTE If batteries are fitted, turn on the two battery heater AC breakerson the AC Load Center.Figure 2-3: Meter Alarm PanelOFFVOLTVOLT-+TEST POINTSAMPS-+TEST POINTSAMPPWRONFRONT VIEW FW00245Figure 2-4: Temperature Compensation PanelOFFV ADJSENSOR 25_ cSENSE-+COMONONFRONT VIEW1/2 A 250V12TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION PANELFW002462
AC Power Up Sequence68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-7Power Cabinet Power TestsTable 2-5 lists the step-by-step instructions for Power Up Tests.Table 2-5: Power Cabinet Power Up TestsStep Action1Probe the output voltage test point on the Meter Alarm Panel while pressing the 25° C set button onthe TCP (see Figure 2-4). The voltage should read 27.4 + 0.2 Vdc. Adjust Master Voltage on MeterAlarm Panel if necessary. Release the TCP 25° C set button.2Depending on the ambient temperature, the voltage reading may now change by up to + 1.5 Vcompared to the reading just measured. If it is cooler than 25_C, the voltage will be higher, and if it iswarmer than 25_C, the voltage will be lower.3Ensure the RF cabinet 400A main DC breaker is OFF.4Close the three (3) Main DC breakers on the Power Cabinet ONLY. Close by holding in the resetbutton on the front of the PDA, and engaging one breaker at a time.5Measure the voltage between the + and - terminals at the rear of the Power Cabinet and the RFCabinet, observing that the polarity is correct. The voltage should be the same as the measurement instep 2.6Place the probes across the black and red battery buss bars in each battery compartment. Place theprobe at the bottom of the buss bars where the cables are connected. The DC voltage should measurethe same as the previous step. 2
DC Power Pre-test 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-8DC Power Pre-testDC Power Checks Before applying any power to the BTS cabinet, verify there are no shortsin the RF or power DC distribution system (see Figure 2-5).Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)Step Action1Physically verify that all AC rectifiers supplying power to the RF cabinets are OFF or disabled (seeFigure 2-5). There should be no 27 Vdc on DC feed terminals.2On each RF cabinet:SUnseat all circuit boards/ modules in the distribution shelf, transceiver shelf, and Single CarrierLinear Power Amplifier (SCLPA) shelves, but leave them in their associated slots.SUnseat all circuit boards (except CCD and CIO cards) in the C-CCP shelf and LPA shelves, butleave them in their associated slots.SSet C-CCP shelf breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (labeledC-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).SSet LPA breakers to the OFF position by pulling out power distribution breakers (8 breakers,labeled 1A-1B through 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel).3Verify that the resistance from the power (+) feed terminals with respect to the ground terminal on thecabinet measures > 500 Ω (see Figure 2-5).SIf reading is < 500 Ω, a short may exist somewhere in the DC distribution path supplied by thebreaker. Isolate the problem before proceeding. A reading > 3 MΩ could indicate an open (ormissing) bleeder resistor (installed across the filter capacitors behind the breaker panel).4Set the 400 Amp Main Breaker and the C-CCP breakers (C-CCP 1, 2, 3) to the ON position bypushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on each breaker.* IMPORTANTIf, after inserting any board/module, the ohmmeter stays at 0 Ω, a short probably exists in thatboard/module. Replace the suspect board/module and repeat the test. If test still fails, isolate theproblem before proceeding.5Insert and lock the DC/DC converter modules into their associated slots one at a time. Repeat step3after inserting each module.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge, finallyindicating approximately 500 Ω.! CAUTIONVerify the correct power/converter modules by observing the locking/retracting tabs appear as follows:- 6Insert and lock all remaining circuit boards and modules into their associated slots in the C-CCP shelf.Repeat step 3 after inserting and locking each board or module.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω... . . continued on next page2
DC Power Pre-test68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-9Table 2-6: DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame)Step Action7Set the 8 LPA breakers ON by pushing them IN one at a time. Repeat step 3 after turning on eachbreaker.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω..8Seat all LPA and associated LPA fan modules into their associated slots in the shelves one at a time.Repeat step 3 after seating each LPA and associated LPA fan module.SA typical response is that the ohmmeter will steadily climb in resistance as capacitors charge,stopping at approximately 500 Ω..9Seat the Heat Exchanger, ETIB, and Options breakers one at a time. Repeat step 3. RF Cabinet Power UpTable 2-7 covers the procedures for properly powering up the RFCabinet.Table 2-7: RF Cabinet Power UpStep Action1Ensure the 400 Amp Main DC breaker and all other breakers in the RF Cabinet are OFF.2Proceed to the DC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame) sequence (see Table 2-6) (for initial power-up asrequired).3Ensure the power cabinet is turned on (see Table 2-5). Verify that 27 volts is applied to the terminalson the back of the RF cabinet.4Engage the main DC circuit breaker on the RF cabinet (see Figure 2-5).5On each RF cabinet:SSet C-CCP shelf breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (labeledC-CCP 1, 2, 3 - located on the power distribution panel).SSet LPA breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time (8 breakers, labeled 1A-1Bthrough 4C-4D - located on the power distribution panel).SSet the two heat exchanger breakers to the ON position by pushing them in one at a time.SSet the ETIB breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.SSet the OPTION breaker to the ON position by pushing it in.6Measure the voltage drop between the Power Cabinet meter test point and the 27 V buss bar inside theRF Cabinet PDA while the RF Cabinet is transmitting.NOTEFor a 3-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.2 V.For a 12-sector carrier system, the voltage drop should be less than 0.3 V.7Using a DC current probe, measure the current in each of the six (6) DC cables that are connectedbetween the RF and Power Cabinet. The DC current measured should be approximately the same. Ifthere is a wide variation between one cable and the others (>20 A), check the tightness of theconnections (torque settings) at each end of the cable. 2
DC Power Pre-test 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-10Figure 2-5: RF Cabinet Circuit Breaker Panel and 27Vdc Terminal LocationsRF CABINET(Rear View)27V27V RetMAIN BREAKER 5 RU RACKSPACESC 4812ET BTS RF Cabinet(Front View)4003030303030303030505050LPA1B1D2B2D3B3D4B4D1A1C2A2C3A3C4A4CPS1PS2PS3CCCP2525ETIBOPTION1015HEAT EXCHANGERCAUTIONSHUT OFF BOTH BREAKERSONLY DURING HEAT EXCHANGERMAINTENANCE OR REPAIRLPABLOWERSPUSH BUTTONTO RESETLPA BLOWERSFW00307I/O Plate + and - DC FeedTerminals (Back Panel of RFCabinet)2
Battery Test68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-11Battery TestCharge Test (Connected Batteries)Table 2-8 lists the step-by-step instructions for testing the batteries.Table 2-8: Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries)Step Action1Close the battery compartment breakers for connected batteries ONLY. This process should becompleted quickly to avoid individual battery strings with excess charge currentNOTEIf the batteries are sufficiently discharged, the battery circuit breakers may not engage individuallydue to the surge current. If this condition is observed, turn off the Meter Alarm Panel power switch,and then engage all the connected battery circuit breakers, the Meter Alarm Panel power switchshould then be turned ON.2Using the DC current probe, measure the current in each of the battery string connections to the bussbars in each battery cabinet. The charge current may initially be high but should quickly reduce in afew minutes if the batteries have a typical new battery charge level.3The current in each string should be approximately equal (+ 5 A).4The bargraph meters on the rectifier modules can be used as a rough estimate of the total batterycharge current. Each rectifier module has eight LEDs to represent the output current. Each illuminatedLED indicates that approximately 12.5% (1/8 or 8.75 A) of the rectifier’s maximum (70 A) current isflowing.EXAMPLE:Question: A system fitted with three rectifier modules each have three bargraph LEDs illuminated.What is the total output current into the batteries?Answer: Each bargraph is approximately indicating 12.5% of 70 A, therefore, 3 X 8.75A equals26.25A. As there are three rectifiers, the total charge current is equal to (3 X 26.25 A) 78.75 A.This charge current calculation only applies at this part of the start up procedure when the RF Cabinetis not powered on, and the power cabinet heat exchanger is turned off.5Allow a few minutes to ensure that the battery charge current stabilizes before taking any furtheraction. Recheck the battery current in each string. If the batteries had a reasonable charge, the currentin each string should reduce to less than 5 A.6Recheck the DC output voltage. It should remain the same as measured in step 4 of the Power UpTest.NOTEIf discharged batteries are installed, all bargraphs may be illuminated on the rectifiers during thecharge test. This indicates that the rectifiers are at full capacity and are rapidly charging the batteries.It is recommended in this case that the batteries are allowed to charge and stabilize as in the abovestep before commissioning the site. This could take several hours. 2
Battery Test 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-12Discharge TestPerform the test procedure in Table 2-9 only when the battery current isless than 5 A per string. Refer to Table 2-8 for the procedures to checkcurrent levels.Table 2-9: Battery Discharge TestStep Action1Turn the battery test switch on the Meter Alarm Panel, ON (see Figure 2-3). The rectifier outputvoltage and current should decrease by approximately 10% as the batteries assume the load. Alarmsfor the Meter Alarm Panel may occur.2Measure the individual battery string current using the DC current probe. The battery dischargecurrent in each string should be approximately the same (within± 5 A).3Turn Battery Test Switch OFF.CAUTION Failure to turn OFF the Battery Test Switch before leaving thesite, will result in low battery capacity and reduce battery life.2
Heat Exchanger Power Up68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-13Heat Exchanger Power UpTable 2-10: Heat Exchanger Power UpStep Action1Turn the Power Cabinet Heat Exchanger breakers ON (seeFigure 2-6 for breaker location).2The Heat Exchanger will now go into a five (5) minute test sequence. Ensure that the internal andexternal fans are operating. Place a hand on the internal and external Heat Exchanger grills to feel forair draft.Figure 2-6: Heat Exchanger Blower AssemblyCoreHeat ExchangerAssemblyPOWER CABINETFront ViewOUT=OFFIN=ONBlower AssemblyCircuit BreakerFW00181Side ViewMountingBracketT-30 ScrewTop (Internal) BlowerFan ModuleBlowerPowerCordBlowerPowerCordBottom (Ambient) BlowerFan ModuleT-30 ScrewMountingBracket2
Heat Exchanger Power Up 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-14Figure 2-7: Power Cabinet Circuit Breaker AssembliesLED StatusA B CBREAKER SYSTEM BREAKERSHOULD BE RESETIF ILLUMINATED ORAFTER RESET OF3 MAIN BREAKERSTO RESET MAIN BREAKERS, PRESSAND HOLD IN GREEN BUTTON WHILEPRESSING 160 AMP BREAKER BUTTONUNTIL LATCHED RELEASE GREEN BUTTONAFTER ALL 3 BREAKERS HAVE BEEN RESETON OFFBREAKER SYSTEMBREAKERSYSTEM RESETBUTTONFW00144POWER CABINETFront ViewAC CircuitBreakerDC CircuitBreaker160 160 1602525Circuit Breaker Legend:1. Main 150 Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Rectifier Shelf #1 70 Amp. . . . 3. Rectifier Shelf #2 70 Amp. . . . 4. Battery Heater #1 15 Amp. . . . 5. Battery Heater #2 15 Amp. . . . 6. GFCI 15 Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Spare 15 Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECTIFIERSHELF #1RECTIFIERSHELF #2BATTERYHEATER #1GFCISPAREBATTERYHEATER #2CAUTIONLIVE TERMINALS2345617ATTENTIONMAIN2
Heat Exchanger Power Up68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-15Figure 2-8: Power Cabinet AC Circuit Breakers15 Amp Breaker5/16 NUTLEFT TABSCREWWIRERIGHT TAB30 Thru 140 Amp Breaker150 Amp Breaker7/16 NUTPOWER CABINETFront ViewAC Circuit BreakerFW00145SCREWWIRERIGHTTABSWIRE5/16 NUTLEFT TABS2
Heat Exchanger Power Up 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY2-16Figure 2-9: Power Cabinet DC Circuit BreakersPOWER CABINETFront ViewDC Circuit BreakerFW0014615 AMP3x150 AMPFlat WasherLock Washer 17 mm NutDC PowerPanel DoorLocks9/32 Nut2
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-1Chapter 3Optimization/ATP3
Basic Optimization 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-2Basic OptimizationIntroductionThis chapter provides procedures for downloading system operatingsoftware, set up of the supported test equipment, CSM referenceverification/optimization, and transmit/receive path verification.NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the ”CAVEATS”section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for anyapplicable information.Optimization ProcessAfter a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations(power up) have been completed, the CDMA LMF is used to calibrateand optimize the BTS. The basic optimization process can beaccomplished as follows:SDownload MGLI with code and data and then enable MGLI.NOTE The GLIs may be GLI2s or GLI3sSUse the status function and verify that all of the installed devices ofthe following types respond with status information: CSM, BBX,GLI3, and MCC (and TSU if RFDS is installed). If a device isinstalled and powered up but is not responding and is colored gray inthe BTS display, the device is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF filewill have to be corrected before the device can be accessed by CDMALMF.SDownload code and data to all devices of the following types:- CSM- BBX (may be BBX2 or BBX-1X)- GLI3 (other than GLI3-1)- MCC (may be MCC-8E, MCC24, or MCC-1X)SDownload the RFDS TSIC (if installed).SVerify the operation of the GPS and HSO or LFR signals.SEnable the following devices (in the order listed):- Secondary CSM (slot 2)- Primary CSM (slot 1)- All MCCsSConnect the required test equipment for a full optimization.SSelect the test equipment.SCalibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously beencalibrated using the CDMA LMF that is going to be used for theoptimization/calibration. The cable calibration values can also beentered manually.SSelect all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the fulloptimization function. The full optimization function performs TXcalibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX testsfor all selected devices.3
Basic Optimization68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-3SIf the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failedpaths.SIf the TX calibration fails again, correct the problem that caused thefailure and repeat the full optimization for the failed path.SIf the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passesfor a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, correct the problem thatcaused the failure and run the individual tests as required until all TXand RX tests have passed for all paths.Cell-site TypesSites are configured as Omni/Omni or Sector/Sector (TX/RX). Each typehas unique characteristics and must be optimized accordingly.NOTE For more information on the different in site types, please referto the applicable BTS/Modem Frame Hardware Installation andFunctional Hardware Description manuals.Cell-site Data FileThe Cell-Site Data File (CDF) contains information that defines theBTS and data used to download files to the devices. A CDF file must beplaced in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be used to loginto that BTS. CDF files are normally obtained from the CBSC using afloppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if the LMFcomputer has the cabability.The CDF includes the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSC-CCP shelf allocation plan- BBX equipage (based on cell-site type) including redundancy- CSM equipage including redundancy- MCC (MCC24E, MCC8E or MCC-1X) channel element allocationplan. This plan indicates how the C-CCP shelf is configured, andhow the paging, synchronization, traffic, and access channelelements (and associated gain values) are assigned among the (up to12) MCCs in the shelf.SCSM equipage including redundancySEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of atransmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, theantenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) andantenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the requiredpower at the top of the BTS frame. The corresponding BBX outputlevel required to achieve that power level on any channel/sector canalso be determined.NOTE Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide for additionalinformation on the layout of the LMF directory structure(including CDF file locations and formats).3
Basic Optimization 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-4BTS System Software DownloadBTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTSprocessor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operatingcode is loaded from the LMF computer terminal.Circuit Backhaul BTSThe information below is for Circuit-Backhaul BTS. GLI-3’sconfigured for Circuit-backhaul use bts.cdf files.NOTE Before using the LMF for optimization/ATP, the correctbts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files for the BTS must be obtainedfrom the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF. Failure touse the correct CDF files can cause wrong results.CAUTION Failure to use the correct CDF files to log into a live (trafficcarrying) site can shut down the site.Packet-Backhaul BTSGLI-3’s are configured for Packet-backhaul BTS’s the file that is neededto login to the BTS is the NECF file (bts-xxx.xml) located on theOMC/R.The CDF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOS formatteddiskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if the LMF computer hasftp capability. Refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, or the LMFHelp screen, for more information.Site Equipage VerificationIf you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF, andreview the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipage datain the CDF to the actual site hardware.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.Extreme care should be taken during the removal and installationof any card/module. After removal, the card/module should beplaced on a conductive surface or back into the anti-static bag inwhich it was shipped.Isolate BTS from T1/E1 SpansNOTE At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and placeit out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span surgeprotectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS.Each frame is equipped with one 50-pair punch block for spans,customer alarms, remote GPS, and power cabinet alarms. See Figure 3-2and refer to Table 3-1 for the physical location and pin call-outinformation. To disable the span, pull the surge protectors for therespective span.Before connecting the LMF to the frame LAN, the OMC/CBSC mustdisable the BTS and place it OOS to allow the LMF to control theCDMA BTS. This prevents the CBSC from inadvertently sendingcontrol information to the CDMA BTS during LMF based tests.3
Configure Channel Service Unit68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-5Configure Channel Service UnitThe M-PATH 537 Channel Service Unit (CSU) provides in-bandSNMP-managed digital service access to T1 and fractional T1 lines.M-PATH units plug into the Kentrox 2-slot frame (see Figure 3-1).Remote M-PATH management is available via SNMP over an in-banddata link on the T1 line (using a facility data link or 8-64 kbps of a DS0channel). The unit at the near end of the management path can be anSNMP manager or another M-PATH CSU.Each 19 inch rack can support two CSU M-PATH 537 modules. EachM-PATH 537 module supports one and only one span connection.Programming of the M-PATH is accomplished through the DCE 9-pinconnector on the front panel of the CSU shelf. Manuals and a MicrosoftWindows programming disk is supplied with each unit.Setting the Control PortWhichever control port is chosen, it must first be set up so the controlport switches match the communication parameters being used by thecontrol device. If using the rear-panel DTE control port, set theshelf-address switch SA5 to “up” (leave the switch down for therear-panel DCE control port).For more information, refer to the vendor user manual (part number1174139) and installation manual (part number 1174462) provided witheach CSU.Plug one of the cables listed below into the Control Port connectors:Part Number Description of Cable01-95006-022 (six feet) DB-9S to DB-9P01-95010-022 (ten feet)The control port cables can be used to connect the shelf to:SA PC using the AT 9-pin interfaceSA modem using the 9-pin connectorSOther shelves in a daisy chain3
Configure Channel Service Unit 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-6Figure 3-1: Back and Front View of the CSUREF. FW00212Front ViewSLOT 1 SLOT 2DCE Connector(Craft Port)SLOT 1SLOT 2 T1 TERMINAL T1 TERMINALCONTROLPORT GROUPADDRESS SHELFADDRESST1 DDS T1 DDSDTE DCEDATA PORT DATA PORTBack ViewNETWORK NETWORKTo/FromNetwork To/FromGLITo/FromNetwork To/FromGLICAUTION SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C isswapped-On the SC4812ET’s, the span cable internal to the base stationthat connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU hasSpan B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled.-CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock as perMotorola documentation and punchdown chart. When conectingthe span input to the CSU re-label “Span B” cable to”Span C”cable to “Span B”. Connect to CSU as per documentationNote: The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to theCSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected onrevision “D” to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. Dwill be approximately January 30, 2001.3
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-7Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal InformationSee Figure 3-2 and refer toTable 3-1for the physical location and pincall-out information for the 50-pin punch block.Figure 3-2: 50 Pair Punch BlockTOP VIEW OF PUNCH BLOCKSTRAIN RELIEVE INCOMINGCABLE TO BRACKET WITHTIE WRAPS2T1T 1R 2T 2R121R2RLEGEND1T = PAIR 1 - TIP1R = PAIR 1 -RING ” ” ” ” ” ”RF Cabinet I/O Area50R50T49R49T1TFW00162TO LANCONNECTORTO ALARMSCONNECTORTO MODEMCONNECTORTO RGD/RGPSCONNECTOR3
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-8Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal InformationTable 3-1 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pinpunch block.Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnector Function Signal Name Punch Pin Ext. Cable WireColorPower Cab Control - NC 1T BluePower Cab Control - NO 1R Blk/BluePower Cab Control-Com 2T YellowReserved 2R N/CRectifier Fail 3T Blk/YellowAC Fail 3R GreenPower Cabinet Power Cab Exchanger Fail 4T Blk/GrnPower Cab Door Alarm 4R WhitePower Cab Major Alarm 5T Blk/WhiteBattery Over Temp 5R RedPower Cab Minor Alarm 6T Blk/RedReticifier Over Temp 6R BrownPower Cab Alarm Rtn 7T Blk/BrnALARM LFR_HSO_GND 7RHSO/LFR EXT_1PPS_POS 8TExtension EXT_1PPS_NEG 8RCAL_+ 9TCAB_- 9RLFR Antenna LORAN_+ 10TLORAN_- 10RPilot Beacon Alarm - Minor 11TPilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn 11RPilot Beacon Alarm - Major 12TPilot Beacon Pilot Beacon Control-NO 12RPilot Beacon Control - COM 13TPilot Beacon Control - NC 13R. . . continued on next page3
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-9Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnectorExt. Cable WireColorPunch PinSignal NameFunctionCustomer Outputs 1 - NO 14TCustomer Outputs 1 - COM 14RCustomer Outputs 1 - NO 14TCustomer Outputs 1 - COM 14RCustomer Outputs 1 - NC 15TCustomer Outputs 2 - NO 15RCustomer Outputs 2 - COM 16TALARM Customer Outputs Customer Outputs 2 - NC 16RCustomer Outputs 3 - NO 17TCustomer Outputs 3 - COM 17RCustomer Outputs 3 - NC 18TCustomer Outputs 4 - NO 18RCustomer Outputs 4-COM 19TCustomer Outputs 4 - NC 19RCustomer Inputs 1 20TCust_Rtn_A_1 20RCustomer Inputs 2 21TCust_Rtn_A_2 21RCustomer Inputs 3 22TCust_Rtn_A_3 22RCustomer Inputs 4 23TCust_Rtn_A_4 23RCustomer Inputs 5 24TCust_Rtn_A_5 24RALARM Customer Inputs Customer Inputs 6 25TCust_Rtn_A_6 25RCustomer Inputs 7 26TCust_Rtn_A_7 26RCustomer Inputs 8 27TCust_Rtn_A_8 27RCustomer Inputs 9 28TCust_Rtn_A_9 28RCustomer Inputs 10 29TCust_Rtn_A_10 29R. . . continued on next page3
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-10Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnectorExt. Cable WireColorPunch PinSignal NameFunctionRCV_TIP_A 30TRCV_RING_A 30RSpan 1 XMIT_TIP_A 31TXMIT_RING_A 31RRCV_TIP_B 32TRCV_RING_B 32RSpan 2 XMIT_TIP_B 33TXMIT_RING_B 33RRCV_TIP_C (Note) 34TRCV_RING_C (Note) 34RSpan 3 XMIT_TIP_C (Note) 35TXMIT_RING_C(Note) 35RRCV_TIP_D (Note) 36TSPAN I/O RCV_RING_D (Note) 36RSpan 4 XMIT_TIP_D (Note) 37TXMIT_RING_D(Note) 37RRCV_TIP_E (Note) 38TRCV_RING_E (Note) 38RSpan 5 XMIT_TIP_E (Note) 39TXMIT_RING_E(Note) 39RRCV_TIP_F (Note) 40TRCV_RING_F (Note) 40RSpan 6 XMIT_TIP_F (Note) 41TXMIT_RING_F(Note) 41RNOTESpan 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes. . . continued on next page3
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-11Table 3-1: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnectorExt. Cable WireColorPunch PinSignal NameFunctionGPS_Power_A 42T YellowFor frame GPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/Blackwithout RGD GPS_Power_B 43T BlueExpansionPunchblock GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/BlackSingle Frame GPS_TXD+ 44T WhiteRGD/RGPS BTS;RGPS Head GPS_TXD- 44R White/BlackConnection GPS_RXD+ 45T GreenORMultiple Frame GPS_RXD- 45R Green/BlackMultiple FrameBTS; RGD Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T RedConnection at Signal Ground (TDR-) 46R Red/BlackRGPS SecondaryFrame GPS_1PPS+ 47T BrownGPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/BlackGPS_Power_A 42T YellowGPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/BlackGPS_Power_B 43T BlueFor frame with GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/BlackRGD ExpansionPunchblock GPS_TXD+ 44T WhiteOR GPS_TXD- 44R White/BlackRGD/RGPS Multiple FrameBTS; RGPS Head GPS_RXD+ 45T GreenBTS; RGPS HeadConnection at GPS_RXD- 45R Green/BlackRGPS PrimaryFrame Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T RedMaster Frame (TDR-) 46R Red/BlackGPS_1PPS+ 47T BrownGPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/BlackReserved 48TMODEM Reserved 48RRGD/RGPS Chassis Ground 49T N/ANone No Connection 49R NoneReserved 50T NoneALARM Reserved 50R None 3
Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-12T1/E1 Span IsolationTable 3-2 describes the action required for span isolation.Isolate BTS from T1/E1 SpansNOTE At active sites, the OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and placeit out of service (OOS). DO NOT remove the span surgeprotectors until the OMC/CBSC has disabled the BTS.Table 3-2: T1/E1 Span IsolationStep Action1The OMC/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS.The Span Lines can be disabled by removing the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block. UsingTable 3-1 locate the span or spans which need to be disabled and remove the respective surgeprotector.NOTEIf a third party is used for span connectivity, the third party must be informed before disabling the spanline.3
LMF Operation68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-13LMF OperationPreparing the LMFBefore optimization can be performed, the LMF application softwaremust be installed and configured on a computer platform meetingMotorola-specified requirements (see Recommended Test Equipmentand Software in Chapter 1).NOTE For the LMF graphics to display properly, the computer platformmust be configured to display more than 256 colors. See theoperating system software instructions for verifying andconfiguring the display settings.Software and files for installing and updating the LMF are provided onCD ROM disks. The following items must be available:SLMF Program on CD ROMSCDF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from theCBSC)SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from theCBSC)The following section provides information and instructions forinstalling and updating the LMF software and files.LMF Operating System InstallationFollow the procedure in Table 3-3 to install the LMF operating system.Table 3-3: LMF Operating System InstallationStep Action1Insert the LMF Program CD ROM into the LMF CD ROM drive.- If the Setup screen is displayed, go to step 5.- If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to step 2.2Click on the Start button.3 Select Run.4In the Open box, enter d:\autorun and click on the OK button.NOTEIf applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter.5Follow the instructions displayed on the Setup screen.. . . continued on next page3
LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-14Table 3-3: LMF Operating System InstallationStep Action* IMPORTANTFirst Time Installations:- Install U/WIN (First)- Install Java Runtime Environment (Second)- Install LMF Software (Third)- Install BTS Binaries (Fourth)- Install/Create BTS Folders (Fifth)Any time you install U/WIN, you must install the LMF software because the installation of the LMFmodifies some of the files that are installed during the U/Win installation. Installing U/Winover-writes these modifications.NOTEThere are multiple binary image packages for installation on the CD-ROM. When prompted, choosethe load that corresponds to the switch release that you currently have installed. Perform the DeviceImages install after the WinLMF installation.If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may be available for binary updates. CDMA LMF Home DirectoryThe CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home directoryc:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF homedirectory will be referred to with the generic convention of:<x>:\<lmf home directory>Where:<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF homedirectory is located.<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMALMF is installedNOTE The CDMA LMF installation program creates the default homedirectory c:\wlmf when the CDMA LMF is installed.Copy CBSC CDF Files to the LMF ComputerBefore logging on to a BTS with the LMF to execute optimization/ATPprocedures, the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files must be obtainedfrom the CBSC and put in a bts-# folder in the LMF computer. Thisrequires creating versions of the CBSC CDF files on a DOS-formattedfloppy diskette and using the diskette to install the CDF files on theLMF computer.3
LMF Operation68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-15NOTE When copying CDF files, comply with the following to preventBTS login problems with the LMF.- The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf filenamesmust correspond to the locally assigned numbers for each BTSand its controlling CBSC.- The generic cbsc-1.cdf file supplied with the LMF will workwith locally numbered BTS CDF files. Using this file will notprovide a valid optimization unless the generic file is edited toreplace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers) with theoperational parameters used locally.The procedure in Table 3-4 lists the steps required to transfer the CDFfiles from the CBSC to the LMF computer. For any further information,refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide (Motorola part number68P64114A21) or the LMF Help screen..Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMFStep Action1Login to the CBSC workstation.2Insert a DOS-formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.3 Type eject -q and press <Enter>.4 Type mount and press <Enter>.NOTESLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number. Usethe explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname> (e.g., cd bts-248) and pressing <Enter>.6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS-formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf fileson the diskette by entering the following command:unix2dos <source filename> /floppy/no_name/<target filename>(e.g., unix2dos bts-248.cdf /floppy/no_name/bts-248.cdf).NOTESOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, use theUnix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows texteditor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on the LMFcomputer is, therefore, not recommended.SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copiedwith a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of thecommand string following a space (e.g., cp bts-248.cdf cbsc-6.cdf /floppy/na_name)8Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each bts-# that must be supported by the LMF.. . . continued on next page3
LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-16Table 3-4: Copying CBSC CDF Files to the LMFStep Action9When all required files have been copied to the diskette, type eject and press <Enter>.10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the LMF computer.12 Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf files into the LMF computer.13 Using Windows Explorer (or equivalent program), create a corresponding bts-# folder in the <lmfhome directory> directory for each bts-#.cdf/cbsc-#.cdf file pair copied from the CBSC.14 Use Windows Explorer (or equivalent program) to transfer the cbsc-#.cdf and bts-#.cdf files from thediskette to the corresponding <lmf home directory>\cdma\bts-# folders created in step 13. Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI ConnectionConfirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FRUsrequires establishing an MMI communication session between the LMFand the FRU. Using features of the Windows operating system, theconnection properties for an MMI session can be saved on the LMFcomputer as a named Windows HyperTerminal connection. Thiseliminates the need for setting up connection parameters each time anMMI session is required to support optimization.Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created onthe Windows desktop. Double clicking the shortcut icon will start theconnection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.Follow the procedures in Table 3-5 to establish a named HyperTerminalconnection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.NOTE There are differences between Windows NT and Windows 98 inthe menus and screens for creating a HyperTerminal connection.In the following procedure, items applicable to:- Windows NT will be identified with Win NT- Windows 98 will be identified with Win 983
LMF Operation68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-17Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI ConnectionStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs>Accessories2Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal orSFor Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double clickon the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click Close.(This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click NO.3When the Connection Description box opens:- Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window.- Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and- Click OK.4NOTEFor LMF configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as test equipment and aphysical port is available for COM2, select COM2 to prevent conflicts.From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select the RS-232 port to be usedfor the connection (e.g., COM1 or COM2 - Win NT - or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 - Win98), and click OK.5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS-232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second: 9600SData bits: 8SParity: NoneSStop bits: 1SFlow control: None6 Click OK.7Save the defined connection by selecting:File>Save8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File>Exit9 Click Yes to disconnect when prompted.10 Perform one of the following:SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12 orSFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories. . . continued on next page3
LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-18Table 3-5: Creating a Named Hyperlink Connection for MMI ConnectionStep Action11 Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.12 Highlight the newly created connection icon by moving the cursor over it (Win NT) or clicking on it(Win 98).13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.14 From the popup menu displayed, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop. Folder Structure OverviewThe CDMA LMF installation program creates the default home directoryc:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders) init. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA LMF homedirectory will be referred to with the generic convention of:<x>:\<lmf home directory>Where:<x> = the LMF computer drive letter where the CDMA LMF homedirectory is located<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMALMF is installed.Figure 3-3: LMF Folder Structureversion folder (A separate folder isrequired for each different version; forexample, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5)loads folder<x>:\ (drive letter)<lmf home directory> foldercdma foldercode folderdata folderBTS-nnn folders (A separate folder isrequired for each BTS where bts-nnn is theunique BTS number; for example, bts-163)3
LMF Operation68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-19LMF to BTS ConnectionThe LMF is connected to the LAN A or B connector located on the leftside of the frame’s lower air intake grill, behind the LAN Cable Accessdoor (see Figure 3-4).Table 3-6: LMF to BTS ConnectionStep Action1To gain access to the connectors, open the LAN Cable Access door, then pull apart the Velcro tapecovering the BNC “T” connector and slide out the computer service tray, if desired (see Figure 3-4).2Connect the LMF to the LAN A BNC connector via PCMCIA Ethernet Adapter with an unshieldedtwisted-pair (UTP) Adapter and 10BaseT/10Base2 converter (powered by an external AC/DCtransformer). If there is no login response, connect the LMF to the LAN B BNC connector. If there isstill no login response, see Table 6-1, Login Failure Troubleshooting Procedure.NOTE- Xircom Model PE3-10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the LMF Ethernetconnection to the frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DCtransformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.* IMPORTANTThe LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)must not touch the chassis during optimization.Figure 3-4: LMF Connection DetailRFDSEBAETIBLMF BNC “T” CONNECTIONSON LEFT SIDE OF FRAME(ETHERNET “A” SHOWN;ETHERNET “B” COVEREDWITH VELCRO TAPE)LMF COMPUTERTERMINAL WITHMOUSE PCMCIA ETHERNETADPATER & ETHERNETUTP ADAPTERUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE (RJ11CONNECTORS)10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTER CONNECTSDIRECTLY TO BNC T 115 VAC POWERCONNECTIONFW00168SC4812ET RF CABINETNOTE:Open LAN CABLE ACCESSdoor. Pull apart Velcro tape andgain access to the LAN A or LANB LMF BNC connector.3
LMF Operation 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-20Pinging the ProcessorsFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be be verified. Figure 3-5 represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration. The drawing depicts one (of two identical) links, A and B.Ping is a program that sends request packets to the LAN networkmodules to get a response from the specified “target” module.NOTE WinLMF (unreleased version 2.16.1.0.15 for example) has anoption in the LOGIN menu to ping the GLI prior to login.Follow the steps in Table 3-7 to ping each processor (on both LAN Aand LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.Figure 3-5: BTS Ethernet LAN Interconnect DiagramRF Expansion PortsPunchBlock Power Input27V RetAntenna’s1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B12RemoteASUGNDLugs50 Pair(Alarms/Punchblock20 Pair(RGPS)RGDBoardRGD/RGPSPower Input+27VMicro-waveRFGPSABIN OUTLAN19 MHz2 SecSpansAlamsModemSpans)RF Expansion PortsPunchBlock Power Input27V RetAntenna’s1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B12RemoteASUGNDLugs50 Pair(Alarms/Punchblock20 Pair(RGPS)RGDBoardRGD/RGPSPower Input+27VMicro-waveRFGPSABIN OUTLAN19 MHz2 SecSpansAlamsModemSpans)CHASSISGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩSIGNALGROUND50ΩINBTS(MASTER)OUTBTS(EXPANSION)CHASSISGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩSIGNALGROUND50ΩFW00199NOTE IMPORTANT: The Ethernet LAN A and B cables must beinstalled on each frame/enclosure before performing this test. Allother processor board LAN connections are made via thebackplanes.3
LMF Operation68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-21Table 3-7: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action1From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.2In the Open box, type ping and the GLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI3 in field BTS units.3Click on the OK button.4If the targeted module responds, text similar to the following is displayed:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255If there is no response the following is displayed:Request timed outIf the GLI3 fails to respond, it should be reset and re-pinged. If it still fails to respond, typicalproblems are shorted BNC to inter-frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and B link cables, or theGLI3 itself. Log into and out of the BTSTable 3-8: Logging into the BTSStep ActionNOTEThe LMF Mouse/Tracball must be attached if Windows and/or the GUI applications will be used.1Connect the LMF to the BTS as shown in .2Power-up the LMF. Allow the Windows operating system to come up.3Click the CDMA LMF desktop icon.4Click CDMA icon. Ths list of available BTS cell sites appears.5Click on the desired BTS (for example, BTS-6). If the IP Address and Port number are correct, pressLogin to BTS.6To keep the current IP Address for the next log in, click the Remember Modified Address box (acheck appears in the box).7To use the default IP Address setting, click on Use Defaults.3
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-22Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS FilesThese procedures must be followed prior to an initial BTS optimization,or anytime a new release of the BTS operating system software is to beloaded from the LMF to the BTS.Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-9 to create a bts directory anddownload files to that bts-specific directory. Perform this procedure onlyif the CDF files have not been previously loaded.Table 3-9: Downloading Site Specific BTS FilesStep ActionNOTEThe types of files that can be downloaded include calibration files (.cal extension) and CDF files(.cdf extension). Files may be compressed (indicated by a .Z extension).1Obtain the 3.5-in. diskette(s) containing the configuration data file and calibration data.2Enter the following UNIX command from the /usr/lmf directory, to create a BTS specificdirectory (if it does not already exist).mkdir bts-<bts#>3Enter the following UNIX command to change to the newly created directory:cd bts-<bts#>4Insert the first 3.5 inch floppy diskette. Verify disk is loaded with the proper BTS files/ versions bytyping the following at the (lmf): prompt: seedisk <cr>5To load the BTS files from the disk into the appropriate directory, enter the following at the (lmf):prompt: fromdisk <cr>NOTESCopy bts-#.cdf and (if they exist) bts-#.cal files to the /usr/lmf/bts-# directory. (# equatesto the actual BTS site number).SUnless sites use different device loads, create links to device files (as described in Table 3-10)rather than placing individual copies into each bts directory.6If files are compressed, use the uncompress *.Z command to unpack files. Download Files to the LMF - Master-bts-cdma FilesThese procedures must be followed prior to an initial BTS optimization,or anytime a new release of the BTS operating system software is to beloaded from the LMF to the BTS.Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-10 to create a bts-master-cdmadirectory, to download files, and to create softlinks to the device loadfiles into the appropriate bts- <bts#> subdirectory. (Always consultlatest software release notes as this is an interim procedure and is subjectto change).3
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-23Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loadsStep ActionNOTESIf the current LMF code needs to be installed on the LMF PC, or if more information on filemanagement, creating bts directories, or viewing CDF files is needed, refer to the.LMF UsersGuide.SThe types of files that can be downloaded include code (.hex or .bin extension) and data (.ddsextension) files. Files may be compressed (indicated by a .Z extension).1Enter the following UNIX command, from the /usr/lmf directory, to create a device load masterdirectory (if it does not already exist).mkdir bts-master-cdma2Enter the following UNIX command to change to the newly created directory:cd bts-master-cdma3Obtain the 3.5-in. diskette(s) containing the current release of the BTS operating code and/or datafiles.NOTEFile naming conventions for all processor boards and applicable files for each are listed below.Rename files using the mv UNIX command as required:Device File Name(s) SGLI <version>-gliboot.hex & gli.dds SBBX <version>-bbxboot.hex & bbx.ddsSBDC <version>-bdcboot.hex & bdc.ddsSMCC <version>-mccboot.hex.0501 & mcc.dds.0501SCSM <version>-csmboot.hex & csm.ddsSTSU tsuboot.hex4Insert the first 3.5 inch floppy diskette. Verify disk is loaded with the proper BTS files/versions bytyping the following at the (lmf): prompt: seedisk <cr>5To load the BTS files from the disk into the appropriate directory, enter the following at the (lmf):prompt: fromdisk <cr>6If files are compressed, use the uncompress *.Z command to unpack files. Rename files to matchthe naming conventions listed above if required.7Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each diskette that is a part of this load.NOTEAll older versions of files (and links to files) in the bts-master- bts-<bts#> subdirectories mustbe removed before beginning this procedure.. . . continued on next page3
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-24Table 3-10: Downloading and linking master-bts-cdma directory files for device loadsStep Action8Create softlinks to the device load and data load files in the bts-master-cdma directory using thefollowing UNIX commands:ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.hex /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.hex.* /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.dds /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/ln -s /usr/lmf/bts-master-cdma/*.dds.* /usr/lmf/bts-<bts#>/NOTEYou may need to specify specific file names in the command instead of using the * ”wildcard”character in order to link multiple versions of files in the same subdirectory. Using *.* will link ALLfiles in the directory. 3
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-25Create BTS Specific CDF FileFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-11 to create a BTS specific CDFfile, if one cannot be obtained from the OMCR/CBSC. (This is aninterim procedure and is subject to change).Table 3-11: Create BTS Specific CDF FileStep Action! CAUTIONIf you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice makingchanges to it, prior to altering the “real” one.NOTEFor more information on file management, creating bts directories, viewing/editing CDF files, referto LMF Users Guide.1Determine the CDF file, currently loaded on the LMF, is closest to the configuration at the site. Use ageneric CDF file that equips all devices, if possible. If this is an OMNI site, use an OMNI CDF file,if SECTOR, use SECTOR CDF file.2List the contents of the bts-<bts#> directory by entering the ls command at the (lmf) promptfollowed by a <cr>, to verify the CDF file for the site does not already exist.3Enter the following command to copy an existing CDF file on the LMF hard drive to the new BTSdirectory.cp /usr/lmf/bts-src_<bts#>.cdf /usr/lmf/bts- dest_<bts#>.cdf NOTEThe following step is for LMF software releases version 5 and 6 only.4Globally change the BTS ID in the new CDF file using the following UNIX commands:vi bts-new_<bts#>.cdf:1,$ s/Id1 = old_<bts#>/Id1 = new_<bts#>:1,$ s/old_<bts#>_/new_<bts#>_Include the underscore after the old and new bts # in the above command:1,$ s/BTS\[old_<bts#>/BTS\[new_<bts#>:wqNOTEYou should now be able to log into the bts using the new CDF file. If you search for the old BTS #, itshould be gone. You will have to edit the CDF file (using the vi editor) as far as BBX, MCC, etc.equipage is concerned.Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load Version and Site TypeFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-12 to update the existing BTSspecific CDF file NextLoad parameter, to reflect the current device loadversion to be downloaded and verify the correct Site Type. (This is aninterim procedure and is subject to change).CAUTION Device load version in the CDF file must match the currentversion loaded at the OMCR/CBSC.3
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-26Table 3-12: Update BTS Specific CDF File Device Load VersionStep Action! CAUTIONIf you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice makingchanges to it, prior to altering the “real” one.* IMPORTANTCDF files obtained from the OMCR/CBSC are modified by DELTA information being appended tothe end of the CDF file. The information in the DELTA fields take precedence over information in the“core CDF file” For example: If NextLoad=‘‘1.2.3.4.5” for BBX 1 was specified in the CDF file, andthere was a DELTA entry specifying NextLoad=‘‘2.3.4.5.6” appended to the CDF file for the sameBBX, 2.3.4.5.6 would be the version used.There are two ways resolve this. Edit both the DELTA and “core” areas of the file to reflect the sameversion, or make sure the delta information is transferred to the main CDF file and delete all DELTACDF file entries.1Globally change the device load version number in the new CDF file using the following UNIXcommands:vi bts-new_<bts#>.cdf:1,$ s/x.x.x.x.x/y.y.y.y.yWhere: x.x.x.x.x and y.y.y.y.y represent the old and new version number, respectively.:wqNOTEYou should now be able to download all devices at the BTS with the current device load version.2Verify the SiteType and SSType entries in the CDF file (under the BTS subheading) reflect thefollowing information. See example of applicable fields of CDF file below.(CDMA only; 1900 MHz example shown):BTS[#] = {....,SiteType=3,SSType=16...},Valid SiteTypes (SC9600=1, SC9600(Mixed)=2, SC2400=3, SC2400(Mixed)=4, SC600=5)Valid SSTypes (CDMA800MHz=8, CDMA1900MHz=16, CDMA900MHz=32)Update Antenna Mapping FilesEarlier release versions may require the antenna.map file to beupdated. There are two antenna mapping files. These areantenna.map and antenna.asu.Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-13 to check the antenna mappingfile and update as needed.3
Download Files to the LMF - Site Specific BTS Files68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-27Table 3-13: Update Antenna Mapping FilesStep Action! CAUTIONIf you are not familiar with the UNIX vi editor, create a “dummy” CDF file, and practice makingchanges to it, prior to altering the “real” one.NOTEFor more information on file management, creating bts directories, viewing/editing CDF files, refer tothe LMF Users Guide.1View the antenna.map file (see below) and verify the Xcvrs listed in the CDF file (and that areequipped in the BTS) are also listed in the antenna.map file (for both RX and TX tables). Makesure the antenna.map file has enough RX and TX antennas listed to cover the number of sectorsindicated by CDF’s SiteConf parameter.Example of Antenna Map FileR --- Rx --- -- Sec -- ----- Xcvrs -----R 1:M :RX1: 1 :1,4,5,8R 2:D :RX2: 1 :1,4,5,8R 3:M :RX3: 2 :2,4,6,8R 4:D :RX4: 2 :2,4,6,8R 5:M :RX5: 3 :3,4,7,8R 6:D :RX6: 3 :3,4,7,8T --- Tx --- -- Sec -- ----- Xcvrs -----T 1:0 :TX1: 1 :1,4T 2:0 :TX2: 2 :2,4T 3:0 :TX3: 3 :3,4T 4:0 :TX4: 1 :5,8T 5:0 :TX5: 2 :6,8T 6:0 :TX6: 3 :7,82Verify all RX and TX antennas listed in the file antenna.map are also listed in the antenna.asufile.NOTEThe antenna.asu file is required only if the BTS is equipped with RFDS. Be sure that the informationin antenna files matches your actual configuration.3
Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-28Operating the LMFBasic OperationNOTE The terms “CDMA LMF” and “WinLMF” are interchangeableThe CDMA LMF allows the user to work in the two following operatingenvironments which are accessed using the specified desktop icon:SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF iconSCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CLI iconThe GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operatingenvironment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to theuser to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit theresults of optimization and calibration actions.Basic operation of the LMF GUI includes the following:SSelecting and deselecting BTS devicesSEnabling devicesSDisabling devicesSResetting devicesSObtaining device statusSSorting a status report windowFor detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the CDMA LMF Operator’s Guide, 68P64114A78.Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only onehandler can be running at one time. The architectural design is such thatthe GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI touse the same handler.When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds anduses an in-progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI.This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS loginsession.If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (thishappens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts theGUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the userstarts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warningmessage:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure that you want to start the application?This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts theapplication. Selecting no terminates the application.3
Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-29CLI Format ConventionsThe CLI command can be broken down in the following way:SVerbSDevice including device identifier parametersSSwitchSOption parameters consisting of:- Keywords- Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value- Parameter valuesSpaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and optionparameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.Following is an example of a CLI command.measure bbx-<bts_id>-<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5Refer to the LMF CLI Commands (68P09251A59) for a completeexplanation of the CLI commands and their usage.Logging into a BTSNOTE Be sure that the correct bts-#.cdf and cbsc-#.cdf file is used forthe BTS. These should be the CDF files that are provided for theBTS by the CBSC. Failure to use the correct CDF files canresult in wrong results. Failure to use the correct CDF files tolog into a live (traffic carrying) site can shut down the site.Logging into a BTS establishes a communications link between the BTSand the CDMA LMF. You may be logged into one or more BTS’s at atime, but only one LMF may be logged into each BTS.Before attempting to log into the BTS, confirm the CDMA LMF isproperly connected to the BTS (see Figure 3-4). Follow the procedure inTable 3-14 to log into a BTS.PrerequisitesBefore attempting to login to a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared.SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF and CBSC file exists.SThe LMF is correctly installed and prepared, and the LMF computerwas connected to the BTS before starting the Windows operatingsystem and LMF software. If necessary, restart the computer afterconnecting it to the BTS (see Table 3-6 and Figure 3-4).BTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-14 to log into a BTS when using theGUI environment3
Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-30Table 3-14: BTS GUI Login ProcedureStep Action1Start the LMF GUI environment by double clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF’s notrunning).NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMFAre you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).3If no base stations are displayed in the Available Base Stations pick list, double click on the CDMAicon.4Click on the desired BTS number.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2 for a field BTS) if not correctly displayed in the IPAddress box.NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for MGLI-1 in field BTS units. 128.0.0.1 is the default IP addressfor MGLI-2.7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.8Select the Multi-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop-down list (defaultis MPC) to a device corresponding to your BTS configuration if required.NOTEWhen performing RX tests on expansion frames, do not choose EMPC if the test equipment isconnected to the starter frame.9Click on the Use a Tower Top Amplifier, if applicable.10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS is displayed.)NOTESIf you attempt to log in to a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a devicefailure).SIf the MGLI is OOS_ROM (blue), it will have to be downloaded with code before other devices canbe seen.SIf the MGLI is OOS-RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen. BTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 3-15 to log into a BTS when using theGUI environment3
Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-31Table 3-15: BTS CLI Login ProcedureStep Action1Double click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not already running).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session when the CLI environment was started, the CLI sessionwill be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts-<bts#> host=<host> port=<port>where:host = MGLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this isfirst login to this BTS).port = IP port of the TS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first login tothis BTS)Logging OutLogging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and theCLI operating environments.NOTE The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection to aBTS. If a BTS is logged into in both the GUI and the CLIenvironments at the same time, logging out of the BTS in eitherenvironment will log out of it for both. When either a login orlogout is performed in the CLI window, there is no GUIindication that the login or logout has occurred.Logging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-16 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 3-16: BTS GUI Logout ProcedureStep Action1Click on the BTS tab menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pulldown menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).3Click on Yes or press the Enter key to confirm logout. You are returned to the Login tab.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time as theGUI, a Logout Error popup message will appear stating the system should not log out of the BTS.When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for further operations.4If a Logout Error popup message appears stating that the system could not log out of the Base Stationbecause the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to step 5.5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout popup, and click OK inthe Logout Error popup which appears again.6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it. 3
Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-32Logging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 3-16 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 3-17: BTS CLI Logout ProcedureStep Action1* IMPORTANTIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be donewith it in the GUI, proceed to step 2.Logout of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts- <bts#>A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>12:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted Command=logout bts-3312:22:58.028 Command Received and Accepted12:22:58.028 Command Successfully Completed REASON_CODE=”No Reason”2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:exitA response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:Killing background processes.... Establishing an MMI Communication SessionFor those procedures that require MMI communications between theLMF and BTS FRUs, follow the procedure in Table 3-18 to initiate thecommunication session.Table 3-18: Establishing MMI CommunicationsStep Action1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure that requiresMMI communication session.2Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windowsdesktop shortcut.NOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection fromthe Windows Start menu by selecting:Programs>Accessories>Hyperterminal>HyperTerminal><Named HyperTerminal Connection(e.g., MMI Session).3Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe LMF computer Enter key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained. 3
Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-33Figure 3-6: CDMA LMF Computer Common MMI ConnectionsNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8-PIN TO 10-PINRS-232 CABLE (P/N30-09786R01)RS-232 CABLE8-PINCDMA LMFCOMPUTERTo FRU MMI portDB9-TO-DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2FW00687BTS Download OverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture, factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSCusing the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) codeand data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user beforethe BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routinemaintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is onlydone in unusual situations where the resident ROM code release level inthe device is not compatible with the required release level of the siteoperating software and the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS toperform the download. An example would be a BTS loaded with R16.0software where a GLI which is factory-loaded with R9.2.x or earlierROM code must be installed to replace a malfunctioning GLI.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROMcode file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.ROM code must be manually selected for download.NOTE The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s are ROM codeloaded at the factory.3
Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-34ROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded will change toOOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when thedownload is completed. A compatible revision-level RAM code mustthen be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM andRAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance.The compatible device code release levels for the BSS software releasebeing used are listed in the Version Matrix section of the SCt CDMARelease Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROM containing the BSSsoftware).Procedures to load ROM code are located in Appendix J.RAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAMcode file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM codecan be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selectedautomatically if the file is in the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is thedownload code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameterof the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have thecorrect hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.RAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device willchange to OOS_RAM (yellow).When code is downloaded to an MGLI or GLI, the LMF automaticallyalso downloads data and then enables the MGLI. When enabled, theMGLI will change to INS_ACT (bright green). A redundant GLI willnot be automatically enabled and will remain OOS_RAM (yellow).When the redundant GLI is manually commanded to enable through theLMF, it will change state to INS_SBY (olive green).For non-GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM(yellow).The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:SMaster Group Line Interface (MGLI)SRedundant GLISClock Synchronization Module (CSM) (Only if new revision codemust be loaded)SMulti Channel CDMA (MCC24E, MCC8E, or MCC-1X) cardsSBroadband Transceiver (BBX2 or BBX-1X) cardsSRFDS Test Subscriber Interface Card (TSIC) or RFDS-1X RFDSPROCessor (RPROC) card, if RFDS is installed3
Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-35NOTE IMPORTANT: The MGLI must be successfully downloadedwith RAM code and data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) statusbefore downloading any other device. The RAM code downloadprocess for an MGLI automatically downloads data and thenenables the MGLI.Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsDevices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is notcompatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Beforedownloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow theprocedure in Table 3-19 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with thecorrect ROM code for the software release used by the BSS.PrerequisiteIdentify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release beingused on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of theSCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape or CD-ROMcontaining the BSS software).Table 3-19: Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsStep Action1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 3-14).2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the BTS menu bar.3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI3.4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software release being used on theBSS, log out of the BTS, disconnect the LMF computer, reconnect the span lines as described inTable 5-6, and have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices.5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being used, be sure the span linesare disabled as outlined in Table 3-2 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data. Download RAM Code and Data to MGLI and GLIFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-20 to download the RAM code anddata to the MGLI and other installed GLI devices.PrerequisitesSPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for eachof the devices to be loaded (refer to Table 3-3).SThe LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer toTable 3-6), and islogged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 3-14).Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI DevicesStep Action1Be sure the LMF will use the correct software release for code and data downloads by performing thefollowing steps:1a - Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Tools > Update NextLoad > CDMA from thepull-down menus.. . . continued on next page3
Operating the LMF 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-36Table 3-20: Download and Enable MGLI and GLI DevicesStep Action1b - Click on the BTS to be loaded.-- The BTS will be highlighted.1c - Click the button next to the correct code version for the software release being used.-- A black dot will appear in the button circle.1d - Click Save.1e - Click OK to close each of the advisory boxes which appear.2Prepare to download code to the MGLI by clicking on the device.3 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus.- A status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.4 Click OK to close the status window.- The MGLI will automatically be downloaded with data and enabled.5Once the MGLI is enabled, load and enable additional installed GLIs by clicking on the devices andrepeating steps 3 and 4.6 Click OK to close the status window for the additional GLI devices. Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI DevicesDownloads to non-GLI devices can be performed individually for eachdevice or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action. RAMcode and data are downloaded to non-GLI devices in separate steps.NOTE CSM devices are RAM code-loaded at the factory. RAM code isdownloaded to CSMs only if a newer software version needs tobe loaded.NOTE When downloading to multiple devices, the download may failfor some of the devices (a time-out occurs). These devices canbe loaded individually after completing the multiple download.Follow the steps in Table 3-21 to download RAM code and data tonon-GLI devices.Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI DevicesStep Action1Select the target CSM, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking on them.2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull-down menus.- A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.3Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.NOTEAfter a BBX, CSM, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and has changed to theOOS_RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.. . . continued on next page3
Operating the LMF68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-37Table 3-21: Download RAM Code and Data to Non-GLI DevicesStep Action4To download data, select the target CSM, MCC and/or BBX device(s).5 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select select Download > Data in the pull-down menus.- A status report is displayed showing the results of the download for each selected device.6 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed. 3
System Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-38System TestsSelect CSM Clock SourceA CSM can one of have three different clock sources. The Select CSMSource function can be used to select the clock source for each of thethree inputs. This function is only used if the clock source for a CSMneeds to be changed. The Clock Source function provides the followingclock source options.SLocal GPSSRemote GPSSHSO (only for source 2 & 3)SHSOX (only for source 2 & 3)SLFR (only for source 2 & 3)S10 MHz (only for source 2 & 3)SNONE (only for source 2 & 3)PrerequisitesMGLI=INS_ACT, CSM= OOS_RAM or INS_ACTTable 3-22: Select CSM Clock SourceStep Action1Select the applicable CSM(s).2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the CSM/MAWI menu item.4Click on the Select Clock Source menu item. A clock source selection window is displayed.5Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the relatedcheck box if you do not want the displayed pick list item to be used.6Click on the OK button. A status report window is displayed showing the results of the selectionaction.7Click on the OK button to close the status report window. Enable CSMsEach BTS CSM system features two CSM boards per site. In a typicaloperation, the primary CSM locks its Digital Phase Locked Loop(DPLL) circuits to GPS signals. These signals are generated by either anon-board GPS module (RF-GPS) or a remote GPS receiver (R-GPS).The CSM2 card is required when using the R-GPS. The GPS receiver(mounted on CSM 1) is used as the primary timing reference andsynchronizes the entire cellular system. CSM 2 provides redundancy (butdoes not have a GPS receiver).The BTS may be equipped with a LORAN-C LFR, HSO, or external 10MHz Rubidium source which the CSM can use as a secondary timingreference. The HSOX is used for expansion frames. In all cases, theCSM monitors and determines what reference to use at a given time.3
System Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-39NOTE For RF-GPS, verify the CSM configured with the GPS receiver“daughter board” is installed in the frame’s CSM 1 slot beforecontinuing.Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-23 to enable the CSMs installed inthe C-CCP shelves.Table 3-23: Enable CSMsStep Action1Click on the target CSM.From the Device pull down, select Enable.NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, enable CSM-2 firstA status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.Click OK to close the status report window.NOTEFAIL may be shown in the status table for enable action. If Waiting For Phase Lock is shown in theDescription field, the CSM changes to the Enabled state after phase lock is achieved.CSM 1 houses the GPS receiver. The enable sequence can take up to one hour (see below).* IMPORTANTThe GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained and operatedby the United States Department of Defense (D.O.D.). The D.O.D. periodically alters satellite orbits;therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INS contains an “almanac”that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for the GPSreceiver “almanac” to be updated.Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3-D position fixfor a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSM will come in service. (In some cases, the GPS receiverneeds to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).2NOTEIf equipped with two CSMs, CSM-1 should be bright green (INS-ACT) and CSM-2 should be darkgreen (INS-STY)If more than an hour has passed, refer to CSM Verification, see Figure 3-7 and Table 3-26 to determinethe cause.NOTEAfter the CSMs have been successfully enabled, observe the PWR/ALM LEDs are steady green(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state). Enable MCCsThis procedure configures the MCC and sets the “TX fine adjust”parameter. The “TX fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in theBTS (approximately 3 mS).Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-24 to enable the MCCs installed inthe C-CCP shelves.3
System Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-40NOTE The MGLI and CSM must be downloaded and enabled, beforedownloading and enabling the MCC.Table 3-24: Enable MCCsStep Action1Click on the target MCC(s) or from the Select pull down menu choose MCCs.2From the Device menu, select EnableA status report is displayed confirming change in the device(s) status.3 Click OK to close the status report window. Clock Synchronization Manager System TimeThe primary function of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM)boards (slots 1 and 2) is to maintain CDMA system time. The CSM inslot 1 is the primary timing source while slot 2 provides redundancy.The CSM2 card (CSM second generation) is required when using theremote GPS receiver (R-GPS). R-GPS uses a GPS receiver in theantenna head that has a digital output to the CSM2 card. CSM2 can havea daughter card as a local GPS receiver to support an RF-GPS signal.The CSM2 switches between the primary and redundant units (slots 1and 2) upon failure or command. CDMA Clock Distribution Cards(CCDs) buffer and distribute even-second reference and 19.6608 MHzclocks. CCD 1 is married to CSM 1 and CCD 2 is married to CSM 2. Afailure on CSM 1 or CCD 1 cause the system to switch to redundantCSM 2 and CCD 2.Each CSM2 board features an ovenized, crystal oscillator that provides19.6608 MHz clock, even second pulse, and 3 MHz referenced to theselected synchronization source (see Table 3-26):SGPS: local/RF-GPS or remote/R-GPSSLORAN-C Frequency Receiver (LFR) or High Stability Oscillator(HSO)SExternal reference oscillator sourcesFault management has the capability of switching between the GPSsynchronization source and the LFR/HSO backup source in the event ofa GPS receiver failure on CSM 1. During normal operation, the CSM 1board selects GPS as the primary source (see Table 3-26). The sourceselection can also be overridden via the LMF or by the system software.Synchronization between the primary and redundant CSM CCD pairs, aswell as the LFR or HSO back-up to GPS synchronization, increasesreliability.LFR/HSOThe CSM handles the overall configuration and status monitoringfunctions of the LFR/HSO. In the event of GPS failure, the LFR/HSO iscapable of maintaining synchronization initially established by the GPSreference signal.3
System Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-41The LFR requires an active external antenna to receive LORAN RFsignals. Timing pulses are derived from this signal, which issynchronized to Universal Time Coordinates (UTC) and GPS time. TheLFR can maintain system time indefinately after initial GPS lock.The HSO is a high stability 10 MHz oscillator with the necessaryinterface to the CSMs. The HSO is typically installed in thosegeographical areas not covered by the LORAN-C system. Since theHSO is a free-standing oscillator, system time can only be maintainedfor 24 hours after 24 hours of GPS lock.Upgrades and Expansions: LFR2/HSO2/HSOXLFR2/HSO2 (second generation cards) both export a timing signal to theexpansion frames. The associated expansion frames require anHSO-expansion (HSOX) whether the starter frame has an LFR2 or anHSO2. The HSOX accepts input from the starter frame and interfaceswith the CSM cards in the expansion frame. LFR and LFR2 use thesame source code in source selection (see Table 3-26). HSO, HSO2, andHSOX use the same source code in source selection (see Table 3-26).NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSM boardwarm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillatorfrequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-upallows the Rubidium standard timebase to stabilize in frequencybefore any measurements are made.CSM Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the CSMboards before performing the RF path verification tests. Parts of thisprocedure will be repeated for final verification after the overalloptimization has been completed.Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Follow the steps outlined in Table 3-25 to set up test equipment.Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action1a For local GPS (RF-GPS): Verify a CSM board with a GPS receiver is installed in primary CSM slot 1and that CSM-1 is INS.NOTEThis is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN1145 on the board in slot 1.1b For Remote GPS (RGPS):Verify a CSM2 board is installed in primary slot 1 and that CSM-1 is INS.NOTEThis is verified by checking the board ejectors for kit number SGLN4132ED or later.2Remove CSM-2 (if installed) and connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modemboard) to the MMI port on CSM-1 (see Figure 3-7).3
System Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-42Table 3-25: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & LFR/HSO Verification)Step Action3Reinstall CSM-2.4Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-5)NOTEThe LMF program must be running when a Hyperterminal session is started.5When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSM> prompt appears.CAUTION Connect GPS antenna to the (GPS) RF connector ONLY. Dam-age to the GPS antenna and/or receiver can result if the GPS an-tenna is inadvertently connected to any other RF connector.Figure 3-7: CSM MMI Terminal ConnectionNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS-232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9-TO-DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFW00372CSM board shownremoved from frame19.6 MHZ TESTPOINT REFERENCEEVEN SECONDTICK TEST POINTREFERENCEGPS RECEIVERANTENNA INPUTGPS RECEIVERMMI SERIALPORTANTENNA COAXCABLEREFERENCEOSCILLATOR9-PIN TO 9-PINRS-232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSM:Green = IN-SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS-RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = FaultLED (NOTE 1)3
System Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-43GPS Initialization/VerificationFollow the steps outlined in Table 3-26 to connect to CSM-1 installed inthe C-CCP shelf, verifying that it is functioning normally.Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus- Observe the following typical response:CSM Status INS:ACTIVE Slot A Clock MASTER.Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to display the current status of the Loran and theGPS receivers.sources- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with LFR:N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid-------------------------------------------------------------------------0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes1 LFR CHA Secondary 4 YES Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes2 Not UsedCurrent reference source number: 0- Observe the following typical response for systems equipped with HSO:Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 No N/A timed-out* Timed-out* No*NOTE “Timed-out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. “Not-Present” or“Faulty” should not be displayed. If the HSO does not appear as one of the sources, then configure theHSO as a back-up source by entering the following command at the CSM> prompt:ss 1 12After a maximum of 15 minutes, the Rubidium oscillator should reach operational temperature and theLED on the HSO should now have changed from red to green. After the HSO front panel LED haschanged to green, enter sources <cr> at the CSM> prompt. Verify that the HSO is now a validsource by confirming that the bold text below matches the response of the “sources” command.The HSO should be valid within one (1) minute, assuming the DPLL is locked and the HSO rubidiumoscillator is fully warmed.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good 3 0 Yes1HSO Backup 4 Yes N/A xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx Yes. . . continued on next page3
System Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-44Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action3HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMCR determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:- If LED is RED, verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 5 minutes. After oscillatortemperature is stable, LED should go GREEN Wait for this to occur before continuing !- If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective- Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED to prevent any possible board warpage4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):- GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.- At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring the site up.. . . continued on next page3
System Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-45Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action5Enter the following command at the CSM> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus- Observe the following typical response:24:06:08 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.24:06:08 Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds.24:06:08 24:06:08 Recent Change Data:24:06:08 Antenna cable delay 0 ns.24:06:08 Initial position: lat 117650000 msec, lon -350258000 msec, height 0 cm (GPS)24:06:08 Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.24:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Status:24:06:08 Position hold: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm24:06:08 Current position: lat 118245548 msec, lon -350249750 msec, height 20270 cm(GPS)24:06:08 8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.24:06:08 Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 0.24:06:08 Date & Time: 1998:01:13:21:36:1124:06:08 GPS Receiver Status Byte: 0x0824:06:08 Chan:0, SVID: 16, Mode: 8, RSSI: 148, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:1, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 132, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:2, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 121, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:3, SVID: 14, Mode: 8, RSSI: 110, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:4, SVID: 25, Mode: 8, RSSI: 83, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:5, SVID: 3, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:6, SVID: 19, Mode: 8, RSSI: 115, Status: 0xa824:06:08 Chan:7, SVID: 22, Mode: 8, RSSI: 122, Status: 0xa824:06:08 24:06:08 GPS Receiver Identification:24:06:08 COPYRIGHT 1991-1996 MOTOROLA INC. 24:06:08 SFTW P/N # 98-P36830P 24:06:08 SOFTWARE VER # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE REV # 8 24:06:08 SOFTWARE DATE 6 AUG 1996 24:06:08 MODEL # B3121P1115 24:06:08 HDWR P/N # _ 24:06:08 SERIAL # SSG0217769 24:06:08 MANUFACTUR DATE 6B07 24:06:08 OPTIONS LIST IB 24:06:08 The receiver has 8 channels and is equipped with TRAIM.6Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):- At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.- GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!- Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0 MSL = 1).. . . continued on next page3
System Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-46Table 3-26: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:- If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF file).- If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data currently in the CDF file is assumed to beaccurate. GPS will not automatically survey and update its position.- The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.- GPS antenna connector center conductor measures approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.- There is no more than 4.5 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.- Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.8Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to verify that the CSM is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSM is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed-up proceed to step 9)CSM>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left. ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSM into warm-up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.9Observe the following typical response if the CSM is warmed up.c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17486 off: -11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-2013175c:17470 off: -11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:-2013175,-201317510 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):- Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than -60 (equates to 3 µs limit).- Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3 µs limit).- TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.11 Enter the following commands at the CSM> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug dpllp 3
System Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-47LORAN-C Initialization/VerificationTable 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/VerificationStep Action Note1At the CSM> prompt, enter lstatus <cr> to verify that the LFR is in trackingmode. A typical response is:CSM> lstatus <cr>LFR St ti St tLFR Station Status:Clock coherence: 512 >5930M 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:5930X 52/64 dn -1 S/N Flag:5990 47/55 dB -6 S/N Flag:7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N FlThis must be greaterthan 100 before LFRbecomes a valid source.7980M 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:7980W 65/69 dB 14 S/N Flag: . PLL Station . >7980X 48/54 dB -4 S/N Flag:7980Y 46/58 dB -8 S/N Flag:E7980Z 60/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N FlagThis shows the LFR islocked to the selectedPLL station.8290M 50/65 dB 0 S/N Flag:8290W 73/79 dB 20 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8290W 58/61 dB 6 S/N Flag:8970M 89/95 dB 29 S/N Flag:8970W 62/66 dB 10 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970X 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:8970Y 73/79 dB 19 S/N Flag:8970Z 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flg9610M 62/65 dB 10 S/N Flag:9610V 58/61 dB 8 S/N Flag:9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N Flag:E9610W 47/49 dB -4 S/N Flag:E9610X 46/57 dB -5 S/N Flag:E9610Y 48/54 dB -5 S/N Flag:E9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag9610Z 65/69 dB 12 S/N Flag:9940M 50/53 dB -1 S/N Flag:S9940W 49/56 dB -4 S/N Flag:E9940W 49/56 dB 4 S/N Flag:E9940Y 46/50 dB-10 S/N Flag:E9960M 73/79 dB 22 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960W 51/60 dB 0 S/N Flag:9960X 51/63 dB -1 S/N Flag:9960Y 59/67 dB 8 S/N Flag:9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Fl9960Z 89/96 dB 29 S/N Flag:LFR Task State: lfr locked to station 7980WLFR Recent Change Data:Search List: 5930 5990 7980 8290 8970 9940 9610 9960 >PLL GRI: 7980WLFR Master, reset not needed, not the reference source.CSM>This search list and PLLdata must match theconfiguration for thegeographical locationof the cell site.. . . continued on next page3
System Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-48Table 3-27: LORAN-C Initialization/VerificationStep NoteAction2Verify the following LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type):- Locate the “dot” that indicates the current phase locked station assignment (assigned by MM).- Verify that the station call letters are as specified in site documentation as well as M X Y Zassignment.- Verify the S/N ratio of the phase locked station is greater than 8.3At the CSM> prompt, enter sources <cr> to display the current status of the the LORAN receiver.- Observe the following typical response.Num Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Local GPS Primary 4 Yes Good -3 0 Yes1 LFR ch A Secondary 4 Yes Good -2013177 -2013177 Yes2 Not usedCurrent reference source number: 14LORAN LFR information (highlighted above in boldface type) is usually the #1 reference source(verified from left to right).* IMPORTANTIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify:- The LFR antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.- The antenna pre-amplifier power and calibration twisted pair connections are intact and < 91.4 m(300 ft) in length.- A dependable connection to suitable Earth Ground is in place.- The search list and PLL station for cellsite location are correctly configured .NOTELFR functionality should be verified using the “source” command (as shown in Step 3). Use theunderlined responses on the LFR row to validate correct LFR operation.5Close the hyperterminal window. 3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-49Calibration and Test EquipmentConnecting Test Equipment to the BTSThe following test equipment is required to perform calibration and ATPtests:SLMFSCommunications system analyzer model supported by the LMFSPower meter model supported by the LMF (required when using theHP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)SNon-radiating transmit line termination loadSDirectional coupler and in-line attenuatorSRF cables and adaptersRefer to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29 for an overview of connections fortest equipment currently supported by the LMF. In addition, see thefollowing figures:SFigure 3-8 and Figure 3-9 show cable calibration test setup.SFigure 3-10, Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-13 show the test setconnections for TX calibration.SFigure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show test set connections for IS-95 A/Boptimization/ATP testsSFigure 3-15 through Figure 3-18 shows test set connections forIS-95 A/B/C optimization/ATP tests.SFigure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show typical TX and RX ATP setup witha directional coupler (shown with and without RFDS).Test Equipment GPIB Address SettingsAll test equipment is controlled by the LMF through an IEEE-488/GPIBbus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of test equipment must havea GPIB address set which the LMF will recognize. The standard addresssettings used by the LMF for the various types of test equipment itemsare as follows:SSignal generator address: 1SPower meter address: 13SCommunications system analyzer: 18Using the procedures included in the Setting GPIB Addresses section ofAppendix D-1, verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of eachpiece of test equipment used to match the above.Supported Test SetsCAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment, all TX test connectionsmust be through the directional coupler and in-line attenuator asshown in the test setup illustrations.3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-50IS-95 A/B TestingOptimization and ATP testing for IS-95A/B sites or carriers may beperformed using one of the following test equipment:SCyberTestSAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generator andHP-437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generatorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935)SHewlett-Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface for 1.9 GHz PCSInterface) and HP-437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) - optionalSRubidium Standard Timebase - optionalCDMA2000 1X OperationOptimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers maybe performed using the following test equipment:SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generatorSAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generatorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for1X FERNOTE E4432B signal generator for 1X FER needs to have the optionsUN8,1E5, and 201.Test Equipment PreparationSee Appendix F for specific steps to prepare each type of test set andpower meter to perform calibration and ATP .3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-51Test Equipment Connection ChartsTo use the following charts to identify necessary test equipmentconnections, locate the communications system analyzer being used inthe COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read downthe column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of thetest cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the endconnection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriateequipment and/or BTS connector.IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment ConnectionsTable 3-28 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting IS-95A/B only which meetsMotorola standards and is supported by the LMF.Table 3-28: IS-95A/B-only Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNAL Cyber-Test AdvantestR3465 HP 8921A HP 8921W/PCS PowerMeter GPIBInterface LMFAttenuator&DirectionalCoupler BTSEVEN SECONDSYNCHRONIZATION EVENSEC REF EVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK TIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB GPIB SERIALPORTHP-IB HP-IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50WTX1-6RFIN/OUT RFIN/OUT 20 DBATTEN. BTSPORTRX TESTCABLES RFGEN OUT RF OUT50WRX1-6DUPLEXOUT RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORHP-IB3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-52CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B-capable Test EquipmentConnectionsTable 3-29 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X andIS-95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by theLMF.Table 3-29: CDMA2000 1X/IS-95A/B Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNALAgilent8935(Option200 orR2K) AdvantestR3267 AgilentE4406AAgilentE4432SignalGen.AdvantestR3562SignalGenerator PowerMeter GPIBInterface LMFAttenuator&DirectionalCoupler BTSEVEN SECONDSYNCHRONIZATIONEVENSECONDSYNC IN EXT TRIGIN19.6608 MHZCLOCK EXT REFIN MOD TIMEBASE INCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS10 MHZOUTGP-IBHP-IB GP-IB GPIB SERIALPORTGPIB GPIBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50 WTX1-620 DBATTEN. BTSPORTSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORHP-IBPATTERNTRIG INEXT REFINRF INPUT50 WRX TESTCABLES RF OUT50 WDUPLEXOUT RF OUTPUT50 WRX1-610 MHZ 10 MHZ OUT(SWITCHED) SYNTHE REF IN10 MHZINTRIGGERINEXT TRIGSIGNAL SOURCECONTROLLEDSERIAL I/OSERIALI/O SERIALI/O10 MHZREF OUT* WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS-95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX TESTING.*3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-53Equipment Warm-upNOTE Warm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutes prior toperforming the BTS optimization procedure. This assures BTSstability and contributes to optimization accuracy.- Time spent running initial or normal power-up,hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download counts aswarm-up time.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTS TXOUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channels keyed.- At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place the antenna(sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS. Failure to doso can result in serious personal injury and/or equipmentdamage.Automatic Cable Calibration Set-upFigure 3-8 and Figure 3-9 show the cable calibration setup for the testsets supported by the LMF. The left side of the diagram depicts thelocation of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item,and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 3-33provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.Manual Cable CalibrationIf manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures inAppendix Figure 3-8.3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-54Figure 3-8: Cable Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest, Agilent 8935, Advantest R3465, and HP 8921AMotorola CyberTestAdvantest Model R3465RF OUT 50ΩINPUT 50ΩRF GEN OUTANT INSUPPORTED TEST SETS100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDCTESTSETC. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP20 DB IN-LINEATTENUATORCALIBRATION SET UPN-N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The 30 dB directional coupler is not usedwith the Cybertest test set. The TX cable isconnected directly to the Cybertest test set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest testset. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)N-N FEMALEADAPTER50 ΩΤERM.Agilent 8935 Series E6380A(formerly HP 8935)DUPLEXOUTANTINHewlett Packard Model HP 8921ANote: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannotbe used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATIONDUPLEXOUT ANTIN3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-55Figure 3-9: Cable Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562TESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUP FOR TRDCCALIBRATION SET UPTESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEN-N FEMALEADAPTERSUPPORTED TEST SETSINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUMANALYZERAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(FIGURE F-5).RF INPUT50 ΩRF OUTPUT50 Ω100-W ATT (MIN)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETD. TX TEST SETUP AND DRDC RX TEST SETUP20 DB IN-LINEATTENUATORN-N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)50 ΩΤERM.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATIONSet-up for TX CalibrationFigure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-56Figure 3-10: TX Calibration Test Setup - CyberTest (IS-95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)Motorola CyberTestAgilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANELRFIN/OUTRF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOXNOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOT USED WITH THECYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TX CABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLYTO THE CYBERTEST TEST SET.TOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAGPIBRF IN/OUTRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SET2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATOR50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*POWERSENSOR* A POWER METER CAN BE USED INPLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONSTEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/AUDIT3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-57Figure 3-11: TX Calibration Test Setup - Using Power MeterTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPNOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTESTR3465 CANNOT BE USED FOR TXCALIBRATION. A POWER METER MUST BEUSED.TOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTOR50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERSENSOR POWER METER2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATOR3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-58Figure 3-12: TX Calibration Test Setup - Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPTOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAGPIBRF INPUT 50 ΩOR INPUT 50 ΩRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SET50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*POWERSENSOR* A POWER METER CAN BE USED INPLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONSTEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/AUDITRF INPUT50 ΩAgilent E4406AINPUT 50 ΩAdvantest R32672O DB IN-LINEATTENUATOR3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-59Set-up for Optimization/ATPFigure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the test set connections foroptimization/ATP tests.Figure 3-13: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Set-up, TRDC Shown - CyberTest and Advantest R3465Motorola CyberTestTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDAdvantest Model R3465INPUT 50ΩGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITNOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is notused with the Cybertest test set. The TXcable is connected directly to the Cybertesttest set.RF OUT 50ΩFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRF GENOUTSYNC MONITOR EVENSEC TICK PULSEREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDBNC“T”TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTORON REAR OF TEST SET(FOR DETAILS, SEE FIGURE F-3) TOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLEGPIBRF IN/OUTORINPUT 50 ΩRF GEN OUTOR RF OUT 50ΩRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESCDMATIMEBASEINEVENSECOND/SYNC INNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THETX AND RX TEST CABLESCONNECT TO THE DRDCANTENNA CONNECTOR.(SEE FIGURE 3-15.)2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATOR3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-60Figure 3-14: IS-95A/B Optimization/ATP Test Setup - HP 8921ARF OUTONLYHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for 1900 MHz)GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTGPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)RFIN/OUTDUPLEXOUT TOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE (RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLEGPIBPCS INTERFACEINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORCOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESCDMATIMEBASEIN EVENSECOND/SYNC INNOTE: IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), BOTH THETX AND RX TEST CABLESCONNECT TO THE DRDCANTENNA CONNECTOR.(SEE FIGURE 3-15.)HP PCSINTERFACE*2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATOR* FOR 1900 MHZONLYRF OUT ONLYRF IN/OUTNOTE:FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THEHP 8921A AS FOLLOWS:RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUTTX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUT3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-61Figure 3-15: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs - Agilent Test EquipmentAgilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOXSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRF INPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF IN ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(FIGURE F-5).TOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS *10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANACOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZERGPIBFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLEDRDCBTSCPLDANTCPLDSIGNAL GENERATORGPIB10 MHZIN10 MHZOUTTRIGGER INOREVEN SECSYNCH INEXTREFINBNC“T”PATTERNTRIG IN10 MHZREF OUT* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESDUPLEXEDTX/RXANTENNACONNECTORRX TESTCABLE50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATORNOTE:THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1XTX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCETESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TOPERFORM 1X RX TESTING.RF IN/OUTORRF INPUT50 ΩRF OUTPUT 50 ΩOR DUPLEX OUT3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-62Figure 3-16: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With DRDCs - Advantest R3267/3562 Test EquipmentTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OFSPECTRUM ANALYZERTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERTOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANAINPUT50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLEDRDCBTSCPLDANTCPLDBNC“T”SPECTRUMANALYZERGPIBSIGNAL GENERATORGPIBSYNTHEREFIN10 MHZOUTEXTTRIG INMOD TIMEBASE INEXT TRIG* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESDUPLEXEDTX/RXANTENNACONNECTORRX TESTCABLE50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATOR3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-63Figure 3-17: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs - Agilent Test EquipmentAgilent 8935 Model E6380A (formerly HP 8935)DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOXTOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZERGPIBRF IN/OUTOR RF INPUT 50 ΩRF OUTPUT 50 ΩOR DUPLEX OUTRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDINTERNALRXCABLETXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLDTXANTENNACONNECTORRF INPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF IN ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(FIGURE F-5).SIGNAL GENERATORGPIB10 MHZIN10 MHZOUT50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADTRIGGER INOREVEN SECSYNCH INEXTREFINTX TESTCABLEBNC“T”PATTERNTRIG IN* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHES2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATORNOTE:THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K CAN PERFORM 1XTX ACCEPTANCE TESTING BUT NOT 1X RX ACCEPTANCETESTING. AN EXTERNAL SIGNAL GENERATOR MUST BE USED TOPERFORM 1X RX TESTING.3
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-64Figure 3-18: IS-95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup With TRDCs - Advantest R3267/3562 Test EquipmentTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OFSPECTRUM ANALYZERTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERTOMPCTO LPATRUNKINGMODULERS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSINTERNALTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX TESTCABLESPECTRUMANALYZERGPIBINPUT50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩRXANTENNACONNECTORFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMINTERNALRXCABLETXANTENNACONNECTORSIGNAL GENERATORGPIBSYNTHEREFIN10 MHZOUT50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100-W ATT (MIN.)NON-RADIATINGRF LOADEXTTRIG INMOD TIMEBASE INTX TESTCABLEBNC“T”EXT TRIG* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESTXANTCPLDRXBTSCPLDTRDCTXBTSCPLDRXANTCPLD2O DB IN-LINEATTENUATOR3
Calibration and Test Equipment68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-65TX ATP SetupFigure 3-19 shows a typical TX ATP setup.Figure 3-19: Typical TX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with and without RFDS)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER40W NON-RADIATINGRF LOADOUTPUTPORTRVS (REFLECTED)PORT 50-OHMTERMINATIONFWD(INCIDENT)PORTBTS INPUTPORT TX TESTCABLEONE 20 DB 20 W IN LINEATTENUATORConnect TX test cable betweenthe directional coupler input portand the appropriate TX antennadirectional coupler connector.TX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRFDS RX (RFM TX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU2 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS Detail123RF FEED LINE TODIRECTIONALCOUPLERREMOVEDCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETINAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-28.TXTESTCABLETX RF FROM BTS FRAMETESTDIRECTIONALCOUPLERNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES. FW001163
Calibration and Test Equipment 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-66Figure 3-20: Typical RX ATP Setup with Directional Coupler (shown with or without RFDS)RX RF FROM BTSFRAME341256Connect RX test cable betweenthe test set and the appropriateRX antenna directional coupler.RX ANTENNA DIRECTIONAL COUPLERSRF FEED LINE TOTX ANTENNAREMOVEDCOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETRFDS TX (RFM RX) COUPLEROUTPUTS TO RFDS FWD(BTS)ASU1 (SHADED) CONNECTORSRX(RFM TX)TX(RFM RX)COBRA RFDS DetailOUTAppropriate test sets and the portnames for all model test sets aredescribed in Table 3-28.RX TestCableNOTE:THIS SETUP APPLIES TO BOTHSTARTER AND EXPANSION FRAMES.FW001153
Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-67Loss/Gain OffsetBackgroundProper test equipment setup ensures that the test equipment andassociated test cables do not introduce measurement errors, and thatmeasurements are correct.NOTE If the test set being used to interface with the BTS has beencalibrated and maintained as a set, this procedure does not needto be performed. (Test Set includes LMF terminal,communications test set, additional test equipment, associatedtest cables, and adapters.)This procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.Verify all test equipment (including all associated test cables andadapters actually used to interface all test equipment and the BTS) hasbeen calibrated and maintained as a set.CAUTION If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapter, thatmakes up the calibrated test equipment set, has been replaced,re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do so can introducemeasurement errors, resulting in incorrect measurements anddegradation to system performance.NOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent testequipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating theoverall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has beenallowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.PurposeThese procedures access the CDMA LMF automated calibration routineused to determine the path losses of the supported communicationsanalyzer, power meter, associated test cables, and (if used) antennaswitch that make up the overall calibrated test set. After calibration, thegain/loss offset values are stored in a test measurement offset file on theCDMA LMF.GPIB AddressesGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The LMF will accept anyaddress in that range, but the numbers entered in the LMF Optionswindow GPIB address box must match the addresses of the testequipment. Motorola recommends using 1 for a CDMA signal generator,13 for a power meter, and 18 for a communications system analyzer. Toverify and, if necessary, change the GPIB addresses of the testequipment, refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix F.Selecting Test EquipmentUse LMF Options from the Options menu list to select test equipmentautomatically (using the autodetect feature) or manually.3
Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-68PrerequisitesA Serial Connection and a Network Connection tab are provided fortest equipment selection. The Serial Connection tab is used when thetest equipment items are connected directly to the CDMA LMFcomputer via a GPIB box (normal setup). The Network Connection tabis used when the test equipment is to be connected remotely via anetwork connection.Ensure the following has been completed before selecting testequipment:STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.SCDMA LMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected tothe GPIB box.Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection TabTest equipment can be manually specified before, or after, the testequipment is connected. CDMA LMF does not check to see if the testequipment is actually detected for manual specification.Table 3-30: Selecting Test Equipment Manually in a Serial Connection TabStep Action1From the Tools menu, select Options.The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on the Manual Specification button (if not enabled).5Click on the check box corresponding to the test item(s) to be used.6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addressessection of Appendix F for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses).Motorola-recommended addresses are:1 = signal generator13 = power meter18 = communications system analyzer* IMPORTANTWhen test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the LMF defaults to using a powermeter for RF power measurements. The LMF will use a communications system analyzer for RFpower measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox not checked).7Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.)8Click on Dismiss to close the test equipment window.3
Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-69Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection TabWhen using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, theCDMA LMF examines which test equipment items are actuallycommunicating with CDMA LMF. Follow the procedure in Table 3-31to use the auto-detect feature.Table 3-31: Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectStep Action1From the Tools menu, select Options.The LMF Options window appears.2Click on the Serial Connection tab (if not in the forefront).3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port pick list (normally COM1).4Click on Auto-Detection (if not enabled).5Type in the GPIB addresses in the box labeled GPIB address to search (if not already displayed).NOTERefer to the Setting GPIB addresses section of Appendix F for instructions on verifying or changingtest equipment GPIB addresses, if necessary.When both a power meter and analyzer are selected, the first item listed in the GPIB addresses tosearch box will be used for RF power measurements (i.e., TX calibration). The address for a signalgenerator is normally 1, a power meter is normally 13 and the address for a CDMA analyzer isnormally 18. If 1, 13,18 are included in the GPIB addresses to search box, the power meter (13) willbe used for RF power measurements. If the test equipment items are manually selected the CDMAanalyzer is used only if a power meter is not selected.6 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark willappear in the Manual Configuration section for detected test equipment items.7 Click Dismiss to close the LMF Options window.Calibrating Test EquipmentThe calibrate test equipment function zeros the power measurement levelof the test equipment item that is to be used for TX calibration and audit.If both a power meter and an analyzer are connected, only the powermeter is zeroed.Calibrate Test Equipment from the Util menu list is used to calibratetest equipment item before being used for testing. The test equipmentmust be selected before beginning calibration. Follow the procedure inTable 3-32 to calibrate the test equipment.Table 3-32: Test Equipment CalibrationStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment. A Directions window is displayed. Followthe instructions provided.2Follow the direction provided.3
Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-70Table 3-32: Test Equipment CalibrationStep Action3Click on Continue to close the Directions window. A status window is displayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window.Calibrating CablesThe cable calibration function is used to measure the loss (in dB) for theTX and RX cables that are to be used for testing. A CDMA analyzer isused to measure the loss of each cable configuration (TX cableconfiguration and RX cable configuration). The cable calibrationconsists of the following procedures.SMeasure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for anymeasurement error of the analyzer. The short cable, which is used onlyfor the calibration process, is used in series with both the TX and RXcable configuration when they are measured. The measured loss of theshort cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RXcable configuration to determine the actual loss of the TX and RXcable configurations. This deduction is done so any error in theanalyzer measurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RXmeasurements.SMeasure the short cable plus the RX cable configuration loss. The RXcable configuration normally consists only of a coax cable withtype-N connectors that is long enough to reach from the BTS RX portthe test equipment.SMeasure the short cable plus the TX cable configuration loss ismeasured. The TX cable configuration normally consists of two coaxcables with type-N connectors and a directional coupler, a load, andan additional attenuator if required by the BTS type. The total loss ofthe path loss of the TX cable configuration must be as required for theBTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer isdifferent in that the required attenuation/load is built into the test setso the TX cable configuration consists only of the required lengthcoax cable.Calibrating Cables with a CDMA AnalyzerThe Cable Calibration menu item from the Util menu list is used tocalibrate both TX and RX test cables for use with CDMA LMF.NOTE LMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with anHP8921A analyzer for 1.9 MHz. A different analyzer type or thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer method must be used(refer to Table 3-34 and Table 3-35). Cable calibration valuesmust be manually entered if the signal generator and spectrumanalyzer method is used. For the HP8921A, refer to Appendix F.The test equipment must be selected before this procedure can be started.Follow the procedure in Table 3-33 to calibrate the cables.3
Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-71Table 3-33: Cable CalibrationStep Action1From the Util menu, select Cable Calibration. A Cable Calibration window is displayed.2Enter a channel number(s) in the Channels box. Multiple channels numbers must be separated with acomma, no space (i.e., 200,800). When two or more channels numbers are entered, the cables will becalibrated for each channel. Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels as required for TXcalibration.3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the Cable Calibrationpicklist.4 Click OK. Follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will be displayedwith the results of the cable calibration. Calibrating TX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-34 to calibrate the TX cables using thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-21 for adiagram of the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.Table 3-34: Calibrating TX Cables Using Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator.2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of 869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and1930-1990 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-21, “A”) and record the value.4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point “B”, as shown in the lower portion of thediagram, to measure cable output at customer frequency (869-894 MHz for 800 MHz CDMA and1930-1990 MHz for North American PCS) and record the value at point “B”.5Calibration factor = A - B Example: Cal = -1 dBm - (-53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, to ensure test procedures usethe correct calibration factor.3
Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-72Figure 3-21: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for TX Cable Calibration(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer100WNON-RADIATING RFLOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL BE THE CONNECTION TO THEPOWER METER DURING TX CALIBRATIONAND TO THE CDMA ANALYZER DURING TXATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLE THIS WILL BE THE CONNECTIONTO THE TX PORTS DURING TXCALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RXPORTS DURING ATP TESTS.SECOND RFTEST CABLE.ONE 20DB 20 W INLINE ATTENUATORFW002933
Loss/Gain Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-73Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 3-35 to calibrate the RX cables using thesignal generator and spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 3-22, if required.Table 3-35: Calibrating RX Cables Using a Signal Generator and Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable to the spectrum analyzer and connect the other end to the Signal Generator.2Set signal generator to -10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of 824-840 MHz for 800 MHzCDMA and 1850-1910 MHz band for North American PCS.3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 3-22, “A”) and record the valuefor “A”.4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram, to measure the output at thecustomer’s RX frequency in the 1850-1910 MHz band. Record the value at point ‘‘B”.5Calibration factor = A - BExample: Cal = -12 dBm - (-14 dBm) = 2 dBNOTEThe short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not be part of the final testsetup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the equipment setup, as is, toensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor.Figure 3-22: Calibrating Test Equipment Setup for RX ATP Test(Using Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer)SpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorABSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLESHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE OUTPUTPORT DURING RX MEASUREMENTSSignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORLONGCABLE 2CONNECTION TO THE RX PORTSDURING RX MEASUREMENTS. FW00294Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for the TX and RX test cable configurations arenormally set by accomplishing cable calibration with use of theapplicable test equipment. The resulting values are stored in the cableloss files. The cable loss values can also be set/changed manually.3
Loss/Gain Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-74PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTSTable 3-36: Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit >Cable Loss > TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear.3Click on the Add Row button to add a new channel number. Then click in the Channel # and Loss(dBm) columns and enter the desired values.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6Click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTESIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the LMF will interpolate for all other channels.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.Setting Coupler Loss ValueIf an in-service coupler is installed the coupler loss (e.g., 30 dB) must bemanually entered so it will be included in the LMF TX calibration andaudit calculations and the RX FER test.PrerequisitesSLogged into the BTSTable 3-37: Setting Coupler Loss ValuesStep Action1Click on the Util menu.2 Select Edit >Coupler Loss>TX or RX. A data entry pop-up window will appear.3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5Click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to exit the window. Values that were entered/changed after the Savebutton was used will not be saved.NOTESThe In-Service Calibration check box in the Tools>Options>BTS Options tab must checkedbefore entered coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and audit functions or RX Fertest.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. You do not have to logout andlogin.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-75Adjusting for lossIntroductionCalibration compensates for normal equipment variations within theBTS and assures maximum measurement accuracy.RF Path Bay Level Offset CalibrationCalibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. The BLOs aresubsequently downloaded to each BBX.Each receive path starts at a BTS RX antenna port and terminates at abackplane BBX slot. Each transmit path starts at a BBX backplane slot,travels through the LPA, and terminates at a BTS TX antenna port.Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in every transmit path (BBXslot) at the BTS site and stores that value in the CAL file. Each transmitpath starts at a C-CCP shelf backplane BBX slot, travels through theLPA, and ends at a BTS TX antenna port. When the TX path calibrationis performed, the RX path BLO will automatically be set to the defaultvalue.When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration of BLOs is required after initial BTS installation.The BLO data of an operational BTS site must be re-calibrated onceeach year. Motorola recommends re-calibrating the BLO data for allassociated RF paths after replacing any of the following components orassociated interconnecting RF cabling:SBBX boardSC-CCP shelfSCIO cardSCIO to LPA backplane RF cableSLPA backplaneSLPASTX filter / TX filter combinerSTX thru-port cable to the top of frameTX Path CalibrationThe TX Path Calibration assures correct site installation, cabling, and thefirst order functionality of all installed equipment. The proper functionof each RF path is verified during calibration. The external testequipment is used to validate/calibrate the TX paths of the BTS.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector you must first verify that there are no CDMAchannels keyed. Have the OMC-R place the sector assigned tothe LPA under test OOS. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-76CAUTION Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module. If this is not done, there is ahigh probability that the card/module could be damaged by ESD.NOTE At new site installations, to facilitate the complete test of eachCCP shelf (if the shelf is not already fully populated with BBXboards), move BBX boards from shelves currently not under testand install them into the empty BBX slots of the shelf currentlybeing tested to insure that all BBX TX paths are tested.- This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites that aredue for periodic optimization.- Prior to testing, view the CDF file to verify the correctBBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required to includeBBX slots not currently equipped (per SystemsEngineering documentation).BLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (BLO) datafile. After calibration has been completed, this offset data must bedownloaded to the BBXs using the Download BLO function. Anexplanation of the file is shown below.NOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends that you printout a hard copy of a bts.cal file and refer to it for the followingdescriptions.The CAL file is subdivided into sections organized on a per slot basis (aslot Block).Slot 1 contains the calibration data for the 12 BBX slots. Slot 20contains the calibration data for the redundant BBX (see Table 3-39).Each BBX slot header block contains:SA creation Date and Time - broken down into separate parameters ofcreateMonth, createDay, createYear, createHour, and createMin.SThe number of calibration entries - fixed at 720 entries correspondingto 360 calibration points of the CAL file including the slot header andactual calibration data.SThe calibration data for a BBX is organized as a large flat array. Thearray is organized by branch, BBX slot, and calibration point.- The first breakdown of the array indicates which branch thecontained calibration points are for. The array covers transmit, mainreceive and diversity receive offsets as follows:Table 3-38: BLO BTS.cal file Array Branch AssignmentsRange AssignmentC[1]-C[240] TransmitC[241]-C[480] ReceiveC[481]-C[720] Diversity Receive3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-77- The second breakdown of the array is per sector. Three sectors areallowed.Table 3-39: BTS.cal File Array (Per Sector)BBX Sectorization TX RX RX DiversitySlot[1] (Primary BBXs 1 through 12)1 (Omni)3-Sector,C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]23-Sector,1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]41stCarrier3-Sector,C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]5Carrier 3-Sector,3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600]73-Sector,C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]83-Sector,2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]10 2ndCarrier3-Sector,C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]11 Carrier 3-Sector,4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]Slot[20] (Redundant BBX-13)1 (Omni)3-Sector,C[1]-C[20] C[241]-C[260] C[481]-C[500]23-Sector,1st C[21]-C[40] C[261]-C[280] C[501]-C[520]36 Sector, Carrier C[41]-C[60] C[281]-C[300] C[521]-C[540]41stCarrier3-Sector,C[61]-C[80] C[301]-C[320] C[541]-C[560]5Carrier 3-Sector,3rd C[81]-C[100] C[321]-C[340] C[561]-C[580]6Carrier C[101]-C[120] C[341]-C[360] C[581]-C[600]73-Sector,C[121]-C[140] C[361]-C[380] C[601]-C[620]83-Sector,2nd C[141]-C[160] C[381]-C[400] C[621]-C[640]96 Sector, Carrier C[161]-C[180] C[401]-C[420] C[641]-C[660]10 2ndCarrier3-Sector,C[181]-C[200] C[421]-C[440] C[661]-C[680]11 Carrier 3-Sector,4th C[201]-C[220] C[441]-C[460] C[681]-C[700]12 Carrier C[221]-C[240] C[461]-C[480] C[701]-C[720]SRefer to the hard copy of the file. As you can see, 10 calibrationpoints per sector are supported for each branch. Two entries arerequired for each calibration point.SThe first value (all odd entries) refer to the CDMA channel(frequency) the BLO is measured at. The second value (all evenentries) is the power set level. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj is from2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to -125 dBm and 27500corresponds to +125 dBm).SThe 20 calibration entries for each slot/branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than 10 points(frequencies) are calibrated, the largest frequency that is calibrated isrepeated to fill out the 10 points.3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-78Example:C[1]=384, odd cal entry = 1 ‘‘calibration point”C[2]=19102, even cal entryC[3]=777,C[4]=19086,..C[19]=777,C[20]=19086, (since only two cal points were calibrated this would be repeated for the next 8 points)SWhen the BBX is loaded with BLO data, the cal file data for the BBXis downloaded to the device in the order it is stored in the CAL file.TxCal data is sent first, C[1] - C[60]. BBX slot 1’s 10 calibrationpoints are sent (C[1] - C[20]), followed by BBX slot 2’s 10calibration points (C[21] - C[40]), etc. The RxCal data is sent next,followed by the RxDCal data.STemperature compensation data is also stored in the cal file for eachslot.Test Equipment Setup: RF Path CalibrationFollow the steps in Table 3-40 to set up test equipment.Table 3-40: Test Equipment Setup (RF Path Calibration)Step ActionNOTEVerify the GPIB is properly connected and turned on.! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment, all transmit (TX) test connections must be via the 30 dBdirectional coupler for 800 MHz or via a 30 dB coupler with a 20 dB in-line attenuator for 1900 MHz.1Connect the LMF computer terminal to the BTS LAN A connector on the BTS (if you have notalready done so). Refer to the procedure in Table 3-6.SIf required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 3-32.SConnect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18.Transmit (TX) Path CalibrationThe assigned channel frequency and power level (as measured at the topof the frame) for transmit calibration is derived from the site CDF file.For each BBX, the channel frequency is specified in the ChannelListCDF file parameter and the power is specified in the SIFPilotPwrCDF file parameter for the sector associated with the BBX (locatedunder the ParentSECTOR field of the ParentCARRIER CDF fileparameter).The calibration procedure attempts to adjust the power to within +0.5 dBof the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is less than+1.5 dB.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITHOUT the directional coupleroption, is approximately 42.0 dB ±3.0 dB.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-79SAt sites WITHOUT RFDS option, BLO is approximately 42.0 dB ±4.0 dB. A typical example would be TX output powermeasured at BTS (36.0 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level(approximately -6.0 dBm) would equate to 42 dB BLO.The TX Bay Level Offset at sites WITH the directional coupler option,is approximately 41.4 dB ±3.0 dB. TX BLO = Frame Power Outputminus BBX output level.SExample: TX output power measured at RFDS TX coupler(39.4 dBm) minus the BBX TX output level (approximately-2.0 dBm) and RFDS directional coupler/cable (approximately-0.6 dBm) would equate to 41.4 dB BLO.The LMF Tests menu list items, TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit,perform the TX BLO Calibration test for a XCVR(s). The All Cal/Auditmenu item performs TX calibration, downloads BLO, and performs TXaudit if the TX calibration passes. All measurements are made throughthe appropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.Test Pattern Drop-down Pick ListPilot is shown as the default setting in this pick list box. The full rangeof available selections and their descriptions are as follows:Standard - performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch, andsix traffic channels with IS-97-specified gain. This pattern settingshould be used for all non-in-service calibrations and audits. Using thispattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least oneMCC.Pilot (default) - performs calibration using only the pilot channel. Thispattern setting should be used for in-service calibrations, and requiresselection of only a BBX.CDFPilot -This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performscalibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gainvalues for all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting(paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requires theselection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.CDF - This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to use CDFgain settings for all channels included in the Standard pattern setting(pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern setting requiresthe selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.Verify BLOIn both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a VerifyBLO checkbox is provided and checked by default. After the actual TXcalibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or AllCal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared toa standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additionalchange in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failureand, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either theVerify BLO checkbox should be unchecked or the additional path lossesshould be added into each applicable sector using theUtil>Edit>TX Coupler Loss function.3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-80Single-Sided BLONormally valid values are some value plus-or-minus some offset. Ifsingle-sided BLO” is selected, the result will only be considered asuccess if it’s in the lower half of the range. If it was normally successfrom 37-47 (which is 42± 5), single-sided BLO” would make it asuccess only if the result was from 37-42.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, ensure that the following have been done:SCSM-1, GLIs, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code load and dataload.SPrimary CSM and MGLI are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 andfollow the procedure in Table 3-41 to perform the TX calibration test.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.NOTE Verify all BBX boards removed and repositioned have beenreturned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX boards movedsince they were downloaded will have to be downloaded again.Table 3-41: BTS TX Path CalibrationnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be calibrated.NOTEIf STANDARD, CDF or CDFPILOT is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCCmust be also selected.2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Calibration.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list. (Press and hold the<Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.)4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.NOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-81Table 3-41: BTS TX Path CalibrationnActionStepNOTESSelecting PILOT (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting STANDARD performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values forall the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic).Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.7Click on OK.8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.Download BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibrationfile data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for theBTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.SBBXs being downloaded are OOS-RAM (yellow).STX calibration is successfully completed.Follow the steps in Table 3-42 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-82Table 3-42: Download BLOStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.2From the Device menu, select Download>BLO.A status report window displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.3 Click OK to close the status report window. Calibration Audit IntroductionThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibrations. The calibration audit proceduremeasures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path at the site. Inthis test, actual system tolerances are used to determine the success orfailure of a test. The same external test equipment set up is used.NOTE RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO data downloadto BBXs must have been successfully completed prior toperforming the calibration audit.Transmit (TX) Path AuditPerform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,per the steps in Table 3-43.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.NOTE If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, this proceduredoes not need to be performed, as BLO is downloaded as part ofthe All Cal/Audit.TX Audit TestThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test for aBBX(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the calibrated TX cable setup.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SCSM-1,GLI3s, BBXs have correct code load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI3 are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-83STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Follow the procedure in Table 3-43 to perform the BTS TX Path Audittest.Table 3-43: BTS TX Path AuditnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be audited.NOTEIf STANDARD or CDF is selected for Test Pattern, then at least one MCC must be also selected.2From the Tests menu, select TX>TX Audit.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5 Select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.NOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.NOTESSelecting PILOT (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting STANDARD performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPILOT performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain valuesfor all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and sixtraffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.7Click on OK.8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. 3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-84Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Recheck the test setup and connection and re-run the test. If the tests failagain, note specifics about the failure, and refer to Chapter 6,Troubleshooting.All Cal/Audit TestThe Tests menu item, All Cal/Audit, performs the TX BLO Calibrationand Audit test for a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through theappropriate TX output connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.NOTE If the TX calibration portion of the test passed, the BLO datawill automatically be downloaded to the BBX(s) before the auditportion of the test is run.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SCSM-1, GLI3s, BBXs have correct code and data load.SPrimary CSM and MGLI3 are INS.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM.STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.Follow the procedures in Table 3-44 to perform the All Cal/Audit test.WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, first verify there are no CDMA BBX channelskeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-85Table 3-44: All Cal/Audit TestnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be tested.NOTEIf STANDARD, CDF or CDFPILOT is selected for TEST PATTERN, then at least one MCCmust be also selected.2From the Tests menu, select All Cal/Audit.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) displayed in the Channels/Carrier pick list.Press and hold the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key to select multiple items.4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.5 Select Verify BLO or Single-sided BLO.NOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.6From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values forall the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic).Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and 6 traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.7Click on OK.8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.A status report window displays the test results.9Click on Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. Create CAL FileThe Create Cal File function gets the BLO data from BBXs andcreates/updates the CAL file for the BTS. If a CAL file does not exist anew one is created. If a CAL file already exists it is updated. After aBTS has been fully optimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it canbe transferred to the CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfullyperformed for all BBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, a CAL filewill exist. Note the following:SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)BBXs.3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-86WARNING Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action can causeinterface problems between the BTS and the LMF. To manuallyedit the CAL file you must first logout of the BTS. If youmanually edit the CAL file and then use the Create Cal Filefunction the edited information will be lost.PrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SLMF is logged in to the BTSSBBXs are OOS_RAM with BLO downloadedTable 3-45: Create CAL FileStep Action1Select the applicable BBXs. The CAL file will only be updated for the selected BBXs.2Click on the Device menu.3Click on the Create Cal File menu item.The status report window is displays the results of the action.4 Click OK. RFDS DescriptionThe optional RFDS is used to perform RF tests of the site from theCBSC or from the LMF. The RFDS contains the following FRUs:SAntenna Select Unit (ASU)SFixed Wireless Terminal Interface Card (FWTIC)SSubscriber Unit Assembly (SUA)For complete information regarding the RFDS, refer to the CDMA, andthe.LMF Help function on-line documentation.RFDS ParametersThe bts-#.cdf file includes RFDS parameter settings that must match theinstalled RFDS equipment. The paragraphs below describe the editableparameters and their defaults. Table 3-46 explains how to edit theparameter settings.SRfdsEquip - valid inputs are 0 through 2.0 = (default) RFDS is not equipped1 = Non-Cobra/Patzer box RFDS2 = Cobra RFDSSTsuEquip - valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) TSU not equipped1 = TSU is equipped in the systemSMC1....4 - valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = Multicouplers equipped in RFDS system (SC9600 internal RFDS only)3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-87SAsu1/2Equip - valid inputs are 0 or 10 = (default) Not equipped1 = EquippedSTestOrigDN - valid inputs are ’’’ (default) or a numerical string up to15 characters. (This is the phone number the RFDS dials whenoriginating a call. A dummy number needs to be set up by the switch,and is to be used in this field.)NOTE Any text editor may be used to open the bts-#.cdf file to verify,view, or modify data. Because the bts-#.cdf file is generated ona Unix system, a more sophisticated editor, such as MicroSoftWordPad, will display file content in a more easily-read formatthan many simple text editors.Checking and Setting RFDS ParametersFollow the procedure in Table 3-46 to review and/or edit RFDSparameters.Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action1* IMPORTANTLog out of the BTS prior to perform this procedure.Using a text editor, verify the following fields are set correctly in the bts-#.cdf file:EXAMPLE:Asu1Equip = 1Asu2Equip = 0 (1 if system is non-duplexed)Mc1Equip = 0Mc2Equip = 0Mc3Equip = 0Mc4Equip = 0RfdsEquip = 2TestOrigDN = ’123456789’TsuEquip = 1NOTEThe above is an example of entries extracted from the bts-#.cdf file that should have been generatedby the OMC-R and copied to the LMF. These fields will have been set by the OMC-R if theRFDSPARM database is modified for the RFDS.2Save changes and/or quit the editor.3Log into the BTS using an LMF GUI session(refer to Table 3-14).4 If no changes were made to the bts-#.cdf file fields listed in step 1, proceed to Step 7. If changes weremade, continue with Step 5.5* IMPORTANTTo make certain the complete data download is accepted, the MGLI should be OOS_RAM (yellow)when RFDS parameter settings are downloaded.When changes are made to RFDS parameters in the bts-#.cdf file, data must be downloaded to theMGLI by performing the following:. . . continued on next page3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-88Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action5a - To be sure it does not take control when the MGLI is disabled, manually disable the redundantGLI card by unseating it from the backplane connectors and sliding it partially out of the shelfslot.5b - Click on the MGLI.5c - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Disable from the pull-down menu.-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation.5d - When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.5e - Click on the MGLI (now OOS_RAM (yellow)).5f - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Data from the pull-down menus(selected devices do not change color when data is downloaded).-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the download.5g - Click OK to close the status report window.5h - Click on the MGLI.5i - Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull-down menu.-- A status report window is displayed showing status of the operation.5j - When the operation is complete, click OK to close the status report window.! CAUTIONWhen the MGLI changes to INS_ACT, data will automatically be downloaded to the RFDS. Duringthis process, the RFDS LED will slowly begin flashing red and green for approximately 2-3 minutes.DO NOT attempt to perform any functions with the RFDS until the LED remains steady green.5k - Re-seat the redundant GLI card into the backplane connectors and lock it in place with the ejectortabs.5l - Once the redundant GLI initializes, download data to it by selecting the card and, in the BTSmenu bar, clicking Device and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus.6Any MCCs which were INS_ACT when the MGLI was disabled must be disabled, re-enabled, anddownloaded with code as follows:6a - Select the devices to be reset by clicking on them or using Select from the BTS menu bar andclicking on MCCs in the pull-down menu.6b - In the BTS menu bar, click on Device and select Disable from the pull-down menu.-- A status window report window is displayed showing status of the operation.6c - Click OK to close the status report window.6d - Download data to the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-21.6e - When data download is complete, enable the MCCs by following the procedure in Table 3-24.7Click on the RFDS tab.8Status the RFDS TSU by performing the following:8a - Click on the SUA to select it.. . . continued on next page3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-89Table 3-46: RFDS Parameter SettingsStep Action8b - Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Status TSU from the pull-down menu.-- A status report is displayed showing the software version number for the TSIC and SUA.8c - Click OK to close the status report window.* IMPORTANTIf the LMF displays an error message, check the following:SEnsure AMR cable is correctly connected from the BTS to the RFDS.SVerify RFDS has power.SVerify RFDS status LED is green.SVerify entries in RFDS fields of the bts-#.cdf file are correct (refer to step 1).SStatus the MGLI and ensure it is communicating (by Ethernet) with the LMF, and is in the properstate (INS_ACT (bright green)). RFDS TSU NAM ProgrammingThe Number Assignment Module (NAM) information needs to beprogrammed into the TSU before it can receive and process test calls, orbe used for any type of RFDS test. The RFDS TSU NAM must beprogrammed with the appropriate system parameters and phone numberduring hardware installation. The TSU phone and TSU MSI must berecorded for each BTS used for OMC-R RFDS software configuration.NOTE The user will only need to program the NAM for the initialinstallation of the RFDS.Explanation of Parameters Used When Programming the TSU NAMTable 3-47 defines the parameters used when editing the tsu.nam file.Table 3-47: Definition of ParametersAccess Overload CodeSlot IndexSystem IDNetwork IDThese parameters are obtained from the switch.Primary Channel APrimary Channel BSecondary Channel ASecondary Channel BThese parameters are the channels which are to be used in operationof the system.Lock CodeSecurity CodeService LevelStation Class MarkDo NOT change.3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-90Table 3-47: Definition of ParametersIMSI MCCIMSI 11 12 These fields are obtained at the OMC using the following command:OMC000>disp bts-# imsiIf the fields are blank, replace the IMSI fields in the NAM file to 0,otherwise use the values displayed by the OMC.MIN Phone Number These fields are the phone number assigned to the mobile. The ESNand MIN must be entered into the switch as well.NOTEThis field is different from the TODN field in the bts-#.cdf file. TheMIN is the phone number of the RFDS subscriber, and the TODN isthe number the subscriber calls.Valid NAM Ranges Table 3-48 provides the valid NAM field ranges. If any of the fields aremissing or out-of-range, the RFDS will error out.Table 3-48: Valid NAM Field RangesValid RangeNAM Field Name Minimum MaximumAccess Overload Code 0 15Slot Index 0 7System ID 0 32767Network ID 0 32767Primary Channel A 25 1175Primary Channel B 25 1175Secondary Channel A 25 1175Secondary Channel B 25 1175Lock Code 0 999Security Code 0 999999Service Level N/A N/AStation Class Mark 0 255IMSI 11 12 0 99IMSI MCC 0 999MIN Phone Number N/A N/ASet Antenna Map DataThe antenna map data must be entered manually if an RFDS is installed.Antenna map data does not need to be entered if an RFDS is notinstalled. The antenna map data is only used for RFDS tests and isrequired if an RFDS is installed.PrerequisiteSLMF is logged into the BTSFollow the procedure in Table 3-49 to set antenna map data for theRFDS.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-91Table 3-49: Set Antenna Map DataStep Action1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Antenna Map... from the pull-down menus.-A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear.2In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX Antenna Map or RX Antenna Map tab to selectthe antenna map to be edited.3Locate the carrier and sector number for which data is to be entered or edited, and click in the columnwhere entry or editing is needed.4Enter/edit Antenna # and Antenna Label column data as needed for each carrier.NOTERefer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-Antenna Map... section of LMF Help functionon-line documentation for antenna map examples.5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect. Set RFDS Configuration DataIf an RFDS is installed, the RFDS configuration data must be manuallyentered.PrerequisiteSLMF is logged into the BTSNOTE The entered antenna# index numbers must correspond to theantenna# index numbers used in the antenna maps.Follow the procedure in Table 3-50 to set RFDS configuration data.Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration DataStep Action1Click on Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > RFDS Configuration... from the pull-downmenus.-A tabbed data entry pop-up window will appear.2In the data entry pop-up window, click on the TX RFDS Configuration or RX RFDS Configurationtab, as required.3To add a new antenna number, perform the following:3a - Click on the Add Row button.3b - Click in the Antenna #, Cal Antenna, Scap Antenna, or Populate [Y/N] columns, as required.. . . continued on next page3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-92Table 3-50: Set RFDS Configuration DataStep Action3c - Enter the desired data.4To edit existing values click in the data box to be changed and change the value.NOTERefer to the CDMA Help > Utility Menu > Edit-RFDS Configuration... section of LMF Helpfunction on-line documentation for RFDS configuration data examples.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SEntered values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log out andlog back into the LMF for changes to take effect. RFDS CalibrationThe RFDS Calibration option is used to calibrate the RFDS TX and RXpaths.TX Path Calibration - For a TX antenna path calibration the BTSXCVR is keyed at a pre-determined power level and the BTS poweroutput level is measured by the RFDS. The power level is then measuredat the TX antenna directional coupler by the power measuring testequipment item being used (power meter or analyzer). The difference(offset) between the power level at the RFDS and the power level at theTX antenna directional coupler is used as the TX RFDS calibrationoffset value.RX Path Calibration - For an RX antenna path calibration the RFDS iskeyed at a pre-determined power level and the power input level ismeasured by the BTS BBX. A CDMA signal at the same power levelmeasured by the BTS BBX is then injected at the RX antenna directionalcoupler by the communications system analyzer. The difference (offset)between the RFDS-keyed power level and power level measured at theBTS BBX is the RFDS RX calibration offset value.RFDS calibration and the CAL file - The TX and RX RFDScalibration offset values are written to the CAL file in the slot[385]Block.TSIC channel frequency - For each RFDS TSIC, the channelfrequency is determined at the lower third and upper third of theappropriate band using the frequencies listed in Table 3-51.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-93Table 3-51: RFDS TSIC Calibration Channel FrequenciesSystem Channel Calibration Points800 MHz (A and B) 341 and 6821.9 GHz 408 and 791WARNING Before installing any test equipment directly to any TX OUTconnector, verify that there are no CDMA channels keyed.Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury and/orequipment damage.RFDS Calibration ProcedurePrerequisitesSTest equipment has been selected.STest equipment and test cables have been calibrated.STX calibration has been performed and BLO data has beendownloaded to the BBXs.STest equipment and test cables are connected for TX calibration.SAntenna map data has been entered for the site.SBBXs are INS_TEST.Follow the procedure in Table 3-52 to perform RFDS calibration.3
Adjusting for loss 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-94Table 3-52: RFDS CalibrationStep Action1In the LMF, select the FRAME tab.2If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the B button in the BTS menu bar to select it.3Select the BBX(s) assigned to the carrier(s) and sector(s) which will be used in RFDS calibration(refer to Table 1-5 for BBX carrier and sector assignments).4Click on RFDS in the BTS menu bar, and select RFDS Calibration... from the pull-down menu.- An RFDS Calibration set-up window will be displayed.5In the Tests to Perform box, select TX Calibration or RX Calibration, as required6Enter the appropriate channel number(s) (refer to Table 3-51) in the Channel Field box.STo enter more than one channel number, use the following methods:- Separate non-sequential channel numbers with a comma and no spaces; for example: 247,585,742.- Enter a range of sequential channels by typing the first and last channel numbers in the rangeseparated by a dash and no spaces; for example: 385-395.7If the frame is equipped with TX combiners, click in the Has Combiners checkbox.8Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) from the Carriers pick list (hold down the Shift or Ctrlkey while clicking on pick list items to select multiple carrier(s)-sector(s)).9Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list.10 In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate transfer rate (1=9600, 2=14400) from the drop-down list.11 Click on the OK button.- A status report window is displayed, followed by a Directions pop-up window.12 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.13 When the test is completed, test results are displayed in the status report window.14 Click on the OK button to close the status report window.15 Click on the Frame tab.16 Select the MGLI by clicking on it.17 Download the CAL file, now updated with the RFDS offset data, to the MGLI by clicking on Deviceon the BTS menu bar, and selecting Download > Data from the pull-down menus.NOTEThe MGLI will automatically transfer the RFDS offset data from the CAL file to the RFDS. Program TSU NAMThe NAM must be programmed before it can receive and process testcalls, or be used for any type of RFDS test.PrerequisitesSMGLI is INS_ACT (bright green).SSUA is powered up and has a code load.Follow the procedure in Table 3-53 to program the TSU NAM.3
Adjusting for loss68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-95Table 3-53: Program NAM ProcedureStep Action1In the LMF, select the RFDS tab.2Select the SUA by clicking on it.3Click on TSU in the BTS menu bar, and select Program TSU NAM from the pull-down menu.- A NAM programming window will appear.4Enter the appropriate information in the boxes (see Table 3-47 and Table 3-48) .5Click on the OK button to display the status report.6Click on the OK button to close the status report window. 3
Alarms 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-96AlarmsThe alarms testing should be performed at a convenient point in theoptimization/ATP process, since the LMF is necessary to ensure that theRF cabinet is receiving the appropriate alarms from the power cabinet.The SC 4812ET is capable of concurrently monitoring 10 customerdefined input signals and four customer defined outputs, which interfaceto the 50-pin punchblock. All alarms are defaulted to “Not Equipped”during ATP testing. Testing of these inputs is achieved by triggering thealarms and monitoring the LMF for state-transition messages from theactive MGLI3.All customer alarms are routed through the 50 pair punchblock locatedin the I/O compartment at the back of the frame. Testing is bestaccomplished by using a specialized connector that interfaces to the50-pair punchblock. This connector is wired so that customer return 1 (2for the B side) is connected to every input, CDI 0 through CDI 17.Alarm Reporting DisplayThe Alarm Monitor window can be displayed to list alarms that occurafter the window is displayed. To access the Alarm Monitor window,select Util>Alarm Monitor.The following buttons are included:SThe Options button allows for a severity level (Warning, Minor,Major, Critical, and Unknown) selection. The default is all levels.To change the level of alarms reported click on the Options buttonand highlight the desired alarm level(s). To select multiple levels pressthe Ctrl key (for individual selections) or Shift key (for a range ofselections) while clicking on the desired levels.SThe Pause button can be used to pause/stop the display of alarms.When the Pause button is clicked the name of the button changes toContinue. When the Continue button is click the display of alarmswill continue. Alarms that occur between the time the Pause button isclicked and the Continue button is clicked will not be displayed.SThe Clear button can be used to clear the Alarm Monitor display.New alarms that occur after the Clear button is clicked will bedisplayed.SThe Dismiss button is used to dismiss/close the Alarm Monitordisplay.Heat Exchanger Alarm TestTable 3-54 gives instructions on testing the Heat Exchanger alarm.3
Alarms68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-97Table 3-54: Heat Exchanger AlarmStep Action1Turn circuit breaker “B” of the Heat Exchanger circuit breakers OFF. This will generate a HeatExchanger alarm, ensure that the LMF reports the correct alarm condition in the RF Cabinet.2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #25 - “Heat Exchanger Alarm” makes contact.3Turn the circuit breaker “B” ON. Ensure that the alarm condition is now removed.NOTEThe Heat Exchanger will go through the Start Up sequence.Door AlarmTable 3-55 gives instructions on testing the door alarms.NOTE When conducting this test connect the LMF via the LAN port onthe back of the frame thru the Rear I/O Door.Table 3-55: Door AlarmStep Action1Close all doors on the power cabinet. Ensure that no alarms are reported on the LMF.2Individually open and then close each power supply cabinet door. Ensure that the LMF reports analarm when each door is opened.3Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #27 “Door Alarm” makes contact.AC Fail AlarmTable 3-56 gives instructions on testing the AC Fail Alarm.Table 3-56: AC Fail AlarmStep Action1NOTEThe batteries should have a stable charge before performing this test.Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet OFF. The LMF should report an alarm on an AC Fail(Rectifier Fail, Minor Alarm & Major Alarm) condition.2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #23, BTS # 21, BTS # 24 and BTS Relay # 29 “ACFail Alarm” makes contact respectively.3Turn the Main AC breaker on the power cabinet ON. The AC Fail alarm should clear.Minor Alarm Table 3-57 gives instructions on testing minor alarm.3
Alarms 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-98Table 3-57: Minor AlarmStep Action1Turn the Temperature Compensation Panel (TCP) power switch OFF. This will generate a minoralarm. Verify that the minor alarm LED (amber) is illuminated on the Meter Alarm Panel and theLMF reports this minor alarm.2Alarm condition will be reported as BTS Relay #24 “Minor Alarm” makes contact.3Turn the TCP power switch ON. The alarm condition should clear.Rectifier AlarmsThe following series of tests are for single rectifier modules in a multiplerectifier system. The systems include a three rectifier and a six rectifiersystem.Single Rectifier Failure (Three Rectifier System)Table 3-58 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minoralarm in a three rectifier system.Table 3-58: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor AlarmStep Action1Remove a single rectifier module and place it into the unused rectifier shelf #2.2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for this 2nd shelf.3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifierfail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions.NOTEAlarm conditions reported as BTS #24 and BTS #21, contacts respectively.5Turn the AC breaker for the 2nd shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and minor alarm conditionsclear on the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF. Multiple Rectifier FailureTable 3-59 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure or majoralarm in a three rectifier system.Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major AlarmStep Action1With the rectifier module still in the unused shelf position fromTable 3-58 test procedures, turn theAC breaker for the 1st shelf OFF.2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite two RED fail LED(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail andMajor Alarm). The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.. . . continued on next page3
Alarms68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-99Table 3-59: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major AlarmStep Action3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29, BTS #21, and BTS #24)4Turn the AC breaker for the 1st shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.5Return the rectifier module to its original location. This completes the alarm test on the power cabinet. Single Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System)Table 3-60 gives instructions on testing single rectifier failure or minoralarm in a six rectifier system.Table 3-60: Single Rectifier Fail or Minor AlarmStep Action1Remove two(2) rectifier modules from shelf #2.2Turn the AC breaker OFF, for shelf #2.3Verify that a rectifier fail alarm is generated. The single rectifier module will lite two RED fail LED(DC and Power), and the Meter Alarm Panel and LMF will also indicate a minor alarm and rectifierfail status. The RECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.4Check that the LMF reports both of these alarm conditions. (BTS #24 and BTS #21)5Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON and verify that Rectifier Fail and Minor Alarm conditions havecleared. Multiple Rectifier Failure (Six Rectifier System)Table 3-61 gives instructions on testing multiple rectifier failure ormajor alarm in a six rectifier system.Table 3-61: Multiple Rectifier Failure or Major AlarmStep Action1Replace one rectifier module previously removed and turn the AC breaker for this shelf, OFF.2Verify that a rectifier alarm is generated. Each of the two rectifier modules will lite a RED fail LED,and the Meter Alarm Panel will indicate a major alarm (Rectifier Fail, Major and Minor Alarm).TheRECTIFIER FAIL LED will lite.3Verify that the LMF reports both alarm conditions. (BTS #29)4Turn the AC breaker for this shelf ON. Verify that all alarms have cleared.5Return all rectifier module to their original location. This completes the rectifier alarm tests on thepower cabinet. 3
Alarms 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-100Battery Over Temperature Alarm (Optional)CAUTION Use special care to avoid damaging insulation on cables, ordamaging battery cases when using a power heat gun.Table 3-62 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperaturealarm system.Table 3-62: Battery Over Temperature AlarmStep Action1Use a low powered heat gun and gently heat the battery over temperature sensor (see location inFigure 3-23). Do Not hold the hot air gun closer than 7.6 cm (3 in.) to the sensor. This will avoidburning the cable insulation.2When the sensor is heated to approximately 50° C, a battery Over Temperature alarm is generated.NOTEAn audible click will sound as K1 contact engage and K2 contacts disengage.3Visually inspect the K1 and K2 relays to verify state changes. The LMF should be displaying correctalarms. (BTS #22)4Verify that the CHARGE DISABLE LED (amber) on the Meter Alarm Panel and the BATTERYMAIN LED (green) are both illuminated.5Switch the hot air gun to cool. Cool the sensor until the K1 and K2 contact return to normal position(K1 open and K2 closed). Use the LMF verify that all alarms have cleared.3
Alarms68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-101Figure 3-23: Battery Over-temperature SensorBuss Bar6 AWG CablesBattery Overtemp SensorNegative Temperature Compensation SensorFW004083
Alarms 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-102Rectifier Over Temperature AlarmNOTE This is connector J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself,this is not connector J8 on the connector bulkhead at the rear ofthe cabinet.Table 3-63 gives instructions on testing the battery over temperaturealarm system.Table 3-63: Rectifier Over Temperature AlarmStep Action1Remove the J8 link on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel (see Figure 3-24 for J8 location).NOTEThis is the J8 on the rear of the Meter Alarm Panel itself, this is not connector J8 on the connectorbulkhead at the rear of the cabinet.2Verify that RECTIFIER OVERTEMP LED (red) is lite. Contacts on K1 and K2 change states (K1now closed and K2 open).3Verify that the LMF has reported an alarm condition. (BTS #26)4Reinstall J8 connector and verify that all alarm conditions have cleared. K1 and K2 should now be intheir normal states (K1 open and K2 closed).5This completes the system tests of the SC 4812ET power cabinet. Figure 3-24: Location of Connector J8 on the Meter Alarm PanelOFFVOLTVOLT-+TEST POINTSAMPS-+TEST POINTSAMPPWRONREDYELBLKORVIOLENTOR BRWNTerminal BlockFRONT VIEWJ9J1J2J3 J8 J5J6 J4REAR VIEWTerminal BlockJ1 J2NotUsedJ6J5 J3Rear Connector PanelJ4FW002453
Before Leaving the site68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-103Before Leaving the siteTable 3-64 gives instructions on what to check before leaving the site.Table 3-64: Check Before Leaving the SiteStep Action1Verify that ALL battery circuit breakers (for occupied shelves) are CLOSED (pushed in).2Verify that the Heat Exchanger is running.3Verify that the Meter Alarm Panel and TCP modules are switched ON.4Verify that the Battery Test Switch on the Meter Alarm Panel is in the OFF position.5Verify that no alarm conditions are being reported (with all doors closed).3
Before Leaving the site 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY3-104Notes3
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-1Chapter 4Automated Test Procedures (ATP)4
ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-2ATP TestsIntroductionThe Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) allows MotorolaCellular Field Engineers (CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on allequipped BTS subsystem devices using the Local Maintenance Facility(LMF) and supported test equipment per the current Cell Site Data File(CDF) assignment.The results of these tests (at the option of the operator) are written to afile that can be printed. All tests are controlled via the LMF platformusing the GPIB interface, therefore, only recommended test equipmentsupported by the LMF can be used.This chapter describes the tests run from the GUI environment, which isthe recommended method. The GUI provides the advantages ofsimplifying the LMF user interface, reducing the potential for miskeyingcommmands and associated parameters, and speeding up the executionof complex operations involving multiple command strings. If you feelthe command line interface (CLI) will provide additional insight into theprogress of ATPs and problems that could possibly be encountered, referto LMF CLI Commands.NOTE Before using the LMF, use an editor to view the ”CAVEATS”section in the ”readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmf folder for anyapplicable information.The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-service sectors only.DO NOT substitute test equipment with other models notsupported by the LMF.Reduced ATPNOTE Equipment has been factory-tested for FCC compliance. Iflicense-governing bodies require documentation supportingSITE compliance with regulations, a full ATP may be necessary.Perform the Reduced ATP only if reports for the specific BTSsite are NOT required.After downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, theCellular Field Engineer (CFE) must perform these procedures (minimalrecommendation):1 Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Auditand FER tests.2 Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.Should failures occur while performing the specified tests, refer to theBasic Troubleshooting section of this manual for help in determining thefailure point. Once the point of failure has been identified and corrected,refer to the BTS Optimization and ATP Test Matrix section (Table B-1)to determine the applicable test that must be performed.4
ATP Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-3In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forwardlink problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform theadditional TX tests for troubleshooting: TX spectral mask, TX rho, andTX code domain.NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed information on test setconnections for calibrating equipment, cables and other test setcomponents, if required.Customer requirements determine which ATP tests are to be performedand the field engineer selects the appropriate ATP tests to run.The tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmit line up.These include the GLI3, MCC, BBX, and CIO cards, the LPAs andpassive components including splitters, combiners, bandpass filter,and RF cables.SAll RX: RX tests verify the performance of the BTS receiver line up.These includes the MPC (for starter frames), EMPC (for expansionframes), CIO, BBX, MCC, and GLI3 cards and the passivecomponents including RX filter (starter frame only), and RF cables.SAll TX/RX: Executes all the TX and RX tests.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, download BLO, andTX audit before running all of the TX and RX tests.ATP Test PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, ensure the following:SBTS has been optimized and calibrated (see Chapter 3).SLMF is logged into the BTS.SCSMs, GLI3s, BBXs, MCCs and TSU (if the RFDS is installed)havecorrect code load and data loadSPrimary CSM and GLI3 are INS_ACTSMCCs are INS_ACT.SBBXs are OOS-RAM.SBBXs are calibrated and BLOs are downloaded.STest cables are calibrated.STest equipment is selected.STest equipment is connected for ATP tests.STest equipment has been warmed up 60 minutes and calibrated.SGPIB is on.WARNING Before the FER is run, be sure that all LPAs are turned OFF(circuit breakers pulled) or that all transmitter ports are properlyterminated.All transmit ports must be properly terminated for all ATP tests.Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodily injury orequipment damage.4
ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-4TX/RX OUT ConnectionsNOTE Table:note. Note 10pt HelveticaMany of the acceptance test procedures require takingmeasurements at the TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector. At siteswith RFDS, all measurements are through the RFDS directionalcoupler TX OUT connector.ATP Test ProcedureThere are three different ATP testing options that can be performed tocompletely test a BTS. Depending on your requirements, one of thefollowing ATP testing options should be run. Table 4-1 provides theprocedure to execute an ATP test. To completely test a BTS, run the ATPtests according to one of the following ATP testing options.ATP Testing Option 1SAll TX/RX testATP Testing Option 2SAll TX testSAll RX testATP Testing Option 3STX Mask testSRho testSPilot Time Offset testSCode Domain Power testSFER testNOTE The Full Optimization test can be run if you want the TX pathcalibrated before all the TX and RX tests are run.NOTE If manual testing has been performed with the HP analyzer,remove the manual control/system memory card from the cardslot and set the IO CONFIG to the Talk & Listen mode beforestarting the automated testing.CDMA 2000 TestingSoftware release 2.16.x supports two new pieces of test equipment.These are the Agilent E4406A with E4432B, as well as the AdvantestR3267 with R3562. The E4406A/E4432B pair, or the R3267/R3562pair, should be connected together using a GPIB cable. This testequipment is capable of performing tests in both IS95 mode as well ascdma2000 mode if the required options are installed:The HP 8935 with option 200 or R2k for 1X TX and with AgilentE4432B Signal Generator for 1X FER (see note for options).NOTE E4432B Signal Generator” for 1X FER. The options are: UN8-Real Time I/Q Baseband Generator 1E5-High Stability Timebase 201-Real Time CDMA20004
ATP Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-5Individual Acceptance TestsThe following individual ATP tests can be used to verify the results ofspecific tests:Spectral Purity TX MaskThis test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform,generated on each sector, meets the transmit spectral mask specificationwith respect to the assigned CDF file values.Waveform Quality (rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digitalwaveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value inANSI-J_STD-019. “Rho” represents the correlation between actual andperfect CDMA modulation spectrum. A rho value of 1.0000 represents100% (or perfect correlation).Pilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the CDMA analyzermeasurement interval (based on the BTS system time reference) and theincoming block of transmitted data from the BTS (Pilot only, PilotGain = 262, PN Offset = 0).Code Domain PowerThis test verifies code domain power levels, which have been set for allODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This isdone by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”Walsh channels measures < -27 dB .Frame Error RateThe Frame Error Rate (FER) test verifies RX operation of the entireCDMA Reverse Link using all equipped MCCs assigned to allrespective sector/antennas. The test verifies the BTS sensitivity on alltraffic channel elements currently configured on all equipped MCCs atan RF input level of -119 dBm (or -116 dBm if using TMPC). Followthe procedure in Table 4-1 to perform any ATP test.NOTE The STOP button can be used to stop the testing process.4
ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-6ATP Test Procedure Table 4-1 describes the step-by-step procedures to run any APT Test.Table 4-1: ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Select the device(s) to be tested.2From the Tests menu, select the desired test.3Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier - bts# - sector# - carrier#) displayed in the Channels/Carrierpick list.To select multiple items, hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key while making the selections.4Type the appropriate channel number in the Carrier n Channels box.The default channel number displayed is determined by the CdmaChans[n] number in the cbsc-n.cdffile for the BTS.5If applicable, select Verify BLO (default) or Single-sided BLO.NOTESingle-sided BLO is only used when checking non-redundant transceivers.6For RX select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop-down list.7In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thedrop-down list.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop-down list: Pilot(default), CDF, CDFPilot or Standard.9 Click OK.The status report window and a Directions pop-up are displayed.10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.11 Click Save Results or Dismiss to close the status report window. If Dismiss is used the test results will not be saved in the test report file. Background: Tx Mask TestThis test verifies the spectral purity of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at aspecific frequency, per the current CDF file assignment. All tests areperformed using the external calibrated test set, controlled by the samecommand. All measurements are through the appropriate TX OUT(BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 541 for each antenna and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up, usingboth bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only). BBX2 power output is set to obtain +40 dBm asmeasured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDSdirectional coupler).4
ATP Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-7NOTE TX output power is set to +40 dBm by setting BTS power levelto +33.5 dBm to compensate for 6.5 dB increase from pilot gainset to 541.The calibrated communications test set measures and returns theattenuation level of all spurious and IM products in a 30 kHz resolutionbandwidth with respect to the mean power of the CDMA channel,measured in a 1.23 MHz bandwidth, in dB, verifying that results meetsystem tolerances at the following test points:S1.9 GHz- at least -45 dB @ + 885 kHz from center frequency- at least -45 dB @ - 885 kHz from center frequencyS800 MHz:- at least -55 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency- at least -55 dB @ - 750 kHz from center frequency- at least -60 dB @ + 1980 kHz from center frequency- at least -60 dB @ - 1980 kHz from center frequencyThe BBX2 then de-keys, and, if selected, the MCC is re-configured toassign the applicable redundant BBX2 to the current TX antenna pathunder test. The test is then repeated.Figure 4-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display- 900 kHz + 900 kHzCenter FrequencyReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the meanpower of the CDMA channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz- 750 kHz- 1980 kHzFW002824
ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-8Background: Rho TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element digital waveformquality of each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per thecurrent CDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementsare via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna, and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs will be forward link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed upusing both bbxlvl and bay level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier(with pilot channel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX2 power output isset to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTSor RFDS directional coupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the Pilotchannel element digital waveform quality (rho) in dB, verifying thatresult meets system tolerances. Waveform quality (rho) should be > 0.912 (-0.4 dB).The BBX2 then de-keys and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assignedto the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.The LMF Tests menu list item, Rho, performs the waveform quality testfor a XCVR(s). All measurements are made through the appropriate TXoutput connector using the calibrated TX cable setup.Background: Pilot Offset Acceptance TestThis test verifies the transmitted Pilot channel element Pilot Time Offsetof each BBX2 carrier keyed up at a specific frequency per the currentCDF file assignment. All tests are performed using the externalcalibrated test set controlled by the same command. All measurementswill be via the appropriate TX OUT (BTS/RFDS) connector.The Pilot Gain is set to 262 for each antenna and all TCH elements fromthe MCCs are forward link disabled. The BBX is keyed up using bothbbxlvl and bay level offsets to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilotchannel element only, Walsh code 0). BBX power output is set to40 dBm as measured at the TX OUT connector (on either the BTS orRFDS directional coupler).The calibrated communications test set measures and returns the PilotTime Offset in uS, verifying results meet system tolerances. Pilot TimeOffset should be within < 3 µs of the target PT Offset (0 mS).The BBX2 then de-keys, and the applicable redundant BBX2 is assignedto the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.4
ATP Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-9Background: Code Domain Power TestThis test verifies the Code Domain Power/Noise of each BBX2 carrierkeyed up at a specific frequency per the current CDF file assignment.All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set controlled bythe same command. All measurements are via the appropriate TX OUT(BTS/RFDS) connector.For each sector/antenna under test, the Pilot Gain is set to 262 and allMCC channel elements under test are configured to generate OrthogonalChannel Noise Source (OCNS) on different odd Walsh codes, and areassigned a full-rate gain of 81. The maximum number of MCC/CEs tobe tested at any one time is 32 (32 odd Walsh codes). If more than 32CEs exist, then multiple sets of measurements are made, so all channelelements are verified on all sectors.BBX2 power output is set to 40 dBm as measured at the TX OUTconnector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).Code domain power levels, which have been set for all ODD numberedWalsh channels, are verified using the OCNS command. This is done byverifying that Pilot Power (dBm) minus OCNS Power (dBm) is equal to10.2 + 2 dB and that the noise floor of all “OFF” Walsh channelsmeasures < -27 dB (with respect to total CDMA channel power).The BBX2 then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assignedto the current TX antenna path under test. The test is then repeated.Upon completion of the test, OCNS is disabled on the specifiedMCC/CE.4
ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-10Figure 4-2: Code Domain Power and Noise Floor LevelsPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < -27 dB SPEC.Inactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64MAX OCNSCHANNELMIN OCNSCHANNEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMAX NOISEFLOORPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR:< -27 dBInactive channelsWalsh 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ... 64FAILURE - DOES NOTMEET MIN OCNS SPEC.FAILURE - EXCEEDSMAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dBFAILURE - EXCEEDS MAXNOISE FLOOR SPEC. Showing all OCNS Passing Indicating Failures FW00283Background: FER TestThis test verifies the BTS FER on all traffic channel elements currentlyconfigured on all equipped MCCs (full rate at 1% FER) at an RF inputlevel of -119 dBm [or -116 dBm if using Tower Top Amplifier(TMPC)]. All tests are performed using the external calibrated test set asthe signal source controlled by the same command. All measurementswill be via the LMF.The pilot gain is set to 262 for each TX antenna and all channel elementsfrom the MCCs are forward-link disabled. The BBX2 is keyed up usingonly bbxlvl level offsets, to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channelelement only). BBX2 power output is set to -20 dBm as measured at theTX OUT connector (on either the BTS or RFDS directional coupler).The BBX2 must be keyed in order to enable the RX receive circuitry.4
ATP Tests68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-11The LMF prompts the MCC/CE under test to measure all zero longcodeand provide the FER report on the selected active MCC on the reverselink for both the main and diversity RX antenna paths, verifying theresults meet the following specification: FER returned less than 1% andtotal frames measured is 1500.All MCC/CEs selected are tested on the specified RX antenna path. TheBBX then de-keys and, the applicable redundant BBX2 is assigned tothe current RX antenna paths under test. The test is then repeated.BackgroundEach time an ATP test is run, an ATP report is updated to include theresults of the most recent ATP tests if the Save Results button is used toclose the status report window. The ATP report will not be updated if thestatus reports window is closed with use of the Dismiss button.ATP ReportA separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following foreach test:STest nameSBBX numberSChannel numberSCarrier numberSSector numberSUpper test limitSLower test limitSTest resultSPASS or FAILSDescription information (if applicable)STime stampSDetails/Warning information (if applicable)Follow the procedure in the Table 4-2 to view and create a printable filefor the ATP report of a BTS.Table 4-2: Generate an ATP Report Step Action1Click on the Login tab if it is not in the forefront.2Select the desired BTS from the Available Base Stations pick list.3Click on the Report button.4Sort the report if desired by clicking on a column heading.5Click on the Dismiss button if you do not want to create a printable file copy.6To create a printable file, select the desired file type in the picklist and then click on the Save button. 4
ATP Tests 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY4-12Notes4
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-1Chapter 5Prepare to Leave the Site5
Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-2Initializing Active ServiceExternal Test Equipment RemovalPerform the procedure in Table 5-1 to disconnect the test equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 5-1: External Test Equipment RemovalStep Action1Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the rear of the frame.CAUTION Verify all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correctports on the frame. Crossed antenna cables will cause systemdegradation of call processing. Reset All DevicesReset all devices by cycling power before leaving the site. The CBSCconfiguration data and code loads could be different from data and codeon the LMF. By resetting all devices, the CBSC can load the proper dataand code when the span is active again.Updating BTS CAL LMF Files in the CBSCUpdated CAL file information is moved from the LMF Windowsenvironment back to the CBSC which resides in a Unix environment.The procedures that follow detail how to move files from the Windowsenvironment to the CBSC.Copying CAL files from LMF to a DiskFollow the procedures in Table 5-2 to copy CAL files from a LMFcomputer to a 3.5 diskette.Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a DisketteStep Action1Insert a disk into your Windows A drive.NOTEIf your disk has not been formatted, format it using Windows. The disk must be DOS formattedbefore copying any files. Consult your Windows/DOS documentation or online helps on how toformat diskettes.2Click on the Start button and launch the Windows Explorer program from your Programs menu list.3Click on your C: drive.4Double Click on the wlmf folder.5Double Click on the CDMA folder.5
Initializing Active Service68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-3Table 5-2: Copy Files from LMF to a DisketteStep Action6Click on the bts-# folder for the calibration file you want to copy.7Drag the BTS-#.cal file to the 3-1/2 floppy (A:) icon on the top left of the screen and release themouse button.8Continue step 6 and 7 until you have copied each file desired and close the Windows Explorerprogram by selecting Close from the File menu option. Copying CAL files from diskette to the CBSCFollow the procedure in Table 5-3 to copy CAL files from a diskette tothe CBSC.Table 5-3: Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSCStep Action1Log into the CBSC workstation.2Place your diskette containing CAL file(s) in the CBSC workstation diskette drive.3 Enter eject -q and press the Enter key.4Enter mount and press the Enter key. Verify that floppy/no_name is displayed.NOTEIf the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.5 Enter cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.6 Enter ls -lia and press the Enter key. Verify that the bts-#.cal file is on the disk.7 Enter cd and press the Enter key.8 Enter pwd and press the Enter key. Verify that you are in your home directory (/home/<name>).9 Enter dos2unix /floppy/no_name/bts-#.cal bts-#.cal and press the Enter key (where # is the BTSnumber).10 Enter ls -l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify that the CAL file was successfully copied.11 Enter eject and press the Enter key.12 Remove the floppy disk from the workstation. BTS Site Span Configuration VerificationPerform the procedure in Table 5-4 to verify the current Span FramingFormat and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span should beverified.5
Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-4Table 5-4: BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to the front panel of theMGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).2Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon.NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.3Enter the following MMI command to display the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and linecode configuration (in bold type):span view <cr>Observe a display similar to the options shown below:COMMAND ACCEPTED: span viewThe parameter in NVM is set to T1_2.The frame format in flash is set to use T1_2.Equalization: Span A - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span B - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span C - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)S D D f lt (0 131 f t f T1/J1 120 Oh f E1) Span D - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span E - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1) Span F - Default (0-131 feet for T1/J1, 120 Ohm for E1)Linkspeed: Default (56K for T1 D4 AMI, 64K otherwise)Currently, the link is running at the default rate The actual rate is 0NOTEDefaults for span equalization are 0-40 m for T1/J1 spans and 120 Ohm for E1.Default linkspeed is 56K for T1 D4 AMI spans and 64K for all other types.There is no need to change from defaults unless the OMC-R/CBSC span configuration requires it.If the current MGLI3/SGLI3 framing format and line code configuration does not display the correctchoice, proceed to Table 5-5.4Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all remaining GLIs.5Exit the GLI MMI session and HyperTerminal connection by selecting File from the connectionwindow menu bar, and then Exit from the dropdown menu.5
Initializing Active Service68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-5Figure 5-1: MGLI3/SGLI3 MMI Port ConnectionREF- FW003449-PIN TO 9- PINRS-232 CABLENULL MODEM BOARD(PART# 8484877P01)RS-232 CABLE FROM LMF COM1PORTMMI SERIAL PORTGLI BOARDSet BTS Site Span ConfigurationPerform the procedure in Table 5-5 to configure the Span FramingFormat and Line Build Out (LBO) parameters. ALL MGLI3/SGLI3boards in all C-CCP shelves that terminate a T1/E1 span must beconfigured.NOTE Perform the following procedure ONLY if span configurationsloaded in the MGLI3/GLI3s do not match those in theOMCR/CBSC data base, AND ONLY when the exactconfiguration data is available. Loading incorrect spanconfiguration data will render the site inoperable.Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action1If not already done, connect a serial cable from the LMF COM1 port (via null modem board) to thefront panel of the MGLI3 MMI port (see Figure 5-1).2Start an MMI communication session with CSM-1 by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 3-5 on page 3-17).NOTEThe LMF program must not be running when a Hyperterminal session is started if COM1 is beingused for the MMI session.. . . continued on next page5
Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-6Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action3If required only, enter the following MMI command for each span line to set the BTS span parametersto match that of the physical spans a - f run to the site:span_config <option#1> <option#2> <option#3> <option#4> <option#5>option#1 = the span to change (a - f)option#2 = the span type (0 - 8):0 - E1_1 (HDB3, CCS, CRC-4)1 - E1_2 (HDB3, CCS)2 - E1_3 (HDB3, CAS, CRC-4, TS16)3 - E1_4 (HDB3, CAS, TS16)4 - T1_1 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, without ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)5 - T1_2 (B8ZS, DS1 AT&T ESF, 4 to 1 packing, 64K link)6 - J1_1 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, Japan CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)7 - J1_2 (B8ZS, J1 AT&T ESF, US CRC6, 4 to 1 packing)8 - T1_3 (AMI, DS1 AT&T D4, with ZCS, 3 to 1 packing, Group 0 unusable)option#3 = the link speed (56 or 64) Kbpsoption#4 = the span equalization (0 - 7):0 - T1_6 (T1,J1:long haul)1 - T1_4 (T1,J1:393-524 feet)2 - T1_4 (T1,J1:131-262 feet)3 - E1_75 (E1:75 Ohm)4 - T1_4 (T1,J1:0-131 feet)5 - T1_4 (T1,J1:524-655 feet)6 - T1_4 (T1,J1:262-393 feet)7 - E1_120 (E1:120 Ohm)option#5 = the slot that has LAPD channel (0 - 31)Example for setting span configuration to E1_2, 64 Kbps, E1_120-Ohm, LAPD channel 1:span_config a 1 64 7 1..span_config f 1 64 7 1Example for setting span configuration to T1_2, 64 Kbps, T1_4 (0-131 feet), LAPD channel 0:span_config a 5 64 4 0..span_config f 5 64 4 0* IMPORTANTMake sure that spans a - f are set to the same span type and link speed. The equalization may bedifferent for each individual span.After executing the span_config command, the affected MGLI3/SGLI3 board MUST be reset andre-loaded for changes to take effect.Although defaults are shown, always consult site specific documentation for span type and rate used atthe site.4Press the RESET button on the GLI3 for changes to take effect.. . . continued on next page5
Initializing Active Service68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-7Table 5-5: Set BTS Span Parameter ConfigurationStep Action5This completes the site specific BTS Span setup for this GLI. Move the MMI cable to the next SGLI3and repeat steps 1 and 4 for ALL MGLI3/SGLI3 boards.6Terminate the Hyperterm session and disconnect the LMF from the MGLI/SGLI. Re-connect BTS T1 Spans and Integrated Frame ModemBefore leaving the site, connect any T1 span TELCO connectors whichwere removed to allow the LMF to control the BTS. Refer to Table 5-6.Table 5-6: T1/E1 Span/IFM ConnectionsStep Action1Connect the surge protectors on the 50-pin punch block for the spans.2Ensure that the CSU is powered ON.3Verify the span status.LMF RemovalCAUTION DO NOT power down the CDMA LMF without performing theprocedure indicated below. Corrupted/lost data files may result,and in some cases, the CDMA LMF may lock up.Follow the procedures in Table 5-7 to terminate the LMF session andremove the terminal.Table 5-7: Terminate the LMF Session and Remove the LMFStep Action1From the CDMA window select File>Exit.2From the Windows Task Bar click Start>Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windowsmessage appears.3Disconnect the LMF terminal Ethernet connector from the BTS cabinet.4Disconnect the LMF serial port, the RS-232 to GPIB interface box, and the GPIB cables as requiredfor equipment transport.Reestablish OMC-R Control/ Verifying T1/E1NOTE After all activities at the site have been completed, includingdisconnecting the LMF, place a phone call to the OMC-R andrequest the BTS be placed under control of the OMC-R.5
Initializing Active Service 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY5-85
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-1Chapter 6Troubleshooting6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-2TroubleshootingOverviewThe information in this chapter addresses some of the scenarios likely tobe encountered by Customer Field Engineering (CFE) team members.This troubleshooting guide was created as an interim reference documentfor use in the field. It provides basic “what to do if” basictroubleshooting suggestions when the BTS equipment does not performper the procedure documented in the manual.Comments are consolidated from inputs provided by CFEs in the fieldand information gained form experience in Motorola labs andclassrooms.Cannot Log into Cell-SiteFollow the procedure in Table 6-1 to troubleshoot any Login Failureproblem during normal operation.Table 6-1: Login Failure Troubleshooting ProcedurenStep Action1If MGLI3 LED is solid RED, it implies a hardware failure. Reset MGLI3 by re-seating it. If thispersists, install RGLI3 card in MGLI3 slot and retry. A Red LED may also indicate no Ethernettermination at top of frame.2Verify that T1 is disconnected at the Channel Signaling Unit (CSU). If T1 is still connected,verify the CBSC has disabled the BTS.3Try ‘ping’ing the MGLI3.4Verify the LMF is connected to the Primary LMF port (LAN A) in front of the BTS.5Verify the LMF was configured properly.6Verify the BTS-LMF cable is RG-58 (flexible black cable of less than 2.5 feet length).7Verify the Ethernet ports are terminated properly.8Verify a T-adapter is not used on LMF side port if connected to the BTS front LMF primaryport.9Try connecting to the I/O panel (back of frame). Use Tri-Ax to BNC adapter at the LMF port forthis connection.10 Re-boot the CDMA LMF and retry.11 Re-seat the MGLI3 and retry.12 Verify IP addresses are configured properly. 6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-3Cannot Communicate to Power MeterFollow the procedure in Table 6-2 to troubleshoot a power metercommunication failure.Table 6-2: Troubleshooting a Power Meter Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify Power Meter is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable setup as specified in Chapter 3.3Verify the GP-IB address of the Power Meter is set to 13. Refer to Test Equipment setup sectionof Chapter 3 for details.4Verify that Com1 port is not used by another application.5Verify that the communications analyzer is in Talk&Listen, not Control mode. Cannot Communicate to Communications AnalyzerFollow the procedure in Table 6-3 to troubleshoot a communicationanalyzer failure.Table 6-3: Troubleshooting a Communications Analyzer Communication FailurenStep Action1Verify analyzer is connected to LMF with GPIB adapter.2Verify cable setup.3Verify the GPIB address is set to 18.4Verify the GPIB adapter DIP switch settings are correct. Refer to Test Equipment setup sectionfor details.5Verify the GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, then power-cycle the GPIBBox and retry.6If a Hyperterm window is open for MMI, close it.7Verify the LMF GPIB address is set to 188Verify the analyzer is in Talk and Listen not Control mode. Code Download FailureFollow the procedure in Table 6-4 to troubleshoot any code downloadfailure.Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download FailurenStep Action1Verify T1 is disconnected from the BTS at CSU.2Verify LMF can communicate with the BTS device using the Status function.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-4Table 6-4: Troubleshooting Code Download FailurenActionStep3Communication to MGLI3 must first be established before trying to talk to any other BTSdevice. MGLI3 must be INS_ACT state (green).4Verify the card is physically present in the cage and powered-up.5If card LED is solid RED, it implies hardware failure. Reset card by re-seating it. If this persists,replace card from another slot & retry.NOTEThe card can only be replaced by a card of the same type.6Re-seat card and try again.7If BBX reports a failure message and is OOS_RAM, the code load was OK. Status it.8If the download portion completes and the reset portion fails, reset the device by selecting thedevice and reset. Cannot Download DATA to Any Device (Card)Follow the procedure in Table 6-5 to troubleshoot any data downloadfailure.Table 6-5: Troubleshooting Data Download FailurenStep Action1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.2Verify the ROM and RAM code loads are of the same release by statusing the card. Refer toChapter 3, “Download the BTS” for more information.Cannot ENABLE DeviceBefore a device can be enabled (placed in-service), it must be in theOOS_RAM state (yellow on the LMF) with data downloaded to thedevice. The color of the device on the LMF changes to green, once it isenabled.The three states that devices can be displayed:SEnabled (green, INS)SDisabled (yellow, OOS_RAM)SReset (blue, OOS_ROM)Follow the procedure in Table 6-6 to troubleshoot device enable failure.Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) FailurenStep Action1Re-seat card and repeat code and data load procedure.2If CSM cannot be enabled, verify the CDF file has correct latitude and longitude data for cellsite location and GPS sync.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-5Table 6-6: Troubleshooting Device Enable (INS) FailurenActionStep3Ensure primary CSM is in INS_ACT state.NOTEMCCs will not go INS without the CSM being INS.4Verify 19.6608 MHz CSM clock; MCCs will not go INS otherwise.5The BBX should not be enabled for ATP tests.6If MCCs give “invalid or no system time,” verify the CSM is enabled. LPA ErrorsFollow the procedure in Table 6-7 to troubleshoot any LPA errors.Table 6-7: LPA ErrorsnStep Action1If LPAs continue to give alarms, even after cycling power at the circuit breakers, then connect anMMI cable to the LPA and set up a Hyperterminal connection. Enter ALARMS in theHyperterminal window. The resulting LMF display may provide an indication of the problem.(Call Field Support for further assistance.)Bay Level Offset Calibration FailureFollow the procedure in Table 6-8 to troubleshoot a BLO calibrationfailure.Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration FailurenStep Action1Verify the Power Meter is configured correctly (see the test equipment setup section) andconnection is made to the proper TX port.2Verify the parameters in the bts-#.cdf file are set correctly for the following bands:For 1900 MHz:BandClass=1; FreqBand=16For 800 MHz:BandClass=0; FreqBand=83Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pullingthe circuit breaker, and after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensorhead.5Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power offand on) the GPIB Box and retry.6Verify sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) Power Refsignal.. . . continued on next page6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-6Table 6-8: Troubleshooting BLO Calibration FailurenActionStep7If communication between the LMF and Power Meter is operational, the Meter display willshow “RES :’’8Verify the combiner frequency is the same as the test freq/chan. Calibration Audit FailureFollow the procedure in Table 6-9 to troubleshoot a calibration auditfailure.Table 6-9: Troubleshooting Calibration Audit FailurenStep Action1Verify Power Meter is configured correctly (refer to the test equipment setup section of chapter3).2Re-calibrate the Power Meter and verify it is calibrated correctly with cal factors from sensorhead.3Verify that no LPA is in alarm state (rapidly flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pulling thecircuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.4Verify that no sensor head is functioning properly by checking it with the 1 mW (0 dBm) PowerRef signal.5After calibration, the BLO data must be re-loaded to the BBX2s before auditing. Click on theBBX(s) and select Device>Download BLORe-try the audit.6Verify GPIB adapter is not locked up. Under normal conditions, only 2 green LEDs must be‘ON’ (Power and Ready). If any other LED is continuously ‘ON’, power-cycle (turn power offand on) the GP-IB Box and retry. Forward link problemIf the BTS passes the reduced ATP tests but has a forward link problemduring normal operation follow the procedure in Table 6-10 totroubleshoot.Table 6-10: Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS Passed Reduced ATP)nStep Action1Perform these additional TX tests to troubleshoot a forward link problem:- TX mask- TX rho- TX code domain6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-7Cannot Perform Txmask MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-11 to troubleshoot a TX MaskMeasurement failure.Table 6-11: Troubleshooting TX Mask Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify that TX audit passes for the BBX(s).2If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.3Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Re-set the LPA by pullingthe circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing it back in.Cannot Perform Rho or Pilot Time Offset MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-12 to troubleshoot a rhoand pilot timeoffset measurement failure.Table 6-12: Troubleshooting Rho and Pilot Time Offset Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offsets displayed on the analyzer is the same as the PN offset in the CDF file.3Re-load MGLI3 data and repeat the test.4If performing manual measurement, verify analyzer setup.5Verify that no LPA in the sector is in alarm state (flashing red LED). Reset the LPA by pullingthe circuit breaker, and, after 5 seconds, pushing back in.6If Rho value is unstable and varies considerably (e.g. .95,.92,.93), this may indicate that theGPS is still phasing (i.e. trying to reach and maintain 0 freq. error). Go to the freq. bar in theupper right corner of the Rho meter and select Hz. Press <Shift-avg> and enter 10, to obtain anaverage Rho value. This is an indication the GPS has not stabilized before going INS and mayneed to be re-initialized. Cannot Perform Code Domain Power and Noise Floor MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-13 to troubleshoot code domain andnoise floor measurement failure.Table 6-13: Troubleshooting Code Domain Power and Noise Floor Measurement FailurenStep Action1Verify presence of RF signal by switching to spectrum analyzer screen.2Verify PN offset displayed on analyzer is same as PN offset being used in the CDF file.3Disable and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based on extent of failure). 6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-8Cannot Perform Carrier MeasurementFollow the procedure in Table 6-14 to troubleshoot carrier measurementfailure.Table 6-14: Troubleshooting Carrier Measurement FailurenStep Action1Perform the test manually, using the spread CDMA signal. Verify High Stability 10 MHzRubidium Standard is warmed up (60 minutes) and properly connected to test set-up.Multi-FER Test FailureFollow the procedure in Table 6-15 to troubleshoot multi-FER failure.Table 6-15: Troubleshooting Multi-FER FailurenStep Action1Verify test equipment set up is correct for a FER test.2Verify test equipment is locked to 19.6608 and even second clocks. The yellowLED (REF UNLOCK) must be OFF.3Verify MCCs have been loaded with data and are INS-ACT.4Disable and re-enable the MCC (one or more based on extent of failure).5Disable, re-load code and data, and re-enable MCC (one or more MCCs based onextent of failure).6Verify antenna connections to frame are correct based on the directions messages. Problem DescriptionMany of the Clock Synchronization Manager (CSM) boards may beresolved in the field before sending the boards to the factory for repair.This section describes known CSM problems identified in field returns,some of which are field-repairable. Check these problems beforereturning suspect CSM boards.Intermittent 19.6608 MHz Reference Clock/GPS Receiver OperationIf having any problems with CSM board kit numbers, SGLN1145 orSGLN4132, check the suffix with the kit number. If the kit has version“AB,” then replace with version ‘‘BC’’ or higher, and return model ABto the repair center.No GPS Reference SourceCheck the CSM boards for proper hardware configuration. RF-GPS(Local GPS) - CSM kit SGLN1145, which should be installed in Slot l,has an on-board GPS receiver; while kit SGLN4132, in Slot 2, does nothave a GPS receiver.Remote GPS (R-GPS) - Kit SGLN4132ED or later, which should beinstalled in both Slot 1 and Slot 2, does not have a GPS receiver. Anyincorrectly configured board must be returned to the repair center. Do notattempt to change hardware configuration in the field. Also, verify theGPS antenna is not damaged and is installed per recommendedguidelines.6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-9Checksum Failure The CSM could have corrupted data in its firmware resulting in anon-executable code. The problem is usually caused by either electricaldisturbance, or interruption of data during a download. Attempt anotherdownload with no interruptions in the data transfer. Return CSM boardback to repair center if the attempt to reload fails.GPS Bad RX Message TypeThis is believed to be caused by a later version of CSM software (3.5 orhigher) being downloaded, via LMF, followed by an earlier version ofCSM software (3.4 or lower), being downloaded from the CBSC.Download again with CSM software code 3.5 or higher. Return CSMboard back to repair center if attempt to reload fails.CSM Reference Source Configuration ErrorThis is caused by incorrect reference source configuration performed inthe field by software download. CSM kit SGLN1145 and SGLN4132must have proper reference sources configured (as shown below) tofunction correctly.CSM Kit No. Hardware Configuration CSM Slot No. Reference Source ConfigurationSGLN1145 With GPS Receiver 1Primary = Local GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSOSGLN4132EDor later Without GPS Receiver 2Primary = Remote GPSBackup = Either LFR or HSOTakes Too Long for CSM to Come INSThis may be caused by a delay in GPS acquisition. Check the accuracyflag status and/or current position. Refer to the GSM system time/GPSand LFR/HSO verification section in Chapter 3. At least 1 satelliteshould be visible and tracked for the “surveyed” mode and 4 satellitesshould be visible and tracked for the “estimated” mode. Also, verifycorrect base site position data used in “surveyed” mode.6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-10C-CCP BackplaneThe C-CCP backplane is a multi-layer board that interconnects all theC-CCP modules. The complexity of this board lends itself to possibleimproper diagnoses when problems occur.Connector FunctionalityThe following connector overview describes the major types ofbackplane connectors along with the functionality of each. This willallow the Cellular Field Engineer (CFE) to:SDetermine which connector(s) is associated with a specific problemtype.SAllow the isolation of problems to a specific cable or connector.Primary “A” and Redundant “B” ISB (Inter Shelf Bus)connectorsThe 40 pin ISB connectors provide an interface bus from the masterGLI3 to all other GLI3s in the modem frame. Its basic function is toprovide clock synchronization from the master GLI3 to all other GLI3sin the frame.The ISB is also provides the following functions:SGroom span line when a single span is used for multiple cages.SProvide MMI connection to/from the master GLI3 to cell site modem.SProvide interface between GLI3s and the AMR (for reporting BTSalarms).Span Line ConnectorThe span line input is an 8 pin RJ-45 connector that provides a primaryand secondary (if used) span line interface to each GLI3 in the C-CCPshelf. The span line is used for MM/EMX switch control of the MasterGLI3 and also all the BBX traffic.Power Input (Return A, B, and C connectors)Provides a +27 Volt input for use by the power supply modules.Power Supply Module InterfaceEach power supply module has a series of three different connectors toprovide the needed inputs/outputs to the C-CCP backplane. Theseinclude a VCC/Ground input connector, a Harting style multiple pininterface, and a +15 V/Analog Ground output connector. The TransceiverPower Module converts 27/48 Volts to a regulated +15, +6.5, +5.0 Voltsto be used by the C-CCP shelf cards.GLI3 ConnectorThis connector consists of a Harting 4SU digital connector and a6-conductor coaxial connector for RDM distribution. The connectorsprovide inputs/outputs for the GLI3s in the C-CCP backplane.6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-11GLI3 Ethernet “A” and “B” ConnectionsThese BNC connectors are located on the C-CCP backplane and routedto the GLI3 board. This interface provides all the control and datacommunications between the master GLI3 and the other GLI3, betweengateways, and for the LMF on the LAN.BBX2 ConnectorEach BBX connector consists of a Harting 2SU/1SU digital connectorand two 6-conductor coaxial connectors. These connectors provide DC,digital, and RF inputs/outputs for the BBXs in the C-CCP backplane.CIO ConnectorsSRX RF antenna path signal inputs are routed through RX Tri-Filters(on the I/O plate), and via coaxial cables to the two MPC modules -the six “A” (main) signals go to one MPC; the six “B” (diversity) tothe other. The MPC outputs the low-noise-amplified signals via theC-CCP backplane to the CIO where the signals are split and sent tothe appropriate BBX.SA digital bus then routes the baseband signal through the BBX, to thebackplane, then on to the MCC slots.SDigital TX antenna path signals originate at the MCC24s. Eachoutput is routed from the MCC slot via the backplane appropriateBBX.STX RF path signal originates from the BBX, through the backplane tothe CIO, through the CIO, and via multi-conductor coaxial cabling tothe LPAs in the LPA shelf.C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting ProcedureThe following table provides a standard procedure for troubleshootingproblems that appear to be related to a defective C-CCP backplane. Thetable is broken down into possible problems and steps which should betaken in an attempt to find the root cause.NOTE It is important to note that all steps be followed before replacingANY C-CCP backplane.Digital Control ProblemsNo GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s)Follow the procedure in Table 6-16 for problems with GLI3 control.Table 6-16: No GLI3 Control via LMF (all GLI3s)Step Action1Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.2Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.3Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-12No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (AllGLI3s)Follow the procedure in Table 6-17 for problems with GLI3 control.Table 6-17: No GLI3 Control through Span Line Connection (Both GLI3s)Step Action1Verify C-CCP backplane Shelf ID DIP switch is set correctly.2Verify that the BTS and GLI3s are correctly configured in the OMCR/CBSC data base.3Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.5Check the span line inputs from the top of the frame to the master GLI3 for proper connection anddamage.MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3Follow the procedure in Table 6-18 for problems with GLI3 control.Table 6-18: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3Step Action1Verify that the BTS and GLI3s are correctly configured in the OMCR CBSC data base.2Check the ethernet for proper connection, damage, shorts, or opens.3Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3. No AMR Control (MGLI3 good)Follow the procedure in Table 6-19 for problems with AMR control.Table 6-19: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over AMRStep Action1Visually check the master GLI3 connector (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the master GLI3 with a known good GLI3.3Replace the AMR with a known good AMR.No BBX Control in the ShelfFollow the procedure in Table 6-20 for problems with co-located GLI3.Table 6-20: MGLI3 Control Good - No Control over Co-located GLI3sStep Action1Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.3Visually check BBX connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the BBX with a known good BBX.6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-13No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficFollow the procedure in Table 6-21 for problems with span line traffic.Table 6-21: BBX Control Good - No (or Missing) Span Line TrafficStep Action1Visually check all GLI3 connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the remaining GLI3 with a known good GLI3.3Visually check all span line distribution (both connectors and cables) for damage.4If the problem seems to be limited to 1 BBX, replace the BBX with a known good BBX.No (or Missing) MCC24 Channel ElementsFollow the procedure in Table 6-22 for problems with channel elements.Table 6-22: No MCC-1X/MCC24E/MCC8E Channel ElementsStep Action1Verify channel elements on a co-located MCC of the same type (CDF MccType codes:MCC8E = 0; MCC24E = 2; MCC-1X = 3)2Check MCC connectors (both module and backplane) for damage.3 If the problem seems to be limited to one MCC, replace it with a known good MCC of the sametype.4If no channel elements on any MCC, verify clock reference to CIO.6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-14DC Power ProblemsWARNING Potentially lethal voltage and current levels are routed to theBTS equipment. This test must be carried out with a secondperson present, acting in a safety role. Remove all rings, jewelry,and wrist watches prior to beginning this test.No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleFollow the procedure in Table 6-23 for problems with DC input voltage.Table 6-23: No DC Input Voltage to Power Supply ModuleStep Action1Verify DC power is applied to the BTS frame. Verify there are no breakers tripped.* IMPORTANTIf a breaker has tripped, remove all modules from the applicable shelf supplied by the breaker andattempt to reset it.- If breaker trips again, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.- If breaker does not trip, there is probably a defective module or sub-assembly within theshelf.2Verify that the C-CCP shelf breaker on the BTS frame breaker panel is functional.3Use a voltmeter to determine if the input voltage is being routed to the C-CCP backplane bymeasuring the DC voltage level on the PWR_IN cable.- If the voltage is not present, there is probably a cable or breaker problem within the frame.- If the voltage is present at the connector, reconnect and measure the level at the “VCC” powerfeed clip on the distribution backplane. If the voltage is correct at the power clip, inspect theclip for damage.4If everything appears to be correct, visually inspect the power supply module connectors.5Replace the power supply module with a known good module.6If steps 1 through 4 fail to indicate a problem, the C-CCP backplane failure (possibly an opentrace) has occurred.No DC Voltage (+5, +6.5, or +15 Volts) to a Specific GLI3,BBX2, or SwitchboardFollow the procedure in Table 6-24 for problems with DC input voltage.Table 6-24: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Verify steps outlined in Table 6-23 have been performed.2Inspect the defective board/module (both board and backplane) connector for damage.3Replace suspect board/module with known good board/module.SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xFollow the procedure in Table 6-25 for problems with DC input voltage.6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-15Table 6-25: No DC Input Voltage to any C-CCP Shelf ModuleStep Action1Inspect all Harting Cable connectors and back-plane connectors for damage in all the affectedboard slots.2Perform steps outlined in the RF path troubleshooting flowchart in this manual.RFDSThe RFDS is used to perform Pre-Calibration Verification andPost-Calibration Audits which limit-check the RFDS-generate andreported receive levels of every path from the RFDS through thedirectional coupler coupled paths. In the event of test failure, refer to thefollowing tables.All tests failFollow the procedure in Table 6-26 for problems with RFDS.Table 6-26: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests failStep Action1Check the calibration equipment for proper operation by manually setting the signal generator outputattenuator to the lowest output power setting and connecting the output port to the spectrum analyzerrf input port.2Set the signal generator output attenuator to -90 dBm, and switch on the rf output. Verify that thespectrum analyzer can receive the signal, indicate the correct signal strength, (accounting for the cableinsertion loss), and the approximate frequency.3Visually inspect RF cabling. Make sure each directional coupler forward and reflected port connects tothe RFDS antenna select unit on the RFDS.4Check the wiring against the site documentation wiring diagram or the BTS Site Installation manual.5Verify RGLI and TSU have been downloaded.6Check to see that all RFDS boards show green on the front panel indicators. Visually check (bothboard and backplane) for damage.7Replace any boards that do not show green with known good boards one at a time in the followingorder. Re-test after each is replaced.- RFDS ASU board.- RFDS Transceiver board. 6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-16All RX and TX paths failIf every receive or transmit path fails, the problem most likely lies withthe rf converter board or the transceiver board. Refer to Table 6-27 forfault isolation procedures.Table 6-27: RFDS Fault Isolation - All RX and TX paths failStep Action1Visually check the master RF converter board (both board and backplane) for damage.2Replace the RF converter board with a known good RF converter board.3Visually check RXCVR TSU (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the TSU with a known good TSU.All tests fail on a single antennaIf all path failures are on one antenna port, forward and/or reflected,follow the procedures in Table 6-28 checks.Table 6-28: RFDS Fault Isolation - All tests fail on single antenna pathStep Action1Visually inspect the site interface cabinet internal cabling to the suspect directional coupler antennaport.2Verify the forward and reflected ports connect to the correct RFDS antenna select unit positions on theRFDS backplane. Refer to the installation manual for details.3Visually check ASU connectors (both board and backplane) for damage.4Replace the ASU with a known good ASU.5Replace the RF cables between the affected directional coupler and RFDS.NOTEExternally route the cable to bypass suspect segment. Module Status IndicatorsEach of the non-passive plug-in modules has a bi-color (green & red)LED status indicator located on the module front panel. The indicator islabeled PWR/ALM. If both colors are turned on, the indicator is yellow.Each plug-in module, except for the fan module, has its own alarm(fault) detection circuitry that controls the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The fan TACH signal of each fan module is monitored by the AMR.Based on the status of this signal the AMR controls the state of thePWR/ALM LED on the fan module.6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-17LED Status Combs All Modules (except GLI3, CSM, BBX2, MCC8/24E)PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the module status indicator.SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware failure.Note that a fault (alarm) indication may or may not be due to a completemodule failure and normal service may or may not be reduced orinterrupted.DC/DC Converter LED Status CombinationsThe PWR CNVTR has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.PWR/ALM LEDThe following list describes the states of the bi-color LED.SSolid GREEN - module operating in a normal (fault free) condition.SSolid RED - module is operating in a fault (alarm) condition due toelectrical hardware problem.CSM LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe CSMs include on-board alarm detection. Hardware andsoftware/firmware alarms are indicated via the front panel indicators.After the memory tests, the CSM loads OOS-RAM code from the FlashEPROM, if available. If not available, the OOS-ROM code is loadedfrom the Flash EPROM.SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT or INS_STBY no alarm.SSolid RED - Initial power up or module is operating in a fault (alarm)condition.SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.SLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarm.SRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarm or INS_ACT in DUMB mode.SShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarm.SLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT or INS_STBY alarm.SOff - no DC power or on-board fuse is open.SSolid YELLOW - After a reset, the CSMs begin to boot. DuringSRAM test and Flash EPROM code check, the LED is yellow. (IfSRAM or Flash EPROM fail, the LED changes to a solid RED andthe CSM attempts to reboot.)6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-18Figure 6-1: CSM Front Panel Indicators & Monitor PortsPWR/ALMIndicatorFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORFW00303 . . . continued on next pageFREQ Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the 19.6608 MHz clock generated by the CSM. Whenboth CSM 1 and CSM 2 are in an in-service (INS) condition, the CSM 2clock signal frequency is the same as that output by CSM 1.The clock is a sine wave signal with a minimum amplitude of +2 dBm(800 mVpp) into a 50 Ω load connected to this port.SYNC Monitor ConnectorA test port provided at the CSM front panel via a BNC receptacle allowsmonitoring of the “Even Second Tick” reference signal generated by theCSMs.At this port, the reference signal is a TTL active high signal with a pulsewidth of 153 nanoseconds.MMI Connector - Only accessible behind front panel. TheRS-232 MMI port connector is intended to be used primarily inthe development or factory environment, but may be used in thefield for debug/maintenance purposes.6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-19GLI3 LED Status CombinationsThe GLI3 module has indicators, controls and connectors as describedbelow and shown in Figure 6-2.The indicators and controls consist of:SFour LEDsSOne pushbuttonACTIVE LEDSolid GREEN - GLI3 is active. This means that the GLI3 has shelfcontrol and is providing control of the digital interfaces.Off - GLI3 is not active (i.e., Standby). The mate GLI3 should beactive.MASTER LEDSSolid GREEN - GLI3 is Master (sometimes referred to as MGLI3).SOff - GLI3 is non-master (i.e., Slave).ALARM LEDSSolid RED - GLI3 is in a fault condition or in reset.SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is OFF while GLI3 isperforming ROM boot (about 12 seconds for normal boot).SWhile in reset transition, STATUS LED is ON while GLI3 isperforming RAM boot (about 4 seconds for normal boot).SOff - No Alarm.STATUS LEDSFlashing GREEN- GLI3 is in service (INS), in a stable operatingcondition.SOn - GLI3 is in OOS RAM state operating downloaded code.SOff - GLI3 is in OOS ROM state operating boot code.SPANS LEDSSolid GREEN - Span line is connected and operating.SSolid RED - Span line is disconnected or a fault condition exists.6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-20GLI3 Pushbuttons and ConnectorsRESET Pushbutton - Depressing the RESET pushbuttoncauses a partial reset of the CPU and a reset of all board devices.GLI3 will be placed in the OOS_ROM stateMMI Connector - The RS-232MMI port connector is intendedto be used primarily in the development or factory environmentbut may be used in the field for debug/maintenance purposes.Figure 6-2: GLI3 Front Panel Operating IndicatorsSTATUS OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)RESETALARM OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up when the Alarm LED turns OFFSLOW GREEN − when the GLI3 is INS (in−service)BPR ASpanMMIACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSPressing and releasing the switch resets all functions on the GLI3.Shows the operating status of the redundant cards. The redundantcard toggles automatically if the active card is removed or failsON − active card operating normallyOFF − standby card operating normallyConnects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as anethernet hub.An RS−232, serial, asynchronous communications link for use asan MMI port. This port supports 300 baud, up to a maximum of115,200 baud communications.BPR BGLIAUXSupports the cross−coupled ethernet circuits to the mate GLI using astandard ethernet straight cable.Wired as an ethernet hub for direct connection to a personal comput−er with a standard ethernet cable. It allows connection of ethernetsniffer" when the ethernet switch is properly configured for port mon−itoring.Connects to either a BPR or expansion cage and is wired as anethernet hub.MMI PortReset SwitchDual 100BASE-Tin a single RJ45to Redundant(Mate) GLI3100BASE-TAuxiliary MonitorPortBPR B AUX RESETSPANALARM MMIACTSTA100BASE-T toBTS Packet Routeror Expansion cageSpan (LED)Alarm (LED)Active (LED)Status (LED)GLIBPR Ati-CDMA-WP-00064-v01-ildoc-ftwOFF − card is powered down, in initialization, or in standbyGREEN − operating normallyYELLOW − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is receivinga remote alarm indication signal from the far endRED − one or more of the equipped initialized spans is in an alarmstate6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-21BBX LED Status CombinationsPWR/ALM LEDThe BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED.The following list describes the states of the bi-color LED:SSolid GREEN - INS_ACT no alarmSSolid RED Red - initializing or power-up alarmSSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarmSLong RED/Short GREEN - OOS_ROM alarmSRapidly Flashing GREEN - OOS_RAM no alarmSShort RED/Short GREEN - OOS_RAM alarmSLong GREEN/Short RED - INS_ACT alarmMCC LED Status CombinationsThe MCC module has LED indicators and connectors as describedbelow. See Figure 6-3. Note that the figure does not show the connectorsas they are concealed by the removable lens.The LED indicators and their states are as follows:PWR/ALM LEDSRED - fault on moduleACTIVE LEDSOff - module is inactive, off-line, or not processing traffic.SSlowly Flashing GREEN - OOS_ROM no alarm.SRapidly Flashing Green - OOS_RAM no alarm.SSolid GREEN - module is INS_ACT, on-line, processing traffic.PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDsSSolid RED - module is powered but is in reset or the BCP is inactive.MMI ConnectorsSThe RS-232 MMI port connector (four-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development or factory environment but may be usedin the field for debugging purposes.SThe RJ-11 ethernet port connector (eight-pin) is intended to be usedprimarily in the development environment but may be used in the fieldfor high data rate debugging purposes.6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-22Figure 6-3: MCC24/8E Front Panel LEDs and LED IndicatorsPWR/ALM LEDLENS(REMOVABLE)ACTIVE LEDPWR/ALM ACTIVEPWR/ALM OFF − operating normallyON − briefly during power−up and during failureconditionsACTIVELED OPERATING STATUSRAPIDLY BLINKING − Card is code−loaded butnot enabledSLOW BLINKING − Card is not code−loadedON − card is code−loaded and enabled(INS_ACTIVE)COLORGREENREDRED ON − fault conditionSLOW FLASHING (alternating with green) − CHIbus inactive on power−upAn alarm is generated in the event of a failureFW00224LPA Shelf LED Status CombinationsLPA Module LEDEach LPA module contains a bi-color LED just above the MMIconnector on the ETIB module. Interpret this LED as follows:SGREEN — LPA module is active and is reporting no alarms (Normalcondition).SFlashing GREEN/RED — LPA module is active but is reporting anlow input power condition. If no BBX is keyed, this is normal anddoes not constitute a failure.SFlashing RED — LPA is in alarm.Span Problems(No Control Link)Follow the procedure in Table 6-29 when troubleshooting a control linkfailure.6
Troubleshooting68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-23Table 6-29: Troubleshooting Control Link FailurenStep Action1Verify the span settings using the span view command on the active master GLI3 MMIport. If these are set correctly, verify the edlc parameters using the show command. Anyalarms conditions indicate that the span is not operating correctly.- Try looping back the span line from the DSX panel back to the mobility manager(MM) and verify that the looped signal is good.- Listen for control tone on appropriate timeslot from base site and MM.6
Troubleshooting 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARY6-24Notes6
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-1Appendix ASystem DataA
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-2Site Operation VerificationVerification of Test Equipment UsedTable A-1: Verification of Test Equipment UsedManufacturer Model Serial NumberComments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-3Site ChecklistTable A-2: Site ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Deliveries Per established procedures-Floor Plan Verified---Inter Frame Cables:EthernetFrame GroundPowerPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure---Factory Data:BBXTest PanelRFDSPer procedurePer procedurePer procedure-Site Temperature-Dress Covers/BracketsA
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-4Preliminary OperationsTable A-3: Preliminary OperationsOK Parameter Specification Comments-Shelf ID Dip Switches Per site equipage-Ethernet LAN verification Verified per procedureComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-5Pre-Power and Initial Power TestsTable A3a: Pre-power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments-Pre-power-up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications--------Internal Cables:ISB (all cages)CSM (all cages)Power (all cages)Ethernet ConnectorsLAN A ohmsLAN B ohmsLAN A shieldLAN B shieldEthernet Bootsverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedverifiedisolatedisolatedinstalled-Air Impedance Cage (single cage) installed-Initial power-up tests Verify power supplyoutput voltage at the topof each BTS frame iswithin specifications:Comments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-6General Optimization ChecklistTable A3b: Pre-power ChecklistOK Parameter Specification Comments--LEDsFrame fansilluminatedoperational----LMF to BTS ConnectionPreparing the LMFLog into the LMF PCCreate site specific BTS directoryDownload device loadsper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure--Ping LAN APing LAN Bper procedureper procedure---------Download/Enable MGLI3sDownload/Enable GLI3sSet Site Span ConfigurationDownload CSMsEnable CSMsEnable CSMsDownload/Enable MCCs*Download BBXs*Download TSU (in RFDS)Program TSU NAMper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedureper procedure-Test Set Calibration per procedure*MCCs may be MCC8Es, MCC24s or MCC-1Xs. BBXs may be BBXs or BBX-1XsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-7GPS Receiver OperationTable A-4: GPS Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-GPS Receiver Control Task State:tracking satellitesVerify parameter-Initial Position Accuracy: Verify Estimatedor Surveyed-Current Position:latlonheightRECORD inmsec and cm alsoconvert to degmin sec-Current Position: satellites trackedEstimated:(>4) satellites tracked,(>4) satellites visibleSurveyed:(>1) satellite tracked,(>4) satellites visibleVerify parameteras appropriate:-GPS Receiver Status:Current Dilution ofPrecision (PDOP or HDOP): (<30)Verify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 0; Status: Good; Valid: Yes Verify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-8LFR Receiver OperationTable A-5: LFR Receiver OperationOK Parameter Specification Comments-Station call letters M X Y Zassignment. as specified in sitedocumentation-SN ratio is > 8 dB-LFR Task State: 1frlocked to station xxxxVerify parameter-Current reference source:Number: 1; Status: Good; Valid: YesVerify parameterComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-9LPA IM Reduction Table A-6: LPA IM ReductionParameter CommentsCARRIEROK LPA#4:1 & 2:13-Sector 2:16-Sector Dual BP3-Sector Dual BP6-SectorSpecification-1A C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-1B C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-1C C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-1D C1 C1 C1 C1 No Alarms-2A C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-2B C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-2C C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-2D C2 C2 C2 No Alarms-3A C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-3B C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-3C C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-3D C3 C1 C1 No Alarms-4A C4 C2 No Alarms-4B C4 C2 No Alarms-4C C4 C2 No Alarms-4D C4 C2 No AlarmsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-10TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 3-Sector Configurations 1-Carrier2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels4-Carrier Non-adjacent ChannelsTable A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-5, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB (+4 dB)prior to calibrationBBX-11, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 1BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-11Table A-7: TX BLO Calibration (3-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier and 4-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 2BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-4, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-5, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 3BBX-6, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-11, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 4BBX-12, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________2-Carrier Adjacent ChannelTable A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-12Table A-8: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 2-Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),38 dB (minimum) prior to calibrationBBX-8, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-9, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 1BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-8, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-carrier 2BBX-9, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________3-Carrier Adjacent Channels4-Carrier Adjacent ChannelsTable A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 1 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB beforecalibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-13Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-Calibratecarrier 2 TX Bay Level Offset =37 dB beforecalibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-Calibratecarrier 3 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB beforecalibrationBBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-3, ANT-4 = dB-Calibratecarrier 4 TX Bay Level Offset = 37 dB beforecalibrationBBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 10 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 1BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 20 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-carrier 2BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-14Table A-9: TX Bay Level Offset Calibration (3-Sector: 3 or 4-Carrier Adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 30 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-carrier 3BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-CalibrationAuditcarrier 40 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionpost calibrationBBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-carrier 4BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-15TX Bay Level Offset / Power Output Verification for 6-Sector Configurations 1-Carrier2-Carrier Non-adjacent ChannelsTable A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)OK Parameter Specification Comments-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),BBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-carrier 1 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibrate TX Bay Level Offset = 42 dB (typical),BBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-carrier 2 38 dB (minimum) prior to calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-3, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB. . . continued on next pageA
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-16Table A-10: TX BLO Calibration (6-Sector: 1-Carrier, 2-Carrier Non-adjacent Channels)OK CommentsSpecificationParameter-BBX-1, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-2, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX-3, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-Auditcarrier 1 post calibration BBX-4, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-5, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-6, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB-BBX-7, ANT-1 = dBBBX-r, ANT-1 = dB-BBX-8, ANT-2 = dBBBX-r, ANT-2 = dB-Calibration 0 dB (+0.5 dB) for gain set resolutionBBX-9, ANT-3 = dBBBX-r, ANT-3 = dB-Auditcarrier 2 post calibration BBX-10, ANT-4 = dBBBX-r, ANT-4 = dB-BBX-11, ANT-5 = dBBBX-r, ANT-5 = dB-BBX-12, ANT-6 = dBBBX-r, ANT-6 = dB Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-17TX Antenna VSWRTable A-11: TX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR - Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________RX Antenna VSWRTable A-12: RX Antenna VSWROK Parameter Specification Data-VSWR - Antenna 1 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 2 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 3 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 4 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 5 < (1.5 : 1)-VSWR -Antenna 6 < (1.5 : 1)Comments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-18Alarm VerificationTable A-13: CDI Alarm Input VerificationOK Parameter Specification Data-Verify CDI alarm inputoperation per Table 3-1. BTS Relay #XX -Contact AlarmSets/ClearsComments:_________________________________________________________A
Site Operation Verification68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-19C-CCP ShelfSite I/O A & BC-CCP ShelfCSM-1CSM-2HSOCCD-1CCD-2AMR-1AMR-2MPC-1MPC-2Fans 1-3 GLI3-1GLI3-2BBX-1BBX-2BBX-3BBX-4BBX-5BBX-6BBX-7BBX-8BBX-9BBX-10BBX-11BBX-12BBX-rMCC-1MCC-2MCC-3MCC-4MCC-5MCC-6MCC-7MCC-8MCC-9MCC-10CIOSWITCHPS-1PS-2PS-3A
Site Operation Verification 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYA-20LPAsLPA 1ALPA 1BLPA 1CLPA 1DLPA 2ALPA 2BLPA 2CLPA 2DLPA 3ALPA 3BLPA 3CLPA 3DLPA 4ALPA 4BLPA 4CLPA 4DA
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYB-1Appendix BATP Matrix TableB
Re-optimization 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYB-2Re-optimizationUsage & BackgroundPeriodic maintenance of a site may also mandate re-optimization ofspecific portions of the site. An outline of some basic guidelines isincluded in the following tables.NOTE Re-optimization steps listed for any assembly detailed in thetables below must be performed anytime an RF cable associatedwith it is replaced.Detailed Optimization/ATP Test MatrixTable B-1 outlines in more detail the tests that would need to beperformed if one of the BTS components were to fail and be replaced. Itis also assumes that all modules are placed OOS-ROM via the LMFuntil full redundancy of all applicable modules is implemented.The following guidelines should also be noted when using this table.NOTE Not every procedure required to bring the site back in service isindicated in Table B-1. It is meant to be used as a guidelineONLY. The table assumes that the user is familiar enough withthe BTS Optimization/ATP procedure to understand which testequipment set ups, calibrations, and BTS site preparation will berequired before performing the Table # procedures referenced.Various passive BTS components (such as the DRDCs, filter; etc.) onlyrequire a TX calibration audit to be performed in lieu of a full pathcalibration. If the TX path calibration audit fails, the entire RF pathcalibration will need to be repeated. If the RF path calibration fails,further troubleshooting is warranted.Whenever any C-CCP BACKPLANE is replaced, it is assumed thatonly power to the C-CCP shelf being replaced is turned off via thebreaker supplying that shelf.NOTE If any significant change in signal level results from anycomponent being replaced in the RX or TX signal flow paths, itwould be identified by re-running the RX and TX calibrationaudit command.When the CIO is replaced, the C-CCP shelf remains powered up. TheBBX boards may need to be removed, then re-installed into theiroriginal slots, and re-downloaded (code and BLO data). RX and TXcalibration audits should then be performed.B
Re-optimization68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYB-3Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTbl#DescriptionDRDC or TRDCRX CablesTX CablesMPC / EMPC CIO SCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)BBX2/BBX-1XMCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1XCSM/GPS LFRHSO/HSOX50-pair Punchblock w/RGPSRGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGDCCD CardGLI3ETIB or Associated CablesLPAC CableLPA or LPA Trunking ModuleLPA Bandpass Filter or CombinerSwithch CardRFDS cablesRFDSTable 3-20/Table 3-21/ Download Code/Data SDDD S STable 3-23 Enable CSMs S S S S 9Table 3-26 GPS &HSO Initialization /Verification S S D D S S S 9Table 3-27 LFR Initialization /Verification S S STable 3-41 TX Path Calibration 4 4 1 1 4 * 3 3 4 7Table 3-42 Download Offsets to BBX 4 1 4*Table 3-43 TX Path Audit 4 4 1 1 4 * 3 4 7Table 3-52 RFDS Path Calibration andOffset Data Download 6 5 4 5116* 3 4 6 6Table 4-1 Spectral Purity TX Mask 4 1 4 * * * *Table 4-1 Waveform Quality (rho) 4 * 1 4 * * * 1 * *Table 4-1 Pilot Time Offset 4 * 1 4 * * * * *Table 4-1 Code Domain Power /Noise Floor 4 14888 8* **Table 4-1 FER Test 5 5 5 2 2 5 8 8 8 8 * 7Table 3-54/Table 3-63 Alarm Tests S. . . continued on next pageB
Re-optimization 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYB-4Table B-1: SC 4812ET BTS Optimization and ATP Test MatrixDocTbl#RFDSRFDS cablesSwithch CardLPA Bandpass Filter or CombinerLPA or LPA Trunking ModuleLPAC CableETIB or Associated CablesGLI3CCD CardRGD/20-pair Punchblock w/RGD50-pair Punchblock w/RGPSHSO/HSOXLFRCSM/GPS MCC24E/MCC8E/MCC-1XBBX2/BBX-1XSCCP Shelf Assembly (Backplane)CIO MPC / EMPC TX CablesRX CablesDRDC or TRDCDescriptionOPTIMIZATION AND TEST LEGEND:D Required* Perform if determined necessary for addtional fault isolation, repair assurance, or required for sitecertification.** Replace power supply modules one at a time so that power to the C-CCP shelf is not interrupted. If powerto the shelf is lost, all cards in the shelf must be downloaded again.1. Perform on all carrier and sector TX paths to the C-CCP cage.2. Perform on all carrier and sector RX paths to the C-CCP cage.3. Perform on all primary and redundant TX paths of the affected carrier.4. Perform on the affected carrier and sector TX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier and sector TX paths)5. Perform on the affected carrier and sector RX path(s) (BBXR replacement affects all carrier RX paths)6. Perform on all RF paths of the affected carrier and sector (RFDS replacement affects all carriers)7. Perform with redundant BBX for at least one sector on one carrier.8. Verify performance by performing on one sector of one carrier only.9 Perform only if RGD/RGPS, LFR antenna, or HSO or LFR expansion was installed10 Verify performance by performing testing on one sector of each carrier. B
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYC-1Appendix CBBX GainC
BBX Gain Set Point 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYC-2BBX Gain Set PointUsage & BackgroundTable C-1 outlines the relationship between the total of all code domainchannel element gain settings (digital root sum of the squares) and theBBX Gain Set Point between 33.0 dBm and 44.0 dBm. The resultantRF output (as measured at the top of the BTS in dBm) is shown in thetable. The table assumes that the BBX Bay Level Offset (BLO) valueshave been calculated.As an illustration, consider a BBX keyed up to produce a CDMA carrierwith only the Pilot channel (no MCCs forward link enabled). Pilot gainis set to 262. In this case, the BBX Gain Set Point is shown to correlateexactly to the actual RF output anywhere in the 33 to 44 dBm outputrange. (This is the level used to calibrate the BTS).Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33541 - - - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3533 - - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2525 - - - - - - - 43 42 41 40 39517 - - - - - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9509 - - - - - - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8501 - - - - - - - 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6493 - - - - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5485 - - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4477 - - - - - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2469 - - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1461 - - - - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9453 - - - - - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8445 - - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6437 - - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4429 - - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3421 - - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1413 - - - - - 43 42 41 40 39 38 37405 - - - - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8397 - - - - 43.6 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6389 - - - - 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 . . . continued on next pageC
BBX Gain Set Point68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYC-3Table C-1: BBX Gain Set Point vs. Actual BTS Output (in dBm)dBm'Gainb333435363738394041424344381 - - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3374 - - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1366 - - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9358 - - - - 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7350 - - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5342 - - - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3334 - - - 43.1 42.1 41.1 40.1 39.1 38.1 37.1 36.1 35.1326 - - - 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9318 - - - 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7310 - - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5302 - - 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2294 - - 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34286 - - 42.8 41.8 40.8 39.8 38.8 37.8 36.8 35.8 34.8 33.8278 - 43.5 42.5 41.5 40.5 39.5 38.5 37.5 36.5 35.5 34.5 33.5270 - 43.3 42.3 41.3 40.3 39.3 38.3 37.3 36.3 35.3 34.3 33.3262 - 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33254 - 42.7 41.7 40.7 39.7 38.7 37.7 36.7 35.7 34.7 33.7 32.7246 43.4 42.4 41.4 40.4 39.4 38.4 37.4 36.4 35.4 34.4 33.4 32.4238 43.2 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2230 42.9 41.9 40.9 39.9 38.9 37.9 36.9 35.9 34.9 33.9 32.9 31.9222 42.6 41.6 40.6 39.6 38.6 37.6 36.6 35.6 34.6 33.6 32.6 31.6214 42.2 41.2 40.2 39.2 38.2 37.2 36.2 35.2 34.2 33.2 32.2 31.2C
BBX Gain Set Point 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYC-4NotesC
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYD-1Appendix DCDMA Operating FrequencyProgrammingD
Channel Frequencies 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYD-2Channel FrequenciesIntroductionProgramming of each of the BTS BBX synthesizers is performed by theBTS GLIs via the CHI bus. This programming data determines thetransmit and receive transceiver operating frequencies (channels) foreach BBX2.1900 MHz PCS ChannelsFigure D-1 shows the valid channels for the North American PCS1900 MHz frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system).Figure D-1: North America PCS Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation)2751175CHANNEL1863.759251851.25251871.25425675 1883.751896.251908.751943.751931.251951.251963.751976.251988.75ADBEFCFW00463D
Channel Frequencies68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYD-3Calculating 1900 MHz Center FrequenciesTable D-1 shows selected 1900 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:STX = 1930 + 0.05 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 1930 + 0.05*262 = 1943.10 MHzSRX = TX - 80Example: Channel 262RX = 1943.10 - 50 = 1863.10 MHzActual frequencies used depend on customer CDMA system frequencyplan.Each CDMA channel requires a 1.77 MHz frequency segment. Theactual CDMA carrier is 1.23 MHz wide, with a 0.27 MHz guard band onboth sides of the carrier.Minimum frequency separation required between any CDMA carrier andthe nearest NAMPS/AMPS carrier is 900 kHz (center-to-center).Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency25 0019 1931.25 1851.2550 0032 1932.50 1852.5075 004B 1933.75 1853.75100 0064 1935.00 1855.00125 007D 1936.25 1856.25150 0096 1937.50 1857.50175 00AF 1938.75 1858.75200 00C8 1940.00 1860.00225 00E1 1941.25 1861.25250 00FA 1942.50 1862.50275 0113 1943.75 1863.75300 012C 1945.00 1865.00325 0145 1946.25 1866.25350 015E 1947.50 1867.50375 0177 1948.75 1868.75400 0190 1950.00 1870.00425 01A9 1951.25 1871.25450 01C2 1952.50 1872.50475 01DB 1953.75 1873.75500 01F4 1955.00 1875.00525 020D 1956.25 1876.25550 0226 1957.50 1877.50575 023F 1958.75 1878.75600 0258 1960.00 1880.00625 0271 1961.25 1881.25650 028A 1962.50 1882.50. . . continued on next pageD
Channel Frequencies 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYD-4Table D-1: 1900 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency675 02A3 1963.75 1883.75700 02BC 1965.00 1885.00725 02D5 1966.25 1886.25750 02EE 1967.50 1887.50775 0307 1968.75 1888.75800 0320 1970.00 1890.00825 0339 1971.25 1891.25850 0352 1972.50 1892.50875 036B 1973.75 1893.75900 0384 1975.00 1895.00925 039D 1976.25 1896.25950 03B6 1977.50 1897.50975 03CF 1978.75 1898.751000 03E8 1980.00 1900.001025 0401 1981.25 1901.251050 041A 1982.50 1902.501075 0433 1983.75 1903.751100 044C 1985.00 1905.001125 0465 1986.25 1906.251150 047E 1987.50 1807.501175 0497 1988.75 1908.75 800 MHz CDMA ChannelsFigure D-2 shows the valid channels for the North American cellulartelephone frequency spectrum. There are 10 CDMA wireline ornon-wireline band channels used in a CDMA system (unique percustomer operating system).Figure D-2: North American Cellular Telephone System Frequency Spectrum (CDMA Allocation).RX FREQ(MHz)991 1023 1 333 334 666 667 716 717 799 CHANNELOVERALL NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDSOVERALL WIRELINE (B) BANDS824.040825.000825.030834.990835.020844.980845.010846.480846.510848.970869.040870.000870.030879.990880.020889.980890.010891.480891.510893.970TX FREQ(MHz)1013694 689 311 356 644 739 777 CDMA NON-WIRELINE (A) BANDCDMA WIRELINE (B) BANDFW00402D
Channel Frequencies68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYD-5Calculating 800 MHz Center FrequenciesTable D-2 shows selected 800 MHz CDMA candidate operatingchannels, listed in both decimal and hexadecimal, and the correspondingtransmit, and receive frequencies. Center frequencies (in MHz) forchannels not shown in the table may be calculated as follows:SChannels 1-777TX = 870 + 0.03 * Channel#Example: Channel 262TX = 870 + 0.03*262 = 877.86 MHzSChannels 1013-1023TX = 870 + 0.03 * (Channel# - 1023)Example: Channel 1015TX = 870 +0.03 *(1015 - 1023) = 869.76 MHzSRX = TX - 45 MHzExample: Channel 262RX = 877.86 -45 = 832.86 MHzTable D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Transmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency Receive Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency1 0001 870.0300 825.030025 0019 870.7500 825.750050 0032 871.5000 826.500075 004B 872.2500 827.2500100 0064 873.0000 828.0000125 007D 873.7500 828.7500150 0096 874.5000 829.5000175 00AF 875.2500 830.2500200 00C8 876.0000 831.0000225 00E1 876.7500 831.7500250 00FA 877.5000 832.5000275 0113 878.2500 833.2500300 012C 879.0000 834.0000325 0145 879.7500 834.7500350 015E 880.5000 835.5000375 0177 881.2500 836.2500400 0190 882.0000 837.0000425 01A9 882.7500 837.7500450 01C2 883.5000 838.5000475 01DB 884.2500 839.2500500 01F4 885.0000 840.0000525 020D 885.7500 840.7500550 0226 886.5000 841.5000. . . continued on next pageD
Channel Frequencies 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYD-6Table D-2: 800 MHz TX and RX Frequency vs. ChannelChannel NumberDecimal Hex Receive Frequency (MHz)Center FrequencyTransmit Frequency (MHz)Center Frequency575 023F 887.2500 842.2500600 0258 888.0000 843.0000625 0271 888.7500 843.7500650 028A 889.5000 844.5000675 02A3 890.2500 845.2500700 02BC 891.0000 846.0000725 02D5 891.7500 846.7500750 02EE 892.5000 847.5000775 0307 893.2500 848.2500NOTEChannel numbers 778 through 1012 are not used.1013 03F5 869.7000 824.70001023 03FF 870.0000 825.0000 D
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-1Appendix EPN Offset E
PN Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-2PN OffsetBackgroundAll channel elements transmitted from a BTS in a particular 1.25 MHzCDMA channel are orthonogonally spread by 1 of 64 possible Walshcode functions; additionally, they are also spread by a quadrature pair ofPN sequences unique to each sector.Overall, the mobile uses this to differentiate multiple signals transmittedfrom the same BTS (and surrounding BTS) sectors, and to synchronizeto the next strongest sector.The PN offset per sector is stored on the BBXs, where thecorresponding I & Q registers reside.The PN offset values are determined on a per BTS/per sector(antenna)basis as determined by the appropriate cdf file content. A breakdown ofthis information is found in Table E-1.Usage There are three basic RF chip delays currently in use. It is important todetermine what RF chip delay is valid to be able to test the BTSfunctionality. This can be done by ascertaining if the CDF file FineTxAdj value was set to “on” when the MCC was downloaded with“image data”. The FineTxAdj value is used to compensate for theprocessing delay (approximately 20 mS) in the BTS using any type ofmobile meeting IS-97 specifications.Observe the following guidelines:SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 101 (65 HEX), theFineTxAdj has not been set. The I and Q values from the 0 tableMUST be used.If the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 213 (D5 HEX), FineTxAdj hasbeen set for the 14 chip table.SIf the FineTxAdj value in the cdf file is 197 (C5 HEX), FineTxAdjhas been set for the 13 chip table.NOTE CDF file I and Q values can be represented in DECIMAL orHEX. If using HEX, add 0x before the HEX value. If necessary,convert HEX values in Table E-1 to decimal before comparingthem to cdf file I & Q value assignments.- If you are using a Qualcomm mobile, use the I and Q values fromthe 13 chip delay table.- If you are using a mobile that does not have the 1 chip offsetproblem, (any mobile meeting the IS-97 specification), use the 14chip delay table.NOTE If the wrong I and Q values are used with the wrongFineTxAdj parameter, system timing problems will occur. Thiswill cause the energy transmitted to be “smeared” over severalWalsh codes (instead of the single Walsh code that it wasassigned to), causing erratic operation. Evidence of smearing isusually identified by Walsh channels not at correct levels orpresent when not selected in the Code Domain Power Test.E
PN Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-3Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)0 17523 23459 4473 5BA3 29673 25581 73E9 63ED 4096 4096 1000 10001 32292 32589 7E24 7F4D 16146 29082 3F12 719A 9167 1571 23CF 06232 4700 17398 125C 43F6 2350 8699 092E 21FB 22417 7484 5791 1D3C3 14406 26333 3846 66DD 7203 32082 1C23 7D52 966 6319 03C6 18AF4 14899 4011 3A33 0FAB 19657 18921 4CC9 49E9 14189 2447 376D 098F5 17025 2256 4281 08D0 28816 1128 7090 0468 29150 24441 71DE 5F796 14745 18651 3999 48DB 19740 27217 4D1C 6A51 18245 27351 4745 6AD77 2783 1094 0ADF 0446 21695 547 54BF 0223 1716 23613 06B4 5C3D8 5832 21202 16C8 52D2 2916 10601 0B64 2969 11915 29008 2E8B 71509 12407 13841 3077 3611 18923 21812 49EB 5534 20981 5643 51F5 160B10 31295 31767 7A3F 7C17 27855 28727 6CCF 7037 24694 28085 6076 6DB511 7581 18890 1D9D 49CA 24350 9445 5F1E 24E5 11865 18200 2E59 471812 18523 30999 485B 7917 30205 29367 75FD 72B7 6385 21138 18F1 529213 29920 22420 74E0 5794 14960 11210 3A70 2BCA 27896 21937 6CF8 55B114 25184 20168 6260 4EC8 12592 10084 3130 2764 25240 25222 6298 628615 26282 12354 66AA 3042 13141 6177 3355 1821 30877 109 789D 006D16 30623 11187 779F 2BB3 27167 23525 6A1F 5BE5 30618 6028 779A 178C17 15540 11834 3CB4 2E3A 7770 5917 1E5A 171D 26373 22034 6705 561218 23026 10395 59F2 289B 11513 23153 2CF9 5A71 314 15069 013A 3ADD19 20019 28035 4E33 6D83 30409 30973 76C9 78FD 17518 4671 446E 123F20 4050 27399 0FD2 6B07 2025 31679 07E9 7BBF 21927 30434 55A7 76E221 1557 22087 0615 5647 21210 25887 52DA 651F 2245 11615 08C5 2D5F22 30262 2077 7636 081D 15131 18994 3B1B 4A32 18105 19838 46B9 4D7E23 18000 13758 4650 35BE 9000 6879 2328 1ADF 8792 14713 2258 397924 20056 11778 4E58 2E02 10028 5889 272C 1701 21440 241 53C0 00F125 12143 3543 2F6F 0DD7 18023 18647 4667 48D7 15493 24083 3C85 5E1326 17437 7184 441D 1C10 29662 3592 73DE 0E08 26677 7621 6835 1DC527 17438 2362 441E 093A 8719 1181 220F 049D 11299 19144 2C23 4AC828 5102 25840 13EE 64F0 2551 12920 09F7 3278 12081 1047 2F31 041729 9302 12177 2456 2F91 4651 23028 122B 59F4 23833 26152 5D19 662830 17154 10402 4302 28A2 8577 5201 2181 1451 20281 22402 4F39 578231 5198 1917 144E 077D 2599 19842 0A27 4D82 10676 21255 29B4 530732 4606 17708 11FE 452C 2303 8854 08FF 2296 16981 30179 4255 75E333 24804 10630 60E4 2986 12402 5315 3072 14C3 31964 7408 7CDC 1CF034 17180 6812 431C 1A9C 8590 3406 218E 0D4E 26913 115 6921 007335 10507 14350 290B 380E 17749 7175 4555 1C07 14080 1591 3700 063736 10157 10999 27AD 2AF7 16902 23367 4206 5B47 23842 1006 5D22 03EE37 23850 25003 5D2A 61AB 11925 32489 2E95 7EE9 27197 32263 6A3D 7E0738 31425 2652 7AC1 0A5C 27824 1326 6CB0 052E 22933 1332 5995 053439 4075 19898 0FEB 4DBA 22053 9949 5625 26DD 30220 12636 760C 315C40 10030 2010 272E 07DA 5015 1005 1397 03ED 12443 4099 309B 100341 16984 25936 4258 6550 8492 12968 212C 32A8 19854 386 4D8E 018242 14225 28531 3791 6F73 18968 31109 4A18 7985 14842 29231 39FA 722F43 26519 11952 6797 2EB0 25115 5976 621B 1758 15006 25711 3A9E 646F44 27775 31947 6C7F 7CCB 26607 28761 67EF 7059 702 10913 02BE 2AA145 30100 25589 7594 63F5 15050 32710 3ACA 7FC6 21373 8132 537D 1FC446 7922 11345 1EF2 2C51 3961 22548 0F79 5814 23874 20844 5D42 516C47 14199 28198 3777 6E26 19051 14099 4A6B 3713 3468 13150 0D8C 335E48 17637 13947 44E5 367B 29602 21761 73A2 5501 31323 18184 7A5B 470849 23081 8462 5A29 210E 31940 4231 7CC4 1087 29266 19066 7252 4A7A50 5099 9595 13EB 257B 22565 23681 5825 5C81 16554 29963 40AA 750B. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-4Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)51 32743 4670 7FE7 123E 28195 2335 6E23 091F 22575 6605 582F 19CD52 7114 14672 1BCA 3950 3557 7336 0DE5 1CA8 31456 29417 7AE0 72E953 7699 29415 1E13 72E7 24281 30543 5ED9 774F 8148 22993 1FD4 59D154 19339 20610 4B8B 5082 29717 10305 7415 2841 19043 27657 4A63 6C0955 28212 6479 6E34 194F 14106 17051 371A 429B 25438 5468 635E 155C56 29587 10957 7393 2ACD 26649 23386 6819 5B5A 10938 8821 2ABA 227557 19715 18426 4D03 47FA 30545 9213 7751 23FD 2311 20773 0907 512558 14901 22726 3A35 58C6 19658 11363 4CCA 2C63 7392 4920 1CE0 133859 20160 5247 4EC0 147F 10080 17411 2760 4403 30714 5756 77FA 167C60 22249 29953 56E9 7501 31396 29884 7AA4 74BC 180 28088 00B4 6DB861 26582 5796 67D6 16A4 13291 2898 33EB 0B52 8948 740 22F4 02E462 7153 16829 1BF1 41BD 23592 28386 5C28 6EE2 16432 23397 4030 5B6563 15127 4528 3B17 11B0 19547 2264 4C5B 08D8 9622 19492 2596 4C2464 15274 5415 3BAA 1527 7637 17583 1DD5 44AF 7524 26451 1D64 675365 23149 10294 5A6D 2836 31974 5147 7CE6 141B 1443 30666 05A3 77CA66 16340 17046 3FD4 4296 8170 8523 1FEA 214B 1810 15088 0712 3AF067 27052 7846 69AC 1EA6 13526 3923 34D6 0F53 6941 26131 1B1D 661368 13519 10762 34CF 2A0A 19383 5381 4BB7 1505 3238 15969 0CA6 3E6169 10620 13814 297C 35F6 5310 6907 14BE 1AFB 8141 24101 1FCD 5E2570 15978 16854 3E6A 41D6 7989 8427 1F35 20EB 10408 12762 28A8 31DA71 27966 795 6D3E 031B 13983 20401 369F 4FB1 18826 19997 498A 4E1D72 12479 9774 30BF 262E 18831 4887 498F 1317 22705 22971 58B1 59BB73 1536 24291 0600 5EE3 768 24909 0300 614D 3879 12560 0F27 311074 3199 3172 0C7F 0C64 22511 1586 57EF 0632 21359 31213 536F 79ED75 4549 2229 11C5 08B5 22834 19046 5932 4A66 30853 18780 7885 495C76 17888 21283 45E0 5323 8944 26541 22F0 67AD 18078 16353 469E 3FE177 13117 16905 333D 4209 18510 28472 484E 6F38 15910 12055 3E26 2F1778 7506 7062 1D52 1B96 3753 3531 0EA9 0DCB 20989 30396 51FD 76BC79 27626 7532 6BEA 1D6C 13813 3766 35F5 0EB6 28810 24388 708A 5F4480 31109 25575 7985 63E7 27922 32719 6D12 7FCF 30759 1555 7827 061381 29755 14244 743B 37A4 27597 7122 6BCD 1BD2 18899 13316 49D3 340482 26711 28053 6857 6D95 26107 30966 65FB 78F6 7739 31073 1E3B 796183 20397 30408 4FAD 76C8 30214 15204 7606 3B64 6279 6187 1887 182B84 18608 5094 48B0 13E6 9304 2547 2458 09F3 9968 21644 26F0 548C85 7391 16222 1CDF 3F5E 24511 8111 5FBF 1FAF 8571 9289 217B 244986 23168 7159 5A80 1BF7 11584 17351 2D40 43C7 4143 4624 102F 121087 23466 174 5BAA 00AE 11733 87 2DD5 0057 19637 467 4CB5 01D388 15932 25530 3E3C 63BA 7966 12765 1F1E 31DD 11867 18133 2E5B 46D589 25798 2320 64C6 0910 12899 1160 3263 0488 7374 1532 1CCE 05FC90 28134 23113 6DE6 5A49 14067 25368 36F3 6318 10423 1457 28B7 05B191 28024 23985 6D78 5DB1 14012 24804 36BC 60E4 9984 9197 2700 23ED92 6335 2604 18BF 0A2C 23951 1302 5D8F 0516 7445 13451 1D15 348B93 21508 1826 5404 0722 10754 913 2A02 0391 4133 25785 1025 64B994 26338 30853 66E2 7885 13169 29310 3371 727E 22646 4087 5876 0FF795 17186 15699 4322 3D53 8593 20629 2191 5095 15466 31190 3C6A 79D696 22462 2589 57BE 0A1D 11231 19250 2BDF 4B32 2164 8383 0874 20BF97 3908 25000 0F44 61A8 1954 12500 07A2 30D4 16380 12995 3FFC 32C398 25390 18163 632E 46F3 12695 27973 3197 6D45 15008 27438 3AA0 6B2E99 27891 12555 6CF3 310B 26537 22201 67A9 56B9 31755 9297 7C0B 2451100 9620 8670 2594 21DE 4810 4335 12CA 10EF 31636 1676 7B94 068C. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-5Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)101 6491 1290 195B 050A 23933 645 5D7D 0285 25414 12596 6346 3134102 16876 4407 41EC 1137 8438 18087 20F6 46A7 7102 19975 1BBE 4E07103 17034 1163 428A 048B 8517 19577 2145 4C79 20516 20026 5024 4E3A104 32405 12215 7E95 2FB7 28314 23015 6E9A 59E7 19495 8958 4C27 22FE105 27417 7253 6B19 1C55 25692 16406 645C 4016 17182 19143 431E 4AC7106 8382 8978 20BE 2312 4191 4489 105F 1189 11572 17142 2D34 42F6107 5624 25547 15F8 63CB 2812 32729 0AFC 7FD9 25570 19670 63E2 4CD6108 1424 3130 0590 0C3A 712 1565 02C8 061D 6322 30191 18B2 75EF109 13034 31406 32EA 7AAE 6517 15703 1975 3D57 8009 5822 1F49 16BE110 15682 6222 3D42 184E 7841 3111 1EA1 0C27 26708 22076 6854 563C111 27101 20340 69DD 4F74 25918 10170 653E 27BA 6237 606 185D 025E112 8521 25094 2149 6206 16756 12547 4174 3103 32520 9741 7F08 260D113 30232 23380 7618 5B54 15116 11690 3B0C 2DAA 31627 9116 7B8B 239C114 6429 10926 191D 2AAE 23902 5463 5D5E 1557 3532 12705 0DCC 31A1115 27116 22821 69EC 5925 13558 25262 34F6 62AE 24090 17502 5E1A 445E116 4238 31634 108E 7B92 2119 15817 0847 3DC9 20262 18952 4F26 4A08117 5128 4403 1408 1133 2564 18085 0A04 46A5 18238 15502 473E 3C8E118 14846 689 39FE 02B1 7423 20324 1CFF 4F64 2033 17819 07F1 459B119 13024 27045 32E0 69A5 6512 31470 1970 7AEE 25566 4370 63DE 1112120 10625 27557 2981 6BA5 17680 31726 4510 7BEE 25144 31955 6238 7CD3121 31724 16307 7BEC 3FB3 15862 20965 3DF6 51E5 29679 30569 73EF 7769122 13811 22338 35F3 5742 19241 11169 4B29 2BA1 5064 7350 13C8 1CB6123 24915 27550 6153 6B9E 24953 13775 6179 35CF 27623 26356 6BE7 66F4124 1213 22096 04BD 5650 21390 11048 538E 2B28 13000 32189 32C8 7DBD125 2290 23136 08F2 5A60 1145 11568 0479 2D30 31373 1601 7A8D 0641126 31551 12199 7B3F 2FA7 27727 23023 6C4F 59EF 13096 19537 3328 4C51127 12088 1213 2F38 04BD 6044 19554 179C 4C62 26395 25667 671B 6443128 7722 936 1E2A 03A8 3861 468 0F15 01D4 15487 4415 3C7F 113F129 27312 6272 6AB0 1880 13656 3136 3558 0C40 29245 2303 723D 08FF130 23130 32446 5A5A 7EBE 11565 16223 2D2D 3F5F 26729 16362 6869 3FEA131 594 13555 0252 34F3 297 21573 0129 5445 12568 28620 3118 6FCC132 25804 8789 64CC 2255 12902 24342 3266 5F16 24665 6736 6059 1A50133 31013 24821 7925 60F5 27970 32326 6D42 7E46 8923 2777 22DB 0AD9134 32585 21068 7F49 524C 28276 10534 6E74 2926 19634 24331 4CB2 5F0B135 3077 31891 0C05 7C93 22482 28789 57D2 7075 29141 9042 71D5 2352136 17231 5321 434F 14C9 28791 17496 7077 4458 73 107 0049 006B137 31554 551 7B42 0227 15777 20271 3DA1 4F2F 26482 4779 6772 12AB138 8764 12115 223C 2F53 4382 22933 111E 5995 6397 13065 18FD 3309139 15375 4902 3C0F 1326 20439 2451 4FD7 0993 29818 30421 747A 76D5140 13428 1991 3474 07C7 6714 19935 1A3A 4DDF 8153 20210 1FD9 4EF2141 17658 14404 44FA 3844 8829 7202 227D 1C22 302 5651 012E 1613142 13475 17982 34A3 463E 19329 8991 4B81 231F 28136 31017 6DE8 7929143 22095 19566 564F 4C6E 31479 9783 7AF7 2637 29125 30719 71C5 77FF144 24805 2970 60E5 0B9A 24994 1485 61A2 05CD 8625 23104 21B1 5A40145 4307 23055 10D3 5A0F 22969 25403 59B9 633B 26671 7799 682F 1E77146 23292 15158 5AFC 3B36 11646 7579 2D7E 1D9B 6424 17865 1918 45C9147 1377 29094 0561 71A6 21344 14547 5360 38D3 12893 26951 325D 6947148 28654 653 6FEE 028D 14327 20346 37F7 4F7A 18502 25073 4846 61F1149 6350 19155 18CE 4AD3 3175 27477 0C67 6B55 7765 32381 1E55 7E7D150 16770 23588 4182 5C24 8385 11794 20C1 2E12 25483 16581 638B 40C5. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-6Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)151 14726 10878 3986 2A7E 7363 5439 1CC3 153F 15408 32087 3C30 7D57152 25685 31060 6455 7954 25594 15530 63FA 3CAA 6414 97 190E 0061153 21356 30875 536C 789B 10678 29297 29B6 7271 8164 7618 1FE4 1DC2154 12149 11496 2F75 2CE8 18026 5748 466A 1674 10347 93 286B 005D155 28966 24545 7126 5FE1 14483 25036 3893 61CC 29369 16052 72B9 3EB4156 22898 9586 5972 2572 11449 4793 2CB9 12B9 10389 14300 2895 37DC157 1713 20984 06B1 51F8 21128 10492 5288 28FC 24783 11129 60CF 2B79158 30010 30389 753A 76B5 15005 30054 3A9D 7566 18400 6602 47E0 19CA159 2365 7298 093D 1C82 21838 3649 554E 0E41 22135 14460 5677 387C160 27179 18934 6A2B 49F6 25797 9467 64C5 24FB 4625 25458 1211 6372161 29740 23137 742C 5A61 14870 25356 3A16 630C 22346 15869 574A 3DFD162 5665 24597 1621 6015 23232 32310 5AC0 7E36 2545 27047 09F1 69A7163 23671 23301 5C77 5B05 32747 25534 7FEB 63BE 7786 26808 1E6A 68B8164 1680 7764 0690 1E54 840 3882 0348 0F2A 20209 7354 4EF1 1CBA165 25861 14518 6505 38B6 25426 7259 6352 1C5B 26414 27834 672E 6CBA166 25712 21634 6470 5482 12856 10817 3238 2A41 1478 11250 05C6 2BF2167 19245 11546 4B2D 2D1A 29766 5773 7446 168D 15122 552 3B12 0228168 26887 26454 6907 6756 25939 13227 6553 33AB 24603 27058 601B 69B2169 30897 15938 78B1 3E42 28040 7969 6D88 1F21 677 14808 02A5 39D8170 11496 9050 2CE8 235A 5748 4525 1674 11AD 13705 9642 3589 25AA171 1278 3103 04FE 0C1F 639 18483 027F 4833 13273 32253 33D9 7DFD172 31555 758 7B43 02F6 27761 379 6C71 017B 14879 26081 3A1F 65E1173 29171 16528 71F3 4090 26921 8264 6929 2048 6643 21184 19F3 52C0174 20472 20375 4FF8 4F97 10236 27127 27FC 69F7 23138 11748 5A62 2DE4175 5816 10208 16B8 27E0 2908 5104 0B5C 13F0 28838 32676 70A6 7FA4176 30270 17698 763E 4522 15135 8849 3B1F 2291 9045 2425 2355 0979177 22188 8405 56AC 20D5 11094 24150 2B56 5E56 10792 19455 2A28 4BFF178 6182 28634 1826 6FDA 3091 14317 0C13 37ED 25666 19889 6442 4DB1179 32333 1951 7E4D 079F 28406 19955 6EF6 4DF3 11546 18177 2D1A 4701180 14046 20344 36DE 4F78 7023 10172 1B6F 27BC 15535 2492 3CAF 09BC181 15873 26696 3E01 6848 20176 13348 4ED0 3424 16134 15086 3F06 3AEE182 19843 3355 4D83 0D1B 30481 18609 7711 48B1 8360 30632 20A8 77A8183 29367 11975 72B7 2EC7 26763 22879 688B 595F 14401 27549 3841 6B9D184 13352 31942 3428 7CC6 6676 15971 1A14 3E63 26045 6911 65BD 1AFF185 22977 9737 59C1 2609 32048 23864 7D30 5D38 24070 9937 5E06 26D1186 31691 9638 7BCB 25A6 27701 4819 6C35 12D3 30300 2467 765C 09A3187 10637 30643 298D 77B3 17686 30181 4516 75E5 13602 25831 3522 64E7188 25454 13230 636E 33AE 12727 6615 31B7 19D7 32679 32236 7FA7 7DEC189 18610 22185 48B2 56A9 9305 25960 2459 6568 16267 12987 3F8B 32BB190 6368 2055 18E0 0807 3184 19007 0C70 4A3F 9063 11714 2367 2DC2191 7887 8767 1ECF 223F 24247 24355 5EB7 5F23 19487 19283 4C1F 4B53192 7730 15852 1E32 3DEC 3865 7926 0F19 1EF6 12778 11542 31EA 2D16193 23476 16125 5BB4 3EFD 11738 20802 2DDA 5142 27309 27928 6AAD 6D18194 889 6074 0379 17BA 20588 3037 506C 0BDD 12527 26637 30EF 680D195 21141 31245 5295 7A0D 30874 29498 789A 733A 953 10035 03B9 2733196 20520 15880 5028 3E08 10260 7940 2814 1F04 15958 10748 3E56 29FC197 21669 20371 54A5 4F93 31618 27125 7B82 69F5 6068 24429 17B4 5F6D198 15967 8666 3E5F 21DA 20223 4333 4EFF 10ED 23577 29701 5C19 7405199 21639 816 5487 0330 31635 408 7B93 0198 32156 14997 7D9C 3A95200 31120 22309 7990 5725 15560 26030 3CC8 65AE 32709 32235 7FC5 7DEB. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-7Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)201 3698 29563 0E72 737B 1849 30593 0739 7781 23557 30766 5C05 782E202 16322 13078 3FC2 3316 8161 6539 1FE1 198B 17638 5985 44E6 1761203 17429 10460 4415 28DC 29658 5230 73DA 146E 3545 6823 0DD9 1AA7204 21730 17590 54E2 44B6 10865 8795 2A71 225B 9299 20973 2453 51ED205 17808 20277 4590 4F35 8904 27046 22C8 69A6 6323 10197 18B3 27D5206 30068 19988 7574 4E14 15034 9994 3ABA 270A 19590 9618 4C86 2592207 12737 6781 31C1 1A7D 18736 17154 4930 4302 7075 22705 1BA3 58B1208 28241 32501 6E51 7EF5 26360 28998 66F8 7146 14993 5234 3A91 1472209 20371 6024 4F93 1788 30233 3012 7619 0BC4 19916 12541 4DCC 30FD210 13829 20520 3605 5028 19154 10260 4AD2 2814 6532 8019 1984 1F53211 13366 31951 3436 7CCF 6683 28763 1A1B 705B 17317 22568 43A5 5828212 25732 26063 6484 65CF 12866 31963 3242 7CDB 16562 5221 40B2 1465213 19864 27203 4D98 6A43 9932 31517 26CC 7B1D 26923 25216 692B 6280214 5187 6614 1443 19D6 23537 3307 5BF1 0CEB 9155 1354 23C3 054A215 23219 10970 5AB3 2ADA 31881 5485 7C89 156D 20243 29335 4F13 7297216 28242 5511 6E52 1587 14121 17663 3729 44FF 32391 6682 7E87 1A1A217 6243 17119 1863 42DF 24033 28499 5DE1 6F53 20190 26128 4EDE 6610218 445 16064 01BD 3EC0 20750 8032 510E 1F60 27564 29390 6BAC 72CE219 21346 31614 5362 7B7E 10673 15807 29B1 3DBF 20869 8852 5185 2294220 13256 4660 33C8 1234 6628 2330 19E4 091A 9791 6110 263F 17DE221 18472 13881 4828 3639 9236 21792 2414 5520 714 11847 02CA 2E47222 25945 16819 6559 41B3 25468 28389 637C 6EE5 7498 10239 1D4A 27FF223 31051 6371 794B 18E3 28021 16973 6D75 424D 23278 6955 5AEE 1B2B224 1093 24673 0445 6061 21490 32268 53F2 7E0C 8358 10897 20A6 2A91225 5829 6055 16C5 17A7 23218 17903 5AB2 45EF 9468 14076 24FC 36FC226 31546 10009 7B3A 2719 15773 23984 3D9D 5DB0 23731 12450 5CB3 30A2227 29833 5957 7489 1745 27540 17822 6B94 459E 25133 8954 622D 22FA228 18146 11597 46E2 2D4D 9073 22682 2371 589A 2470 19709 09A6 4CFD229 24813 22155 60ED 568B 24998 25977 61A6 6579 17501 1252 445D 04E4230 47 15050 002F 3ACA 20935 7525 51C7 1D65 24671 15142 605F 3B26231 3202 16450 0C82 4042 1601 8225 0641 2021 11930 26958 2E9A 694E232 21571 27899 5443 6CFB 31729 30785 7BF1 7841 9154 8759 23C2 2237233 7469 2016 1D2D 07E0 24390 1008 5F46 03F0 7388 12696 1CDC 3198234 25297 17153 62D1 4301 24760 28604 60B8 6FBC 3440 11936 0D70 2EA0235 8175 15849 1FEF 3DE9 24103 20680 5E27 50C8 27666 25635 6C12 6423236 28519 30581 6F67 7775 26211 30086 6663 7586 22888 17231 5968 434F237 4991 3600 137F 0E10 22639 1800 586F 0708 13194 22298 338A 571A238 7907 4097 1EE3 1001 24225 17980 5EA1 463C 26710 7330 6856 1CA2239 17728 671 4540 029F 8864 20339 22A0 4F73 7266 30758 1C62 7826240 14415 20774 384F 5126 19959 10387 4DF7 2893 15175 6933 3B47 1B15241 30976 24471 7900 5F97 15488 25079 3C80 61F7 15891 2810 3E13 0AFA242 26376 27341 6708 6ACD 13188 31578 3384 7B5A 26692 8820 6844 2274243 19063 19388 4A77 4BBC 29931 9694 74EB 25DE 14757 7831 39A5 1E97244 19160 25278 4AD8 62BE 9580 12639 256C 315F 28757 19584 7055 4C80245 3800 9505 0ED8 2521 1900 23724 076C 5CAC 31342 2944 7A6E 0B80246 8307 26143 2073 661F 16873 32051 41E9 7D33 19435 19854 4BEB 4D8E247 12918 13359 3276 342F 6459 21547 193B 542B 2437 10456 0985 28D8248 19642 2154 4CBA 086A 9821 1077 265D 0435 20573 17036 505D 428C249 24873 13747 6129 35B3 24900 21733 6144 54E5 18781 2343 495D 0927250 22071 27646 5637 6BFE 31435 13823 7ACB 35FF 18948 14820 4A04 39E4. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-8Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)251 13904 1056 3650 0420 6952 528 1B28 0210 23393 1756 5B61 06DC252 27198 1413 6A3E 0585 13599 19710 351F 4CFE 5619 19068 15F3 4A7C253 3685 3311 0E65 0CEF 22242 18507 56E2 484B 17052 28716 429C 702C254 16820 4951 41B4 1357 8410 18327 20DA 4797 21292 31958 532C 7CD6255 22479 749 57CF 02ED 31287 20298 7A37 4F4A 2868 16097 0B34 3EE1256 6850 6307 1AC2 18A3 3425 17005 0D61 426D 19538 1308 4C52 051C257 15434 961 3C4A 03C1 7717 20444 1E25 4FDC 24294 3320 5EE6 0CF8258 19332 2358 4B84 0936 9666 1179 25C2 049B 22895 16682 596F 412A259 8518 28350 2146 6EBE 4259 14175 10A3 375F 27652 6388 6C04 18F4260 14698 31198 396A 79DE 7349 15599 1CB5 3CEF 29905 12828 74D1 321C261 21476 11467 53E4 2CCB 10738 22617 29F2 5859 21415 3518 53A7 0DBE262 30475 8862 770B 229E 27221 4431 6A55 114F 1210 3494 04BA 0DA6263 23984 6327 5DB0 18B7 11992 16999 2ED8 4267 22396 6458 577C 193A264 1912 7443 0778 1D13 956 16565 03BC 40B5 26552 10717 67B8 29DD265 26735 28574 686F 6F9E 26087 14287 65E7 37CF 24829 8463 60FD 210F266 15705 25093 3D59 6205 20348 32574 4F7C 7F3E 8663 27337 21D7 6AC9267 3881 6139 0F29 17FB 22084 17857 5644 45C1 991 19846 03DF 4D86268 20434 22047 4FD2 561F 10217 25907 27E9 6533 21926 9388 55A6 24AC269 16779 32545 418B 7F21 28949 29100 7115 71AC 23306 21201 5B0A 52D1270 31413 7112 7AB5 1BC8 27786 3556 6C8A 0DE4 13646 31422 354E 7ABE271 16860 28535 41DC 6F77 8430 31111 20EE 7987 148 166 0094 00A6272 8322 10378 2082 288A 4161 5189 1041 1445 24836 28622 6104 6FCE273 28530 15065 6F72 3AD9 14265 21328 37B9 5350 24202 6477 5E8A 194D274 26934 5125 6936 1405 13467 17470 349B 443E 9820 10704 265C 29D0275 18806 12528 4976 30F0 9403 6264 24BB 1878 12939 25843 328B 64F3276 20216 23215 4EF8 5AAF 10108 25451 277C 636B 2364 25406 093C 633E277 9245 20959 241D 51DF 17374 26323 43DE 66D3 14820 21523 39E4 5413278 8271 3568 204F 0DF0 16887 1784 41F7 06F8 2011 8569 07DB 2179279 18684 26453 48FC 6755 9342 32150 247E 7D96 13549 9590 34ED 2576280 8220 29421 201C 72ED 4110 30538 100E 774A 28339 22466 6EB3 57C2281 6837 24555 1AB5 5FEB 23690 25033 5C8A 61C9 25759 12455 649F 30A7282 9613 10779 258D 2A1B 17174 23345 4316 5B31 11116 27506 2B6C 6B72283 31632 25260 7B90 62AC 15816 12630 3DC8 3156 31448 21847 7AD8 5557284 27448 16084 6B38 3ED4 13724 8042 359C 1F6A 27936 28392 6D20 6EE8285 12417 26028 3081 65AC 18832 13014 4990 32D6 3578 1969 0DFA 07B1286 30901 29852 78B5 749C 28042 14926 6D8A 3A4E 12371 30715 3053 77FB287 9366 14978 2496 3A82 4683 7489 124B 1D41 12721 23674 31B1 5C7A288 12225 12182 2FC1 2F96 17968 6091 4630 17CB 10264 22629 2818 5865289 21458 25143 53D2 6237 10729 32551 29E9 7F27 25344 12857 6300 3239290 6466 15838 1942 3DDE 3233 7919 0CA1 1EEF 13246 30182 33BE 75E6291 8999 5336 2327 14D8 16451 2668 4043 0A6C 544 21880 0220 5578292 26718 21885 685E 557D 13359 25730 342F 6482 9914 6617 26BA 19D9293 3230 20561 0C9E 5051 1615 26132 064F 6614 4601 27707 11F9 6C3B294 27961 30097 6D39 7591 26444 29940 674C 74F4 16234 16249 3F6A 3F79295 28465 21877 6F31 5575 26184 25734 6648 6486 24475 24754 5F9B 60B2296 6791 23589 1A87 5C25 23699 24622 5C93 602E 26318 31609 66CE 7B79297 17338 26060 43BA 65CC 8669 13030 21DD 32E6 6224 22689 1850 58A1298 11832 9964 2E38 26EC 5916 4982 171C 1376 13381 3226 3445 0C9A299 11407 25959 2C8F 6567 18327 31887 4797 7C8F 30013 4167 753D 1047300 15553 3294 3CC1 0CDE 20400 1647 4FB0 066F 22195 25624 56B3 6418. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-9Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)301 17418 30173 440A 75DD 8709 29906 2205 74D2 30380 10924 76AC 2AAC302 14952 15515 3A68 3C9B 7476 20593 1D34 5071 15337 23096 3BE9 5A38303 52 5371 0034 14FB 26 17473 001A 4441 10716 22683 29DC 589B304 27254 10242 6A76 2802 13627 5121 353B 1401 13592 10955 3518 2ACB305 15064 28052 3AD8 6D94 7532 14026 1D6C 36CA 2412 17117 096C 42DD306 10942 14714 2ABE 397A 5471 7357 155F 1CBD 15453 15837 3C5D 3DDD307 377 19550 0179 4C5E 20844 9775 516C 262F 13810 22647 35F2 5877308 14303 8866 37DF 22A2 19007 4433 4A3F 1151 12956 10700 329C 29CC309 24427 15297 5F6B 3BC1 32357 21468 7E65 53DC 30538 30293 774A 7655310 26629 10898 6805 2A92 26066 5449 65D2 1549 10814 5579 2A3E 15CB311 20011 31315 4E2B 7A53 30405 29461 76C5 7315 18939 11057 49FB 2B31312 16086 19475 3ED6 4C13 8043 26677 1F6B 6835 19767 30238 4D37 761E313 24374 1278 5F36 04FE 12187 639 2F9B 027F 20547 14000 5043 36B0314 9969 11431 26F1 2CA7 17064 22639 42A8 586F 29720 22860 7418 594C315 29364 31392 72B4 7AA0 14682 15696 395A 3D50 31831 27172 7C57 6A24316 25560 4381 63D8 111D 12780 18098 31EC 46B2 26287 307 66AF 0133317 28281 14898 6E79 3A32 26348 7449 66EC 1D19 11310 20380 2C2E 4F9C318 7327 23959 1C9F 5D97 24479 24823 5F9F 60F7 25724 26427 647C 673B319 32449 16091 7EC1 3EDB 28336 20817 6EB0 5151 21423 10702 53AF 29CE320 26334 9037 66DE 234D 13167 24474 336F 5F9A 5190 30024 1446 7548321 14760 24162 39A8 5E62 7380 12081 1CD4 2F31 258 14018 0102 36C2322 15128 6383 3B18 18EF 7564 16971 1D8C 424B 13978 4297 369A 10C9323 29912 27183 74D8 6A2F 14956 31531 3A6C 7B2B 4670 13938 123E 3672324 4244 16872 1094 41E8 2122 8436 084A 20F4 23496 25288 5BC8 62C8325 8499 9072 2133 2370 16713 4536 4149 11B8 23986 27294 5DB2 6A9E326 9362 12966 2492 32A6 4681 6483 1249 1953 839 31835 0347 7C5B327 10175 28886 27BF 70D6 16911 14443 420F 386B 11296 8228 2C20 2024328 30957 25118 78ED 621E 28070 12559 6DA6 310F 30913 12745 78C1 31C9329 12755 20424 31D3 4FC8 18745 10212 4939 27E4 27297 6746 6AA1 1A5A330 19350 6729 4B96 1A49 9675 17176 25CB 4318 10349 1456 286D 05B0331 1153 20983 0481 51F7 21392 26311 5390 66C7 32504 27743 7EF8 6C5F332 29304 12372 7278 3054 14652 6186 393C 182A 18405 27443 47E5 6B33333 6041 13948 1799 367C 23068 6974 5A1C 1B3E 3526 31045 0DC6 7945334 21668 27547 54A4 6B9B 10834 31729 2A52 7BF1 19161 12225 4AD9 2FC1335 28048 8152 6D90 1FD8 14024 4076 36C8 0FEC 23831 21482 5D17 53EA336 10096 17354 2770 43CA 5048 8677 13B8 21E5 21380 14678 5384 3956337 23388 17835 5B5C 45AB 11694 27881 2DAE 6CE9 4282 30656 10BA 77C0338 15542 14378 3CB6 382A 7771 7189 1E5B 1C15 32382 13721 7E7E 3599339 24013 7453 5DCD 1D1D 32566 16562 7F36 40B2 806 21831 0326 5547340 2684 26317 0A7C 66CD 1342 32090 053E 7D5A 6238 30208 185E 7600341 19018 5955 4A4A 1743 9509 17821 2525 459D 10488 9995 28F8 270B342 25501 10346 639D 286A 24606 5173 601E 1435 19507 3248 4C33 0CB0343 4489 13200 1189 3390 22804 6600 5914 19C8 27288 12030 6A98 2EFE344 31011 30402 7923 76C2 27969 15201 6D41 3B61 2390 5688 0956 1638345 29448 7311 7308 1C8F 14724 16507 3984 407B 19094 2082 4A96 0822346 25461 3082 6375 0C0A 24682 1541 606A 0605 13860 23143 3624 5A67347 11846 21398 2E46 5396 5923 10699 1723 29CB 9225 25906 2409 6532348 30331 31104 767B 7980 27373 15552 6AED 3CC0 2505 15902 09C9 3E1E349 10588 24272 295C 5ED0 5294 12136 14AE 2F68 27806 21084 6C9E 525C350 32154 27123 7D9A 69F3 16077 31429 3ECD 7AC5 2408 25723 0968 647B. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-10Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)351 29572 5578 7384 15CA 14786 2789 39C2 0AE5 13347 13427 3423 3473352 13173 25731 3375 6483 18538 31869 486A 7C7D 7885 31084 1ECD 796C353 10735 10662 29EF 29A6 17703 5331 4527 14D3 6669 24023 1A0D 5DD7354 224 11084 00E0 2B4C 112 5542 0070 15A6 8187 23931 1FFB 5D7B355 12083 31098 2F33 797A 17993 15549 4649 3CBD 18145 15836 46E1 3DDC356 22822 16408 5926 4018 11411 8204 2C93 200C 14109 6085 371D 17C5357 2934 6362 0B76 18DA 1467 3181 05BB 0C6D 14231 30324 3797 7674358 27692 2719 6C2C 0A9F 13846 19315 3616 4B73 27606 27561 6BD6 6BA9359 10205 14732 27DD 398C 16958 7366 423E 1CC6 783 13821 030F 35FD360 7011 22744 1B63 58D8 23649 11372 5C61 2C6C 6301 269 189D 010D361 22098 1476 5652 05C4 11049 738 2B29 02E2 5067 28663 13CB 6FF7362 2640 8445 0A50 20FD 1320 24130 0528 5E42 15383 29619 3C17 73B3363 4408 21118 1138 527E 2204 10559 089C 293F 1392 2043 0570 07FB364 102 22198 0066 56B6 51 11099 0033 2B5B 7641 6962 1DD9 1B32365 27632 22030 6BF0 560E 13816 11015 35F8 2B07 25700 29119 6464 71BF366 19646 10363 4CBE 287B 9823 23041 265F 5A01 25259 22947 62AB 59A3367 26967 25802 6957 64CA 25979 12901 657B 3265 19813 9612 4D65 258C368 32008 2496 7D08 09C0 16004 1248 3E84 04E0 20933 18698 51C5 490A369 7873 31288 1EC1 7A38 24240 15644 5EB0 3D1C 638 16782 027E 418E370 655 24248 028F 5EB8 20631 12124 5097 2F5C 16318 29735 3FBE 7427371 25274 14327 62BA 37F7 12637 21959 315D 55C7 6878 2136 1ADE 0858372 16210 23154 3F52 5A72 8105 11577 1FA9 2D39 1328 8086 0530 1F96373 11631 13394 2D6F 3452 18279 6697 4767 1A29 14744 10553 3998 2939374 8535 1806 2157 070E 16763 903 417B 0387 22800 11900 5910 2E7C375 19293 17179 4B5D 431B 29822 28593 747E 6FB1 25919 19996 653F 4E1C376 12110 10856 2F4E 2A68 6055 5428 17A7 1534 4795 5641 12BB 1609377 21538 25755 5422 649B 10769 31857 2A11 7C71 18683 28328 48FB 6EA8378 10579 15674 2953 3D3A 17785 7837 4579 1E9D 32658 25617 7F92 6411379 13032 7083 32E8 1BAB 6516 17385 1974 43E9 1586 26986 0632 696A380 14717 29096 397D 71A8 19822 14548 4D6E 38D4 27208 5597 6A48 15DD381 11666 3038 2D92 0BDE 5833 1519 16C9 05EF 17517 14078 446D 36FE382 25809 16277 64D1 3F95 25528 20982 63B8 51F6 599 13247 0257 33BF383 5008 25525 1390 63B5 2504 32742 09C8 7FE6 16253 499 3F7D 01F3384 32418 20465 7EA2 4FF1 16209 27076 3F51 69C4 8685 30469 21ED 7705385 22175 28855 569F 70B7 31391 30311 7A9F 7667 29972 17544 7514 4488386 11742 32732 2DDE 7FDC 5871 16366 16EF 3FEE 22128 28510 5670 6F5E387 22546 20373 5812 4F95 11273 27126 2C09 69F6 19871 23196 4D9F 5A9C388 21413 9469 53A5 24FD 30722 23618 7802 5C42 19405 13384 4BCD 3448389 133 26155 0085 662B 20882 32041 5192 7D29 17972 4239 4634 108F390 4915 6957 1333 1B2D 22601 17322 5849 43AA 8599 20725 2197 50F5391 8736 12214 2220 2FB6 4368 6107 1110 17DB 10142 6466 279E 1942392 1397 21479 0575 53E7 21354 26575 536A 67CF 26834 28465 68D2 6F31393 18024 31914 4668 7CAA 9012 15957 2334 3E55 23710 19981 5C9E 4E0D394 15532 32311 3CAC 7E37 7766 28967 1E56 7127 27280 16723 6A90 4153395 26870 11276 68F6 2C0C 13435 5638 347B 1606 6570 4522 19AA 11AA396 5904 20626 1710 5092 2952 10313 0B88 2849 7400 678 1CE8 02A6397 24341 423 5F15 01A7 32346 20207 7E5A 4EEF 26374 15320 6706 3BD8398 13041 2679 32F1 0A77 18600 19207 48A8 4B07 22218 29116 56CA 71BC399 23478 15537 5BB6 3CB1 11739 20580 2DDB 5064 29654 5388 73D6 150C400 1862 10818 0746 2A42 931 5409 03A3 1521 13043 22845 32F3 593D. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-11Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)401 5850 23074 16DA 5A22 2925 11537 0B6D 2D11 24457 28430 5F89 6F0E402 5552 20250 15B0 4F1A 2776 10125 0AD8 278D 17161 8660 4309 21D4403 12589 14629 312D 3925 18758 21166 4946 52AE 21314 2659 5342 0A63404 23008 29175 59E0 71F7 11504 30407 2CF0 76C7 28728 8803 7038 2263405 27636 13943 6BF4 3677 13818 21767 35FA 5507 22162 19690 5692 4CEA406 17600 11072 44C0 2B40 8800 5536 2260 15A0 26259 22169 6693 5699407 17000 29492 4268 7334 8500 14746 2134 399A 22180 8511 56A4 213F408 21913 5719 5599 1657 31516 17687 7B1C 4517 2266 17393 08DA 43F1409 30320 7347 7670 1CB3 15160 16485 3B38 4065 10291 11336 2833 2C48410 28240 12156 6E50 2F7C 14120 6078 3728 17BE 26620 13576 67FC 3508411 7260 25623 1C5C 6417 3630 31799 0E2E 7C37 19650 22820 4CC2 5924412 17906 27725 45F2 6C4D 8953 30746 22F9 781A 14236 13344 379C 3420413 5882 28870 16FA 70C6 2941 14435 0B7D 3863 11482 20107 2CDA 4E8B414 22080 31478 5640 7AF6 11040 15739 2B20 3D7B 25289 8013 62C9 1F4D415 12183 28530 2F97 6F72 17947 14265 461B 37B9 12011 18835 2EEB 4993416 23082 24834 5A2A 6102 11541 12417 2D15 3081 13892 16793 3644 4199417 17435 9075 441B 2373 29661 24453 73DD 5F85 17336 9818 43B8 265A418 18527 32265 485F 7E09 30207 28984 75FF 7138 10759 4673 2A07 1241419 31902 3175 7C9E 0C67 15951 18447 3E4F 480F 26816 13609 68C0 3529420 18783 17434 495F 441A 30079 8717 757F 220D 31065 10054 7959 2746421 20027 12178 4E3B 2F92 30413 6089 76CD 17C9 8578 10988 2182 2AEC422 7982 25613 1F2E 640D 3991 31802 0F97 7C3A 24023 14744 5DD7 3998423 20587 31692 506B 7BCC 31205 15846 79E5 3DE6 16199 17930 3F47 460A424 10004 25384 2714 6328 5002 12692 138A 3194 22310 25452 5726 636C425 13459 18908 3493 49DC 19353 9454 4B99 24EE 30402 11334 76C2 2C46426 13383 25816 3447 64D8 19443 12908 4BF3 326C 16613 15451 40E5 3C5B427 28930 4661 7102 1235 14465 18214 3881 4726 13084 11362 331C 2C62428 4860 31115 12FC 798B 2430 29433 097E 72F9 3437 2993 0D6D 0BB1429 13108 7691 3334 1E0B 6554 16697 199A 4139 1703 11012 06A7 2B04430 24161 1311 5E61 051F 32480 19635 7EE0 4CB3 22659 5806 5883 16AE431 20067 16471 4E63 4057 30433 28183 76E1 6E17 26896 20180 6910 4ED4432 2667 15771 0A6B 3D9B 21733 20721 54E5 50F1 1735 8932 06C7 22E4433 13372 16112 343C 3EF0 6686 8056 1A1E 1F78 16178 23878 3F32 5D46434 28743 21062 7047 5246 27123 10531 69F3 2923 19166 20760 4ADE 5118435 24489 29690 5FA9 73FA 32260 14845 7E04 39FD 665 32764 0299 7FFC436 249 10141 00F9 279D 20908 24050 51AC 5DF2 20227 32325 4F03 7E45437 19960 19014 4DF8 4A46 9980 9507 26FC 2523 24447 25993 5F7F 6589438 29682 22141 73F2 567D 14841 25858 39F9 6502 16771 3268 4183 0CC4439 31101 11852 797D 2E4C 28014 5926 6D6E 1726 27209 25180 6A49 625C440 27148 26404 6A0C 6724 13574 13202 3506 3392 6050 12149 17A2 2F75441 26706 30663 6852 77C7 13353 30175 3429 75DF 29088 10193 71A0 27D1442 5148 32524 141C 7F0C 2574 16262 0A0E 3F86 7601 9128 1DB1 23A8443 4216 28644 1078 6FE4 2108 14322 083C 37F2 4905 7843 1329 1EA3444 5762 10228 1682 27F4 2881 5114 0B41 13FA 5915 25474 171B 6382445 245 23536 00F5 5BF0 20906 11768 51AA 2DF8 6169 11356 1819 2C5C446 21882 18045 557A 467D 10941 27906 2ABD 6D02 21303 11226 5337 2BDA447 3763 25441 0EB3 6361 22153 32652 5689 7F8C 28096 16268 6DC0 3F8C448 206 27066 00CE 69BA 103 13533 0067 34DD 8905 14491 22C9 389B449 28798 13740 707E 35AC 14399 6870 383F 1AD6 26997 8366 6975 20AE450 32402 13815 7E92 35F7 16201 21703 3F49 54C7 15047 26009 3AC7 6599. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-12Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)451 13463 3684 3497 0E64 19355 1842 4B9B 0732 17460 5164 4434 142C452 15417 23715 3C39 5CA3 20428 24685 4FCC 606D 17629 17126 44DD 42E6453 23101 15314 5A3D 3BD2 31950 7657 7CCE 1DE9 10461 21566 28DD 543E454 14957 32469 3A6D 7ED5 19686 29014 4CE6 7156 21618 21845 5472 5555455 23429 9816 5B85 2658 31762 4908 7C12 132C 11498 28149 2CEA 6DF5456 12990 4444 32BE 115C 6495 2222 195F 08AE 193 9400 00C1 24B8457 12421 5664 3085 1620 18834 2832 4992 0B10 16140 19459 3F0C 4C03458 28875 7358 70CB 1CBE 27061 3679 69B5 0E5F 13419 7190 346B 1C16459 4009 27264 0FA9 6A80 22020 13632 5604 3540 10864 3101 2A70 0C1D460 1872 28128 0750 6DE0 936 14064 03A8 36F0 28935 491 7107 01EB461 15203 30168 3B63 75D8 19553 15084 4C61 3AEC 18765 25497 494D 6399462 30109 29971 759D 7513 27422 29877 6B1E 74B5 27644 29807 6BFC 746F463 24001 3409 5DC1 0D51 32560 18580 7F30 4894 21564 26508 543C 678C464 4862 16910 12FE 420E 2431 8455 097F 2107 5142 4442 1416 115A465 14091 20739 370B 5103 19029 26301 4A55 66BD 1211 4871 04BB 1307466 6702 10191 1A2E 27CF 3351 24027 0D17 5DDB 1203 31141 04B3 79A5467 3067 12819 0BFB 3213 21549 22325 542D 5735 5199 9864 144F 2688468 28643 19295 6FE3 4B5F 26145 27539 6621 6B93 16945 12589 4231 312D469 21379 10072 5383 2758 30737 5036 7811 13AC 4883 5417 1313 1529470 20276 15191 4F34 3B57 10138 21399 279A 5397 25040 8549 61D0 2165471 25337 27748 62F9 6C64 24748 13874 60AC 3632 7119 14288 1BCF 37D0472 19683 720 4CE3 02D0 30625 360 77A1 0168 17826 8503 45A2 2137473 10147 29799 27A3 7467 16897 29711 4201 740F 4931 20357 1343 4F85474 16791 27640 4197 6BF8 28955 13820 711B 35FC 25705 15381 6469 3C15475 17359 263 43CF 0107 28727 20159 7037 4EBF 10726 18065 29E6 4691476 13248 24734 33C0 609E 6624 12367 19E0 304F 17363 24678 43D3 6066477 22740 16615 58D4 40E7 11370 28239 2C6A 6E4F 2746 23858 0ABA 5D32478 13095 20378 3327 4F9A 18499 10189 4843 27CD 10952 7610 2AC8 1DBA479 10345 25116 2869 621C 17892 12558 45E4 310E 19313 18097 4B71 46B1480 30342 19669 7686 4CD5 15171 26710 3B43 6856 29756 20918 743C 51B6481 27866 14656 6CDA 3940 13933 7328 366D 1CA0 14297 7238 37D9 1C46482 9559 27151 2557 6A0F 17275 31547 437B 7B3B 21290 30549 532A 7755483 8808 28728 2268 7038 4404 14364 1134 381C 1909 16320 0775 3FC0484 12744 25092 31C8 6204 6372 12546 18E4 3102 8994 20853 2322 5175485 11618 22601 2D62 5849 5809 25112 16B1 6218 13295 26736 33EF 6870486 27162 2471 6A1A 09A7 13581 19183 350D 4AEF 21590 10327 5456 2857487 17899 25309 45EB 62DD 29477 32594 7325 7F52 26468 24404 6764 5F54488 29745 15358 7431 3BFE 27592 7679 6BC8 1DFF 13636 7931 3544 1EFB489 31892 17739 7C94 454B 15946 27801 3E4A 6C99 5207 5310 1457 14BE490 23964 12643 5D9C 3163 11982 22157 2ECE 568D 29493 554 7335 022A491 23562 32730 5C0A 7FDA 11781 16365 2E05 3FED 18992 27311 4A30 6AAF492 2964 19122 0B94 4AB2 1482 9561 05CA 2559 12567 6865 3117 1AD1493 18208 16870 4720 41E6 9104 8435 2390 20F3 12075 7762 2F2B 1E52494 15028 10787 3AB4 2A23 7514 23341 1D5A 5B2D 26658 15761 6822 3D91495 21901 18400 558D 47E0 31510 9200 7B16 23F0 21077 12697 5255 3199496 24566 20295 5FF6 4F47 12283 27039 2FFB 699F 15595 24850 3CEB 6112497 18994 1937 4A32 0791 9497 19956 2519 4DF4 4921 15259 1339 3B9B498 13608 17963 3528 462B 6804 27945 1A94 6D29 14051 24243 36E3 5EB3499 27492 7438 6B64 1D0E 13746 3719 35B2 0E87 5956 30508 1744 772C500 11706 12938 2DBA 328A 5853 6469 16DD 1945 21202 13982 52D2 369E. . . continued on next pageE
PN Offset68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-13Table E-1: PnMaskI and PnMaskQ Values for PilotPn14-Chip Delay 13-Chip Delay 0-Chip Delay Pilot I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q I Q PN (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.) (Dec.) (Hex.)501 14301 19272 37DD 4B48 19006 9636 4A3E 25A4 11239 25039 2BE7 61CF502 23380 29989 5B54 7525 11690 29870 2DAA 74AE 30038 24086 7556 5E16503 11338 8526 2C4A 214E 5669 4263 1625 10A7 30222 21581 760E 544D504 2995 18139 0BB3 46DB 21513 27985 5409 6D51 13476 21346 34A4 5362505 23390 3247 5B5E 0CAF 11695 18539 2DAF 486B 2497 28187 09C1 6E1B506 14473 28919 3889 70F7 19860 30279 4D94 7647 31842 23231 7C62 5ABF507 6530 7292 1982 1C7C 3265 3646 0CC1 0E3E 24342 18743 5F16 4937508 20452 20740 4FE4 5104 10226 10370 27F2 2882 25857 11594 6501 2D4A509 12226 27994 2FC2 6D5A 6113 13997 17E1 36AD 27662 7198 6C0E 1C1E510 1058 2224 0422 08B0 529 1112 0211 0458 24594 105 6012 0069511 12026 6827 2EFA 1AAB 6013 17257 177D 4369 16790 4534 4196 11B6 E
PN Offset 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYE-14NotesE
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-1Appendix FTest PreparationF
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-2Test Equipment SetupPurposeThis appendix provides information on setting up the HP8921 with PCSinterface, the HP8935 and the Advantest R3465. The Cybertest test setdoesn’t require any setup.HP8921A Test Equipment ConnectionsTable F-1 depicts the rear panels of the HP 8921A test equipment asconfigured to perform automatic tests. All test equipment is controlledby the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expects each pieceof test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer to Table F-4).If there is a communications problem between the LMF and any pieceof test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresses have beenset correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected to the testequipment.Figure F-1 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Table F-1: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections Without RubidiumFrom Test Set: To Interface:8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS Connector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC-female - SMC-female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC-female - SMC-femaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC-female - SMC-femaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC-female - SMC-femaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45-pin custom BUS10 MHZ OUT SYNTH REF IN BNC-male - BNC-maleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC-male - BNC-maleF
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-3Figure F-1: HP8921A/600 Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB without RubidiumREAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETREF INHP83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP83236A PCSINTERFACEHP-IBTO GPIBINTERFACEBOXTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORFW00368 F
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-4Figure F-2 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Table F-2: HP8921A/600 Communications Test Set Rear Panel Connections With RubidiumFrom Test Set: To Interface:8921A 83203B CDMA 83236A PCS Connector TypeCW RF OUT CW RF IN SMC-female - SMC-female114.3 MHZ IF OUT 114.3 MHZ IF IN SMC-female - SMC-femaleIQ RF IN IQ RF OUT SMC-female - SMC-femaleDET OUT AUX DSP IN SMC-female - SMC-femaleCONTROL I/O CONTROL I/O 45-pin custom BUS10 MHZ OUT REF IN BNC-male - BNC-maleHPIB INTERFACE HPIB INTERFACE HPIB cable10 MHZ INPUT 10 MHZ OUT BNC-male - BNC-maleF
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-5Figure F-2: HP8921A Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB with RubidiumREF INREAR PANELCOMMUNICATIONS TEST SETTO POWERMETER GPIBCONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACEBOX10 MHZ WITHRUBIDIUM STANDARDHP83203B CDMACELLULAR ADAPTERHP8921A CELLSITE TEST SETHP83236A PCSINTERFACEHP-IBFW00369F
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-6HP8921A System Connectivity TestFollow the steps in Table F-3 to verify that the connections between thePCS Interface and the HP8921A are correct and cables are intact. Thesoftware also performs basic functionality checks of each instrument.NOTE Disconnect other GPIB devices, especially system controllers,from the system before running the connectivity software.Table F-3: System ConnectivityStep Action* IMPORTANT- Perform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for aminimum of 60 minutes.1Insert HP 83236A Manual Control/System card into memory card slot.2Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.3Press the Screen Control [TESTS] pushbutton to display the “Tests” Main Menu screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. Inthe Choices selection box, select Card.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it by pressing the cursor control knob. Inthe Choices selection box, select SYS_CONN.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. The software will prompt you through theconnectivity setup.7Do the following when the test is complete,Sposition cursor on STOP TEST and select itSOR press the [K5] pushbutton.8To return to the main menu, press the [K5] pushbutton.9Press the [PRESET] pushbutton.Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table F-4 to set the HP8921A GPIB address.Table F-4: Setting HP8921A GPIB AddressStep Action1If you have not already done so, turn the HP8921A power on.2Verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly.SHP8921A HP-IB Adrs = 18, accessed by pushing LOCAL and selecting More and I/O Configureon the HP8921A/600. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional info as required).SHP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19. Set dip switches as follows:- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1F
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-7Pretest Setup for HP8921ABefore the HP8921A CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-5: Pretest Setup for HP8921AStep Action1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.2Press the CURSOR CONTROL knob.3Position the cursor at IO CONFIG (under To Screen and More) and select it.4Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.Pretest Setup for HP8935Before the HP8935 CDMA analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-6: Pretest Setup for HP8935Step Action1Unplug the memory card if it is plugged in.2Press the Shift button and then press the I/O Config button.3Press the Push to Select knob.4Position the cursor at IO CONFIG and select it.5 Select Mode and set for Talk&Lstn.Advantest R3465 ConnectionThe following diagram depicts the rear panels of the Advantest testequipment as configured to perform automatic tests. All test equipmentis controlled by the LMF via an IEEE-488/GPIB bus. The LMF expectseach piece of test equipment to have a factory-set GPIB address (refer toTable F-7). If there is a communications problem between the LMF andany piece of test equipment, you should verify that the GPIB addresseshave been set correctly and that the GPIB cables are firmly connected tothe test equipment.Figure F-3 shows the connections when not using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.F
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-8Figure F-3: Cable Connections for Test Set without 10 MHz Rubidium StandardADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELGPIBCONNECTORSERIAL I/OLOCAL INSERIAL I/OSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3561LREAR PANELR3465REAR PANELTO T-CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN/SEC/SYNC IN)XYZIF OUT421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00370F
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-9Figure F-4 shows the connections when using an external 10 MHzRubidium reference.Figure F-4: Cable Connections for Test Set with 10 MHz Rubidium StandardSERIAL I/OGPIBCONNECTOR ADVANTEST R3465REAR PANELFROM 10 MHZRUBIDIUM REFERENCELOCAL INSERIAL I/OIF OUTSYN REF IN 10 MHZ OUTPARALLELEXT TRIGGER10 MHZ REFGATE INGPIBCDMA CLOCK OUTAC POWERAC POWERR3465/3463REAR PANELR3561LREAR PANELTO T-CONNECTORON FRONT PANEL(EVEN SEC/SYNC IN)XYZ421 MHZTO POWER METERGPIB CONNECTORTO GPIBINTERFACE BOXFW00371F
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-10R3465 GPIB Address & Clock setupFollow the steps in Table F-7 to set the GPIB address and clock for theAdvantest R3465 equipment.Table F-7: Advantest R3465 GPIB Address and Clock SetupStep Action1Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)Perform the following to set the standard parameters on the test set:SPush the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display).SPush the LCL pushbutton (CW in Measurement just below the CRT display)- Push the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.-If required, change GPIB address to 18 (rotate the vernier knob to set, push the vernier knob toenter)2Verify the current Date and Time in upper/right of the CRT display (perform the following to set ifrequired)Communications test set GPIB address=18 (perform the following to view/set as required)SPush the Date/Time CRT menu keySIf required, change to correct Date/Time (rotate the vernier knob to select and set, push the vernierknob to enter)S Push the SHIFT then PRESET pushbutton (just below the CRT display). Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465Before the Advantest R3465 analyzer is used for LMF controlled testingit must be set up correctly for automatic testing.Table F-8: Pretest Setup for Advantest R3465Step Action1Press the SHIFT button so the LED next to it is illuminated.2Press the RESET button.F
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-11Agilent E4406A/E4432B Test Equipment InterconnectionTo provide proper operation during testing when both units are required,the 10 MHz reference signal from the E4406A transmitter test set mustbe provided to the E4432B signal generator. Connect a BNC (M)-BNC(M) cable from the E4406A 10 MHz OUT (SWITCHED) connector tothe E4432B 10MHz IN connector as shown in Figure F-5.Figure F-5: Agilent 10 MHz Reference ConnectionsE4406A10 MHz OUT(SWITCHED)E4432B10 MHz INTO GPIB BOXF
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-12Calibrating Test Cable Setupusing HP PCS Interface (HP83236)Table F-9 covers the procedure to calibrate the test equipment using the HP8921 Cellular Communications Analyzer equipped with theHP83236 PCS Interface.NOTE Table:note. Note 10pt HelveticaThis calibration method must be executed with great care. Somelosses are measured close to the minimum limit of the powermeter sensor (-30 dBm).PrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:STest equipment to be calibrated has been connected correctly for cablecalibration.STest equipment has been selected and calibrated.Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step ActionNOTEVerify that GPIB controller is turned off.1Insert HP83236 Manual Control System card into memory card slot.2Press the Preset pushbutton.3 Under Screen Controls, press the TESTS pushbutton to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.4Position the cursor at Select Procedure Location and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectCARD.5Position the cursor at Select Procedure Filename and select it. In the Choices selection box, selectMANUAL.6Position the cursor at RUN TEST and select it. HP must be in Control Mode Select YES.7If using HP 83236A:Set channel number=<chan#>:- Position cursor at ChannelNumber and select it.- Enter the chan# using the numerickeypad; press [Enter] and thescreen will go blank.- When the screen reappears, thechan# will be displayed on thechannel number line.If using HP 83236B:Set channel frequency:- Position cursor at Frequency Band and press Enter.- Select User Defined Frequency.- Go Back to Previous Menu.- Position the cursor to 83236 generator frequency andenter actual RX frequency.- Position the cursor to 83236 analyzer frequency andenter actual TX frequency.8Set RF Generator level:- Position the cursor at RF Generator Level and select it.- Enter -10 using the numeric keypad; press [Enter] and the screen will go blank.- When the screen reappears, the value -10 dBm will be displayed on the RF Generator Level line.. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-13Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action9Set the user fixed Attenuation Setting to 0 dBm:- Position cursor at Analyzer Attenuation and select it- Position cursor at User Fixed Atten Settings and select it.- Enter 0 (zero) using the numeric keypad and press [Enter].10 Select Back to Previous Menu.11 Record the HP83236 Generator Frequency Level:Record the HP83236B Generator Frequency Level:- Position cursor at Show Frequency and Level Details and select it.- Under HP83236 Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Level.- Under HP83236B Frequencies and Levels, record the Generator Frequency Level (1850 - 1910MHz).- Position cursor at Prev Menu and select it.12 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.13 Connect the power sensor directly to the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.14 On the HP8921A, under To Screen, select CDMA GEN.15 Move the cursor to the Amplitude field and click on the Amplitude value.16 Increase the Amplitude value until the power meter reads 0 dBm ±0.2 dB.NOTEThe Amplitude value can be increased coarsely until 0 dBM is reached; then fine tune the amplitudeby adjusting the Increment Set to 0.1 dBm and targeting in on 0 dBm.17 Disconnect the power sensor from the RF OUT ONLY port of the PCS Interface.* IMPORTANTThe Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses ≤30 dBshould be measured using this method. For further accuracy, always re-zero the power meterbefore connecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. After connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.18 Disconnect all components in the test setup and calibrate each one separately by connecting eachcomponent, one-at-a-time, between the RF OUT ONLY PORT and the power sensor. Record thecalibrated loss value displayed on the power meter.SExample: (A) Test Cable(s) = -1.4 dB(B) 20 dB Attenuator = -20.1 dB(B) Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB19 After all components are calibrated, reassemble all components together and calculate the total testsetup loss by adding up all the individual losses:SExample: Total test setup loss = -1.4 -29.8 -20.1 = -51.3 dB.This calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Under Screen Controls press the TESTS button to display the TESTS (Main Menu) screen.21 Select Continue (K2).22 Select RF Generator Level and set to -119 dBm.. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-14Table F-9: Calibrating Test Cable Setup (using the HP PCS Interface)Step Action23 Click on Pause for Manual Measurement.24 Verify the HP8921A Communication Analyzer/83203A CDMA interface setup is as follows (fieldsnot indicated remain at default):SVerify the GPIB (HP-IB) address:- under To Screen, select More- select IO CONFIG- Set HP-IB Adrs to 18- set Mode to Talk&LstnSVerify the HP8921A is displaying frequency (instead of RF channel)- Press the blue [SHIFT] button, then press the Screen Control [DUPLEX] button; this switches tothe CONFIG (CONFIGURE) screen.- Use the cursor control to set RF Display to Freq25 Refer toChapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-15Figure F-6: Cable CalibrationUsing HP8921 with PCS Interface(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(A)POWERSENSOR(C)30 dBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER150 WNON-RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSOR(B)POWERSENSOR(B)MEMORYCARDSLOT20 dB / 20 WATTATTENUATORFW00292F
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-16Calibrating Test Cable Setup using Advantest R3465NOTE Be sure the GPIB Interface is OFF for this procedure.Advantest R3465 Manual Test setup and calibration must be performedat both the TX and RX frequencies.Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action* IMPORTANT- This procedure can only be performed after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up andstabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the display2Press the ADVANCE key in the MEASUREMENT area of the control panel.3Select the CDMA Sig CRT menu key4Select the Setup CRT menu key5Using the vernier knob and the cursor keys set the following parametersNOTEFields not listed remain at defaultGenerator Mode: SIGNALLink: FORWARDLevel Unit: dBmCalCorrection: ONLevel Offset: OFF6Select the return CRT menu key7 Press FREQ key in the ENTRY area8Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys9Verify that the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.10 Verify that the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF; if not, press the Output key to toggle itOFF.11 Press the LEVEL key in the ENTRY area.12 Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the key pad entry keys.13 Zero power meter. Next connect the power sensor directly to the “RF OUT” port on the R3561LCDMA Test Source Unit.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output to ON.15 Record the power meter reading ________________________. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-17Table F-10: Procedure for Calibrating Test Cable Setup Using Advantest R3465Step Action16 Disconnect the power meter sensor from the R3561L RF OUT jack.* IMPORTANTThe Power Meter sensor’s lower limit is -30 dBm. Thus, only components having losses < 30 dBshould be measured using this method. For best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter beforeconnecting the power sensor to the component being calibrated. Then, after connecting thepower sensor to the component, record the calibrated loss immediately.17 Disconnect all components in the the test setup and calibrate each one separately. Connect eachcomponent one-at-a-time between the “RF OUT” port and the power sensor (see Figure F-7, “SetupsA, B, and C”). Record the calibrated loss value displayed on the power meter for each connection.Example: (A) 1st Test Cable = -0.5 dB(B) 2nd Test Cable = -1.4 dB(C) 20 dB Attenuator = -20.1 dB(D) 30 dB Directional Coupler = -29.8 dB18 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle Output OFF.19 Calculate the total test setup loss by adding up all the individual losses:Example: Total test setup loss = 0.5 + 1.4 + 20.1 + 29.8 = 51.8 dBThis calculated value will be used in the next series of tests.20 Press the FREQ key in the ENTRY area21 Using the keypad entry keys, set the test frequency to the RX frequency22 Repeat steps 9 through 19 for the RX frequency.23 Refer to Chapter 3 for assistance in setting the cable loss values into the LMF. F
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-18Figure F-7: Cable Calibration using Advantest R3465POWERSENSOR20 DB / 2 WATTATTENUATOR(A)(C)POWERSENSOR(D)30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(C)100 WNON-RADIATINGRF LOADPOWERSENSORRF OUTPOWERSENSOR& (B)FW00320F
Test Equipment Setup68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-19Calibrating HP 437 Power MeterPrecise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps outlined in Table F-11 to enter information unique tothe power sensor before calibrating the test setup. Refer to Figure F-8 asrequired.NOTE Table:note. Note 10pt HelveticaThis procedure must be done in conjunction with the automatedcalibration to enter power sensor specific calibration values.Figure F-8: Power Meter DetailCONNECT POWERSENSOR WITH POWERMETER TURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSORTO POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING UNIT.POWER REFERENCE ISENABLED USING THE SHIFT 'KEYSSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON -ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with ac power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or mis-calibration.1- Make sure the power meter AC LINE pushbutton is OFF.- Connect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.2Set the AC LINE pushbutton to ON.NOTEThe calibration should be performed only after the power meter and sensor have been allowed towarm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.3Perform the following to set or verify the GPIB address:- To enter the SPECIAL data entry function, press [SHIFT] then [PRESET].- Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP-IB ADRS; then press [ENTER].- Use the [y] or [b] button to select HP-IB ADRS 13; then press [ENTER].-To EXIT the SPECIAL data entry function press [SHIFT] then [ENTER].. . . continued on next pageF
Test Equipment Setup 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-20Table F-11: Power Meter Calibration ProcedureStep Action4Perform the following to set or verify the correct power sensor model:- Press [SHIFT] then [a] to select SENSOR.- Identify the power sensor model number from the sensor label. Use the [y] or [b] button toselect the appropriate model; then press [ENTER].NOTEBe sure the PWR REF (power reference) output is OFF (observe that the triangular indicator is NOTdisplayed as shown in Step 7). If on, press [SHIFT] then ['] to turn it off.5 Press [ZERO]. Display will show “Zeroing ******.” Wait for process to complete.6Connect the power sensor to the POWER REF output.7To turn on the PWR REF, perform the following:- Press [SHIFT] then ['].- Verify that the triangular indicator (below) appears in the display above “PWR REF”.8Perform the following to set the REF CF %:- Press ([SHIFT] then [ZERO]) for CAL.- Enter the sensor’s REF CF % from the sensor’s decal using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].(The power meter will display ”CAL *****” for a few seconds.)NOTEIf the REF CAL FACTOR (REF CF) is not shown on the power sensor, assume it to be 100%.9Perform the following to set the CAL FAC %:- Press [SHIFT] then [FREQ] for CAL FAC.-On the sensor’s decal, locate an approximate calibration percentage factor (CF%) at 2 GHz. Enterthe sensor’s calibration % (CF%) using the arrow keys and press [ENTER].When complete, the power meter will typically display 0.05 dBm. (Any reading between 0.00 and0.10 is normal.)10 To turn off the PWR REF, perform the following:- Press [SHIFT] then ['].- Disconnect the power sensor from the POWER REF output. F
Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-21Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meterPrecise transmit output power calibration measurements are made usinga bolometer-type broadband power meter with a sensitive power sensor.Follow the steps in Table F-12 to enter information unique to the powersensor.Table F-12: Calibrate Gigatronics 8541C Power MeterStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.NOTEAllow the power meter and sensor to warm up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes beforeperforming the calibration procedure.1SMake sure the power meter POWER pushbutton is OFF.SConnect the power sensor cable to the SENSOR input.SSet the POWER pushbutton to ON.2Verify the Power GPIB mode and address:SPress MENU. Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU, and press ENTER.SUse the b arrow key to select GPIB, and press ENTER.SUse the by arrow keys to set MODE to 8541C.SPress ' and use the by arrow keys as required to set ADDRESS to 13.SPress ENTER.3SConnect the power sensor to the CALIBRATOR output connector.SPress ZERO.SWait for the process to complete. Sensor factory calibration data is read to power meter during thisprocess.SDisconnect the power sensor from the CALIBRATOR output.Figure F-9: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter DetailCONNECT POWER SENSORWITH POWER METERTURNED OFFCONNECT POWER SENSOR TOCALIBRATOR POWER REFERENCEWHEN CALIBRATING/ZEROING UNITFRONT View REAR ViewGPIB CONNECTIONAC POWERFW00564F
Calibrating Gigatronics 8541C power meter 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYF-22NotesF
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-1Appendix GPower CalibrationG
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-2Calibrating Output PowerPower CalibrationThis procedure is a guide to expanding your system with multiplecarriers while the system remains in service. This procedure also allowsyou to perform on site maintenance (replace defective boards andrecalibrate) while the remainder of the site stays in service.Motorola recommends that you perform this procedure during amaintenance window.This procedure cannot be performed on BTSs with 4-to-1 combiners.The procedure can only be performed on one side of the BTS at onetime. That is, LPAs 1, 2 ,3, 7, 8, 9 (feed antennas 1, 2, 3) can becalibrated while LPAs 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 (feed antennas 4, 5, 6) remainin service and vice versa.Equipment Warm upNOTE Calibration of the communications test set (or equivalent testequipment) must be performed at the site before calibrating theoverall test set. Calibrate the test equipment after it has beenallowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimum of 60 minutes.CAUTION If any piece of test equipment (i.e., test cable, RF adapter) hasbeen replaced, re-calibration must be performed. Failure to do socould introduce measurement errors, causing incorrectmeasurements and degradation to system performance.Power Delta Calibration IntroductionThe In-service calibration procedure has several differences from anormal calibration procedure. One of these is the use of a spectrumanalyzer instead of a power meter to measure power. Power meters arebroadband measurement devices and cannot be used to measure powerduring In-service Calibration since other carriers are operating. Aspectrum analyzer can be used because it measures power at a givenfrequency. However, measuring power using a spectrum analyzer is lessaccurate than using a power meter. Therefore, you must compensate forthe difference (delta) between the power meter and the spectrumanalyzer.G
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-3HP8921A Power Delta CalibrationUse the HP8921A Spectrum Analyzer to measure power duringIn-Service Calibration for 800 MHz systems. After the offset value hasbeen calculated, add it to the TX cable loss value.Follow the procedure in Table G-1 to perform the HP8921A Power DeltaCalibration procedure.NOTE This procedure requires two HP8921As.Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8921A Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (seeFigure G-1).2Set the HP8921A signal source as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Generator- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency- CW RF Path to IQ- Output Port to Dupl- Data Source to Random- Amplitude to 0 dBm3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.5Turn off the source HP8921A signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.NOTELeave the settings on the source HP8921A for convenience in the following steps.6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8921A Duplex Out port and the measuringHP8921A RF-IN port (see Figure G-2).7Ensure that the source HP8921A settings are the same as in Step 2.8Set the measuring HP8921A as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Anl- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency- Input Attenuation to 0 dB- Input port to RF-IN- Gain to Auto- Analyzer Direction to Fwd9Turn on the source HP8921A signal output.10 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8921A as resultB ________________________.11 Turn off the source HP8921A signal output and disconnect the equipment.. . . continued on next pageG
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-4Table G-1: HP8921A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action12 Compute the delta between HP437B and HP8921A using the following formula:Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration. Figure G-1: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP437BShort RF CableHP 8921ADUPLEXOUTHP437BPowerSensorSENSORFW00801Figure G-2: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8921A to HP8921AMeasurement HP8921A Source HP8921AShort RF CableDUPLEXOUTRFIN/OUTFW00802Advantest R3465 Power Delta CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table G-2 to perform the Advantest 3465 PowerDelta Calibration procedure.G
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-5Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.On the Advantest R3465:1Press the SHIFT and the PRESET keys located below the CRT display.2Press the ADVANCE key in the Measurement area of the control panel.3Press the CDMA Sig CRT menu key.4Press the FREQ key in the Entry area of the control panel.5Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.6Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.7Set the LEVEL to 0 dBm using the keypad entry keys.8Verify the Mod CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Mod key to toggle it OFF.9Verify the Output CRT menu key is highlighting OFF, if not press the Output key to toggle it OFF.On the HP 437 Power Meter:10 Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.* IMPORTANTFor best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.11 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the power sensor,refer to Figure G-3.12 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to ON.13 Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.14 Press the Output CRT menu key to toggle the Output to OFF.15 Connect the RF cable from the R3561L CDMA Test Source Unit RF OUT port to the SpectrumAnalyzer INPUT Port, refer to Figure G-4.16 Press the Output CRT menu key to change the Output to ON.17 Press the CW key in the Measurement area of the control panel.18 Press the LEVEL key in the Entry area of the control panel.19 Set the REF LEVEL to 10 dBm using the keypad entry keys.20 Press the dB/div CRT menu key.21 Press the 10 dB/div CRT menu key.22 Press the FREQ key in Entry area of the control panel.23 Set the frequency to the desired value using the keypad entry keys.24 Press the more 1/2 CRT menu key.. . . continued on next pageG
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-6Table G-2: Advantest Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action25 Press the Preselector CRT menu key to highlight 3.0G.26 Press the FORMAT key in the Display Control area of the control panel.27 Press the TRACE CRT menu key.28 Press the AVG A CRT menu key.29 Set AVG to 20 using keypad entry keys.30 Press the return CRT menu key.31 Press the SPAN key in the Entry area of the control panel.32 Press the Zero Span CRT menu key.33 Press the BW key in the Entry area of the control panel.34 Press the RBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL. using keypad entry keys enter 30 kHz.35 Set RBW to 30 kHz using keypad entry keys.36 Press the VBW CRT menu key to highlight MNL.37 Set VBW to 1 MHz using keypad entry keys.38 Press the Marker ON key in the Display Control area of the control panel.39 Record the Marker Level reading as result B ________________________.40 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Advantest measurement.Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration. Figure G-3: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to HP437BAdvantest PowerSensorRF OUTShort RF CableHP437BSENSORR3561LFW00803G
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-7Figure G-4: Delta Calibration Setup - R3561L to R3465R3561LRF OUTINPUTShort RF CableR3465FW00804HP8935 Power Delta CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table G-3 to perform the HP8935 Power DeltaCalibration procedure.Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.1Connect a short RF cable between the HP8935 Duplex Out port and the HP437B power sensor (seeFigure G-5).2Set the HP8935 signal source as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Gen- Frequency to the CDMA Calibration target frequency- CW RF Path to IQ- Output Port to Dupl- Data Source to Random- Amplitude to 0 dBm3Measure and record the power value reading on the HP437B Power Meter.4Record the Power Meter reading as result A ________________________.5Turn off the source HP8935 signal output, and disconnect the HP437B.NOTELeave the settings on the source HP8935 for convenience in the following steps.6Connect the short RF cable between the source HP8935 Duplex Out port and the RF-IN/OUT port(see Figure G-6).7Ensure that the source HP8935 settings are the same as in Step 2.8Set the measuring HP8935 as follows:- Measure mode to CDMA Anl- Frequency to the CDMA calibration target frequency- Input Attenuation to 0 dB- Input port to RF-IN- Gain to Auto- Anl Dir to Fwd. . . continued on next pageG
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-8Table G-3: HP8935 Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action9Turn on the source HP8935 signal output.10 Set the Chn Pwr Cal to Calibrate and select to calibrate.11 Measure and record the channel power reading on the measuring HP8935 as resultB ________________________.12 Turn off the source HP8935 signal output and disconnect the equipment.13 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Advantest measurement.Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration. Figure G-5: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP437BPowerSensorHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEX OUTShort RF CableHP437BSENSORFW00805Figure G-6: Delta Calibration Setup - HP8935 to HP8935Hewlett-Packard Model HP 8935Short RF CableDUPLEX OUT RF IN/OUTFW00806G
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-9Agilent E4406A Power Delta CalibrationThe Agilent E4406A transmitter tester and E4432B signal generator testequipment combination can be used for CDMA 2000 as well asIS-95A/B operation modes. The power delta calibration is performed onthe E4406A, but the E4432B is required to generate the reference signalused to calculate the power delta offset. After the offset value has beencalculated, add it to the TX cable loss value in the LMF.Follow the procedure in Table G-4 to perform the Agilent E4406APower Delta Calibration procedure.Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes. After it is warmed up and stabilized, calibrate the test equipment as described in the“Test Set Calibration” section of the Optimization/Calibration chapter in the SC 4812ETOptimization/ATP manual.1Zero the Power Meter prior to connecting the power sensor to the RF cable from the signal generator.* IMPORTANTFor best accuracy, always re-zero the power meter before connecting the power sensor to thecomponent being calibrated.2Connect a short RF cable from the E4432B RF OUTPUT connector the HP437 power meter powersensor (see Figure G-7).3Set the E4432B signal generator as follows:- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the signal generator is configured.- Press Frequency and enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated on the numeric keypad.- Using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select the frequency range to be measured; forexample MHz.- Press Amplitude and, using the numeric keypad, set signal amplitude to 0 (zero).- Using the soft keys, set the measurement type to dBm.4On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.5Measure and record the value reading on the HP437 power meter as result A____________________.6On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.7Disconnect the short RF cable from the HP437 power meter power sensor, and connect it to the RFINPUT connector on the E4406A transmitter tester (see Figure G-8).. . . continued on next pageG
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-10Table G-4: Agilent E4406A Power Delta Calibration ProcedureStep Action8* IMPORTANTDo not change the frequency and amplitude settings on the E4432B when performing the followingsteps.Set the E4406A as follows:- Press Preset to exit any modes for which the transmitter tester is configured- Press MODE and, using the soft keys to the right of the screen, select cdmaOne- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select spectrum- Press Frequency and, using the soft keys, select Center Frequency- Enter the frequency of the channel to be calibrated using the numeric keypad- Using the soft keys, select the frequency range to be measured; for example, MHz- Press Input/Output and, using the soft keys, select Input Atten- Using the numeric keypad, set Input Atten to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB- Using the soft keys, select External Atten and then select Mobile- Using the numeric keypad, set Mobile to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB- Using the soft keys, select Base- Using the numeric keypad, set Base to 0 (zero) and, using the soft keys, select dB- Press MEASURE and, using the soft keys, select Channel Power9On the E4432B signal generator, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF ON.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.10 Read the measured Channel Power from the E4406A screen display and record it as result B____________________.11 On the E4432B, press RF On/Off to toggle the RF output to RF OFF.- Note that the RF On/Off status in the screen display changes.12 Calculate the Power Calibration Delta value. The delta value is the power meter measurement minusthe Agilent measurement.Delta = A - BExample: Delta = -0.70 dBm - (-1.25 dBm) = 0.55 dBmExample: Delta = 0.26 dBm - 0.55 dBm = -0.29 dBmThese examples are included to show the mathematics and do not represent actual readings.NOTEAdd this delta value to the TX Cable Loss value during In-Service Calibration. G
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-11Figure G-7: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to HP437PowerSensorAGILENT E4432B AND E4406AShort RF CableHP437BSENSORRF OUTPUTFW00858Figure G-8: Delta Calibration Setup - Agilent E4432B to Agilent E4406AShort RFCableRF INPUTAGILENT E4432B AND E4406ARF OUTPUTFW00859In-Service CalibrationNOTE This feature does NOT have fault tolerance at this time. Thesystem has no safe-guards to stop you from doing somethingthat will take the BTS out of service. If possible, perform thisprocedure during a maintenance window.Follow the procedures in this section precisely, otherwise theentire BTS will most likely go OUT OF SERVICE.At the CBSC, only perform operations on expansion hardwarewhen it is in the OOS_MANUAL state.The operator must be trained in the LMF operation prior toperforming this procedure.PrerequisitesSExpansion hardware has been added in the CBSC database, and theCDF file has been generated.SThe expansion devices have been inserted into the C-CCP cage andare in the OOS_MANUAL state at the CBSC.SThe site specific cdf (with the expansion hardware) and cal files havebeen loaded onto the LMF.SThe LMF has the same code and dds files as the CBSC to download.G
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-12NOTE Do not download code or data to any cards other than those youare working on. Downloading code or data to other cards willtake the site OUT OF SERVICE.The code file version numbers must match the version numberson the other cards in the frame. If the numbers do not match, thesite may go OUT OF SERVICE.The BTS-#.cdf, CBSC-#.cdf, and CAL files for this BTS musthave come from the CBSC.STest equipment has been configured per Figure G-9 or Figure G-10.SAn RFDS (or at a minimum a directional coupler), whose loss isalready known, must be in line to perform the in-service calibration.STest equipment has been calibrated after 1 hour warm up.SA short RF cable and two BNC-N adapters are available to performCable Calibration.SThe Power Delta Calibration has been performed (see Table G-1,Table G-2, or Table G-3).G
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-13Figure G-9: Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDSTXTESTCABLEHewlett-Packard Model HP 8935DUPLEX OUTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRF IN/OUTHP-IBTO GPIBBOXRX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXTESTCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSRF IN/OUTNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.ANTENNARFDSDUPLEXERDIRECTIONALCOUPLEREVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF FW00759SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDRXTESTCABLEFWDCOUPLEDPORT20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)DUPLEXOUTG
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-14Figure G-10: IS-95 A/B/C Optimization/ATP Test Setup Using RFDSTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFINPUT 50OHMSRFOUT 50OHMSAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO 10 MHZ IN(EXT REF IN) ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER INPUT 50OHMRF OUT50 OHMAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSM BOARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUMANALYZERTO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERTXTESTCABLERX ANTENNAPORT TX ANTENNAPORTRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXINTERNAL PCMCIAETHERNET CARDGPIBCABLEUNIVERSAL TWISTEDPAIR (UTP) CABLE(RJ45 CONNECTORS)RS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSTXCABLECDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARXTESTCABLECOMMUNICATIONSTEST SETIEEE 488GPIB BUSRFINPUT50OHMSRF OUT 50OHMSNOTE: IF BTS RX/TX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED: BOTH THE TX AND RX TESTCABLES CONNECT TO THE DUPLEXEDANTENNA GROUP.ANTENNARFDSDUPLEXERDIRECTIONALCOUPLEREVENSECOND/SYNC INEXTREF INFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMREF. FW00759RXCABLEFWDCOUPLEDPORTSIGNALGENERATOREXT TRIG INMOD TIME BASE IN(EXT REF IN)19.6608MHZCLOCK20 DB PAD(FOR 1.7/1.9 GHZ)10 DB PAD(FOR 800 MHZ)BNC“T”G
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-15Follow the procedure in Table G-5 to perform the In-ServiceCalibration.Table G-5: In-Service CalibrationStep Action* IMPORTANTPerform this procedure after test equipment has been allowed to warm-up and stabilize for a minimumof 60 minutes.1Set up the LMF for In-Service Calibration:- Start the LMF by double-clicking the LMF icon on the Windows desktop.- Click Tools>Options from the menu bar at the login screen.- Check the applicable spectrum analyzer check box and the signal generator check box on the TestEquipment tab.Ensure that the GPIB address is 18 for the CDMA analyzer and 1 for the signal generator.- Uncheck any other other equipment that is selected.- Click the Apply button.- Select the BTS Options tab in the LMF Option window.- Check the In-Service Calibration check box.- Click the Apply button.- Click the Dismiss button to close the LMF Option window.2Login to the target BTS:- Select the target BTS icon.- Click the Login button at the login screen.3Measure the Cable Loss using the Cable Calibration function:- Click Util>Cable Calibration from the menu bar at the main window.- Set the desired channel(s) and select TX and RX CABLE CAL at the cable calibration pop upwindow.- Click the OK button to perform cable calibration.- Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the cable loss measurement.NOTE- The measured value is input automatically to the cable loss file.- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.4Add the spectrum analyzer power delta to the Cable Loss.- To view the cable loss file, click Util>Examine>Cable Loss>TX or RX.- Add the value computed in Table G-1, Table G-2, or Table G-3 to the TX Cable Loss.NOTEBe sure to include the sign of the value. The following examples are included to show the mathematicsand do not represent actual readings:- Example: 5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = 6.20 dBm- Example: 5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = 5.36 dBm- Example: -5.65 dBm + 0.55 dBm = -5.10 dBm- Example: -5.65 dBm + (-0.29 dBm) = -5.94 dBm. . . continued on next pageG
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-16Table G-5: In-Service CalibrationStep Action5Input the Coupler Loss for the TX and RX tests:- Click Util>Edit>Coupler Loss>TX or RX from the menu bar at the main window.- Input the appropriate coupler loss for the target carrier(s) by referring to the information taken atthe time of BTS installation.- Click the Save button.- Click the Dismiss button to close the window.- To view the coupler loss file, click Util>Examine>Coupler Loss>TX or RX.6Have the CBSC operator put the redundant BBX OOS_MANUAL.! CAUTIONBe sure to download OOS devices only. Loading in-service devices takes them OUT OF SERVICEand can result in dropped calls.The code file version numbers must match the version numbers on the other cards in the frame. If thenumbers do not match, the site may go OUT OF SERVICE.NOTEBe sure to include the redundant BBX in steps 9, 10, and 11.7Download code and data to the target devices:- Click Tools>Update NextLoad>CDMA to set the code version that will be downloaded.- Select the BTS(s) you need, check the appropriate code version in the pop up window, and clickthe Save button to close.- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.- Click Device>Download>Code/Data to start downloading code.- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.- Click Device>Download>Data to start downloading data.. . . continued on next pageG
Calibrating Output Power68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-17Table G-5: In-Service CalibrationStep Action! CAUTIONPerform the In-service Calibration procedure on OOS devices only.8Select the desired test:- Select the target BBX(s) on the C-CCP cage picture.- Click Tests>[desired test] from the menu bar at the main window.- Select the target carrier and confirm the channel number in the pop up window.- Leave the Verify BLO check box checked.- From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.- Click the OK button to start calibration.- Follow the on-screen instructions, except, do not connect to the BTS antenna port, connect to thedirectional coupler (fwd) port associated with the on screen prompt antenna port.NOTESSelecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.SSelecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. This requiresan MCC to be selected.SSelecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS-97 gain values for allthe other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Usingthis pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.SSelecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, the gainfor the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.9Save the result and download the BLO data to the target BBX(s):- Click the Save Result button on the result screen.The window closes automatically.10 Logout from the BTS and close the LMF session:- Click BTS>Logout to close the BTS connection.- Close the LMF window.11 Restore the new “bts-*.cal” file to the CBSC.12 Enable the target device(s) from the CBSC. G
Calibrating Output Power 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYG-18NotesG
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-1Appendix HCable InterconnectionH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-2Intra-Cabinet Cabling SC 4812ET Intra-Cabinet Cabling This appendix provides the identification and location of the cablesconnecting the components which make up the SC 4812ET RF cabinet.The number of cables and components incorporated in the RF cabinetwill vary depending on the the manner in which the cabinet is equipped.For example, a 3 sector, 2 carrier system will require less componentsand less cables than a 6 sector 2 carrier system.Refer to Table H-1 and Figure H-1 through Figure H-19 for the cableyou wish to research.NOTE In some cases cables with the same number are used to connecttwo different signalling paths. These cables are designated A &B and the point they connect to and from is also designated A &B. Ensure the correct cable (A or B) is connected to the correctdesignation (A or B) connector or plug.Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLESDRDC, Combiner, Trunking Backplane CablesCABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO3064795A05 TX CIO Figure H-6 Trunking BP3064735A10 TX Trunking BP Figure H-5 Combiner Connector Pnl3064735A07 TX CombinerSee Figure H-1, Figure H-11,Figure H-12, Figure H-13, andFigure H-14 DRDC3064735A11 TX Combiner (See Above) DRDC3064735A12 TX Combiner (See Above) DRDC3064795A07 TX CIO Figure H-11 Trunking BP3086435H01 TX Combiner QDS PkZ Adptr3086435H02 TX Combiner QDS PkZ Adptr3086435H03 TX Combiner QDS PkZ Adptr3086168H01 Power LPA PDA Figure H-5 Trunk BPC-CCP CablesCABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO3064809A01 Power CCCP/PDA See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP Backplane3064899A04 LAN I/O A in See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP LAN I/O A InC-CCP Cables (cont)CABLE # FROM NOTEs TO3064899A04 LAN I/O B in See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP LAN I/O B In3086033H03 GPS Surge Arrestor See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCPBackplane3064899A04 LAN I/O B in See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP LAN I/O B In. . . continued on next pageH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-3Table H-1: SC4812ET RF CABINET INTER-CONNECT CABLES3064899A03 C-CCP LAN I/O A Out See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 LAN I/O A Out3064899A03 C-CCP LAN I/O B Out See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 LAN I/O B Out3064899A07 Sync CSM See Figure H-1 I/O3086000H02 Site I/O C-CCP See Figure H-9 J2 on ETIB3086001H02 A SPAN I/O BlkHd See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP/A SPAN I/O3086001H02 B SPAN I/O BlkHd See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP/B SPAN I/O3086086H02 Alarm C-CCP See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 J1 on ETIB3086366H02 HSO/LFR See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP HSO/LFR4886044H01 LBD See Figure H-1 & Figure H-5 C-CCP BackplaneSpan I/O Board CablesCABLE # FROM NOTEs TO3086601H01 SPAN I/O Pblock See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 CSU3086601H02 SPAN CSU See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 A & B SPAN I/O BRD3086001H02 SPAN CSU See Figure H-1 & Figure H-10 A & B SPAN Connector onC-CCP BackplaneRFDS CablesCABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO3064238A17 RFDS/ASU-1 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDC3064238A18 RFDS/ASU-2 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDC3064238A19 RFDS/ASU-1 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDC3064238A20 RFDS/ASU-2 Figure H-16 & Figure H-17 DRDCETIB/LPAC CablesCABLE # FROM NOTE’sTO3064794A03 LPAC See Figure H-8 C-CCP Bkpln3064794A05 ETIB See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 RFDS3086433H04 RGPS I/O See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 ETIB (15 position)3086169H01 Power, Heat Exchanger,PDA See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 ETIB, OPT, HX, EBA3086500H01 Alm/Ctrl ETIB See Figure H-1 & Figure H-9 HX/LPA3086505H01 DC Cable (DC Power Dist) See Figure H-1 & Figure H-19 EBA Blower Assembly3086566H01 LPAC See Figure H-1 & Figure H-8 1 Cable to each LPA Bk Pln3086569H01 Door Intrusion Alarm See Figure H-5 & Figure H-19 Door Switch3086655H02 LPAC See Figure H-8, Figure H-5 &Figure H-19 ETIB H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-4Figure H-1: 4812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU LocationsLPA’sLPA TrunkingBackplaneRFDSDCPowerDist.PunchBlock(back)EBAOPTIONAL AREASpan I/OAlarm toETIBETIBLPACSPAN I/OABINOUTLAN19 MHz2 SecCSU(See Figure H-8,Figure H-9), andFigure H-10)(See Figure H-4,Figure H-5, Figure H-6and Figure H-8)DRDCFW00698SYSSync LPA TrunkingBackplaneRFDSDCPowerDist.PunchBlock(back)EBAC-CCP ShelfCombinerCageOPTIONAL AREASpan I/Oto C-CCP Alarm toETIBETIBLPACSPAN I/OABINOUTLANLAN I/O19 MHz2 SecCSU(See Figure H-2and Figure H-5)(See Figure H-11,Figure H-12,Figure H-13, andFigure H-14)(See Figure H-11)(See Figure H-10)DRDCFW00698SYSSync(See Figure H-5and Figure H-10)ModemToH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-5C-CCP Cables and Cable ConnectorsThe C-CCP Shelf assembly consists of the C-CCP Shelf and the attachedbackplane with cables and connectors (see Figure H-2 and Figure H-3).The C-CCP shelf contains all of the CDMA unique functions within theSC 4812ET RF frame. The C-CCP shelf contains the followingcomponents:SBroadband Transceiver (BBX) cardsSMulti-Channel CDMA (MCC) cardsSCombiner Input/Output (CIO) cardSPower Supply cardsSGroup Line Interface (GLI3) cardsSAlarm Monitor Reporting (AMR) cardsSClock Synchronization Modules (CSM)SHigh Stability Oscillator/Low frequency Receiver (HSO/LFR)SMulticoupler Preselector Cards (MPC)SCDMA Clock Distribution (CCD) cardSIntegrated Frame Modem (IFM) cardSSwitch cardSC-CCP Fan ModulesH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-6Figure H-2: C-CCP Shelf Cable Numbers and ConnectorsPS-3AMR-1HSO/LFRCSM-1CSM-2FILLERAMR-2GLI3-1GLI3-2MCC24-6BBX2-1BBX2-2BBX2-3BBX2-4BBX2-5BBX2-6BBX2-13Switch CardMPC/EMPC-1MPC/EMPC-2CIOBBX2-7BBX2-8BBX2-9BBX2-10BBX2-1 1BBX2-12MCC24-5MCC24-4MCC24-3MCC24-2MCC24-1MCC24-12MCC24-1 1MCC24-10MCC24-9MCC24-8MCC24-7PS-2PS-1CCD-2 CCD-119 mm Filter PanelC-CCP ShelfSPAN A SPAN BCable #3064794A03Cable #3086366H02Cable #3064899A04Cable #3064899A04LPACALARMS SITE I/OHSO/LFRLAN I/O ALAN I/O BCable #3086001H02Cable #3086000H02Cable #3086001H02Cable #3086086H02To LAN I/Oconnectors onthe Bulkhead(To J1connector onthe ETIB)(To SPAN A I/Oconnector onthe Bulkhead)(To SPAN B I/Oconnector on theBulkhead)(To J2connector onthe ETIB)(To the C-CCPconnector on theLPAC Module)FW00699H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-7Figure H-3: C-CCP BackplaneSYSTEMLEDLAN OUT BGPSFW00700Cable #3064794A03Cable #3086366H02Cable #3064899A04Cable #3064899A04LPACHSO/LFRLAN IN ALAN IN BCable #3086001H02Cable #3086000H02Cable #3086001H02Cable #3086086H02To LAN I/Oconnectors onthe Bulkhead(To J1connector onthe ETIB)(To SPAN A I/Oconnector onthe Bulkhead)(To SPAN B I/Oconnector on theBulkhead)(To J2connector onthe ETIB)(To the C-CCPconnector on theLPAC Module)CCCP Power3064809A01LAN OUT A Cable #3064899A03Cable #3064899A03Cable #3086033H03Cable #4886044H01H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-8RF Cabinet LPA Cables There can be a maximum of 16 LPAs in an RF cabinet. The connectionsshown are for one LPA backplane which controls four LPAs. Theremaining LPAs are connected in the same manner. Refer to Figure H-4,through Figure H-8 for the cables connected to the LPAs in the 4812ETRF cabinet.Figure H-4: LPAs for the SC 4812ET5 RU RACKSPACERFDSEBAETIBUnpopulatedLPA Shelf CoverLPA Module(4-Each Cage)External BlowerAssembly (EBA)Note:LPA Component doornot shown for claritySC 4812ET BTS RF CabinetFW00173H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-9Figure H-5: BTS Combiner to LPA Backplane Cables5 RU RACK SPACERFDSEBAETIBSC 4812ET BTSRF CabinetFW00708-REFC1C2C3C4S1S2S3LPA-1LPA-2LPA-3LPA-4TXOUT1TXOUT2TXOUT3TXIN 3TXIN2TXIN 1Cable3064735A10(3 each)LPABackplane4A4B5A5B6A6B1A1B2A2B3A3BS1S2S3S1S2S3S1S2S3BACKLPA-1LPA-2LPA-3LPA-4FROM APPROPRIATELPA LPA 1, LPA 2,LPA 3, LPA 4H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-10Figure H-6: Combiner to LPA Backplane/LPA Backplane To CIO Board CablesTO J15 on CIO Board(See Figure H-7)5 RU RACK SPACERFDSEBAETIBSC 4812ET BTSRF CabinetFW00711C1C2C3C4S1S2S3LPA-1LPA-2LPA-3LPA-4TXOUT1TXOUT2TXOUT3TXIN 3TXIN2TXIN 1Cable 3064735A10(3 each)LPABackplane 14A4B5A5B6A6B1A1B2A2B3A3BS1S2S3S1S2S3S1S2S3 BLUEGREENVIOLETLPA-1LPA-2LPA-3LPA-4TXOUT1TXOUT2TXOUT3TXIN 3TXIN2TXIN 1LPABackplane 2REDYELLOWORANGECable 3064795A05H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-11Figure H-7: Components Located on CIO CardRX EXP ARX EXP BTX BTS 1-6J12J13J14J15BTS 7-12M/F 1-6TXSC 4812ET RF CabinetFW002375 RU RACKSPACERFDSEBAETIBH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-12LPAC Cabling The LPAC module provides the communication interface from the ETIBand C-CCP to the LPA through the trunking backplane. The LPACinterface board is contained in a protective housing which is mounted onthe RF cabinet frame behind the ETIB module. See Figure H-3,Figure H-8 and Figure H-9 for connecting cables and connectorlocations.The LPAC is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.Figure H-8: LPAC Interface Board Connectors and Attaching Cable NumbersNOTE: The LPAC is LocatedBehind the ETIB ModuleLPAC INTERFACEBOARDLPA 1A, 1B 1C, 1DRIBBON CABLE3086566H01LPA 2A, 2B 2C, 2DRIBBON CABLE3086566H01LPA 3A, 3B 3C, 3DRIBBON CABLE3086566H01LPA 4A, 4B 4C, 4DRIBBON CABLE3086566H01LPA-1LPA-2LPA-3LPA-4FRONTTXOUT1TXOUT2TXOUT3TX IN 3TXIN2TX IN1LPA BACKPLANE1, 2, 3, & 4Cable # 3086566H01(4 Connections each Side)ALARM RIBBONCABLE TO ETIB3086655H02RIBBON CABLE TOC-CCP BACKPLANE3064794A03FW00702H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-13ETIB Cables and Cable Connectors The ETIB module (see Figure H-9) provides the interface for the LPA’sthrough the LPAC, punchblock, heat exchanger and alarms to theC-CCP backplane. The ETIB interface board is contained in a protectivehousing which is mounted on the RF cabinet frame.The ETIB is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.Figure H-9: ETIB I/O Connectors and Attaching Cable NumbersSITE I/O (C-CCP Backplane)FW00701P7RFDSJ6DC POWER(Reserved) J1 To ALARMS OUT(C-CCP Backplane)P2LPACP9 ALARMS IN(From Bulkhead )RGD/RGPSP8 OPTIONSRECEPTACLECable #3064794A05Cable #3086655H02Cable #3064534A08Cable #3086086H02Cable #3086000H02Cable #3086433H04Cable #3086366H02J2J5LFR/HSOJ3J4HEAT EXCH(See Figure H-16)See Figure 2-5and Figure H-3See Figure 2-5and Figure H-3See Figure 2-5and Figure H-3Cable #3086500h01(See Figure H-8)(See Figure H-1)(See Figure H-1)Cable #3086168H01Cable #3086569h01DOOR INTRUSION ALARMH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-14SPAN I/O Cable Connection Diagram The SPAN I/O card provides the frame interface and secondary surgeprotection for the T1 lines. There are two span cards in an RF cabinet.SPAN I/O A supports spans A, C, and E. SPAN I/O B supports span B,D, and F. See Figure H-10 for SPAN cables and cable connections.The SPAN I/O is located internally to the frame as shown in Figure H-1.H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-15Figure H-10: SPAN I/O Cables and ConnectorsSPAN I/O (A & B)Interface ModuleRF Expansion PortsPunchBlock Power Input27V RetAntenna’s1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B1A 2A 3A 1B 2B 3B4A 5A 6A 4B 5B 6B12RemoteASUGNDLugs50 Pair(Alarms/Punchblock20 Pair(RGPS)RGDBoardRGD/RGPSPower Input+27VMicro-waveRFGPSABIN OUTLAN19 MHz2 SecSpansAlamsModemSpans)SLOT 1SLOT 2 T1 TERMINAL T1 TERMINALCONTROLPORT GROUPADDRESS SHELFADDRESST1 DDS T1 DDSDTE DCEDATA PORT DATA PORTCSU Back ViewNETWORK NETWORKTo/FromNetworkTo/FromGLI To/FromNetworkTo/FromGLIBulkheadSPAN I/OConnector3086601H01 CSU 3086601H02SPAN I/O BSPAN I/O A3086001H02SPAN I/O WIRING DIAGRAMC-CCPBackplane4812ET Rear Connector Panel(Located Behindthe LPAC Module,See Figure H-1)SPAN I/O A3086001H02SPAN I/O BBulkheadFW00703H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-16DRDC/TRDC Cables and Cable Connections The DRDC is a Duplexer, RX Filter, and Directional Coupler whichprovides the RF interface at the rear of the cabinet. The connections arethe antenna connection (outside rear), transmit into the DRDC TX filter.Receive out of DRDC (RX filter), and Directional coupler.The TRDC is a TX filter/RX filter/Directional Coupler that is the sameas the DRDC except the TRDC has two antenna outputs (TX only andRX only) The TRDC is not available in the 1.9 GHz band.See Figure H-11, Figure H-12, Figure H-13, and Figure H-14 for thecable diagram that fits the configuration of your BTS site.H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-17Figure H-11: 3 Sector, 2 Carrier BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable ConnectionCOMBINER CAGEFW007041A1B2A2B3A3B1A2A3A1B2B3B3 Sector, 2 Carrier Maximum1-1B 3064735A11 3 SEC2-2B 3064735A07 3 SEC3-3B 3064735A07 3 SEC1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC3-3A 3064735A07 3 SECAdd the followingcables for 2nd CarrierDRDCsDual Bandpass FiltersH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-18Figure H-12: BTS 2 to 1, 3 or 6 Sector Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection* FOR 3 SECTOR-4 CARRIERConnect Combiner 4 to 1BCombiner 5 to 2BCombiner 6 to 3BCOMBINER CAGEFW007051425361A2A3A1B2B3B2 to 1 Combiners2 Carrier - 6 Sector4-4A 3064735A12 6 SEC5-5A 3064735A11 6 SEC6-6A 3064735A07 6 SEC1-1A 3064735A11 3/6 SEC2-2A 3064735A07 3/6 SEC3-3A 3064735A07 3/6 SECDRDCs4A5A6A4B5B6BH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-19Figure H-13: BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable ConnectionFW007061A2A3A1A2A3A1B2B3B4 to 1 Combiners3 Sector1-1A 3064735A11 3 SEC2-2A 3064735A07 3 SEC3-3A 3064735A07 3 SECCOMBINER CAGEDRDCs4A5A6A4B5B6BH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-20Figure H-14: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC Cable Connection4A4B5A5B6A6BFW007071A1B2A2B3A3B1A2A3A1B2B3BDual Bandpass Filter6 Sector - 1 or 2 Carrier1-1B 3064735A11 6 Sec2-2B 3064735A07 6 Sec3-3B 3064735A07 6 Sec1-1A 3064735A11 6 Sec2-2A 3064735A07 6 Sec3-3A 3064735A07 6 SecCOMBINER CAGEDRDCs4A5A6A4B5B6B4-4A 3064735A12 6 Sec5-5A 3064735A11 6 Sec6-6A 3064735A07 6 Sec4-4B 3064735A12 6 Sec5-5B 3064735A11 6 Sec6-6B 3064735A07 6 SecH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-21MPC Functional Description The MPC card provides (see Figure H-15) low-noise amplification forall RX path signals. The low noise, high gain design improves frame RXsensitivity and overcomes the splitting loss in the receive path. DCvoltages are monitored on the RF devices and regulators and are used togenerate hard and soft alarms. The MPC is not redundant at thecard-level, but includes dual-path amplifiers which provide soft-failredundancy for all sectors.MPC to DRDC CablingThe cables connecting the MPC cards to the DRDCs for a three sectorRF cabinet are shown in Figure H-15. A six sector RF cabinet wouldhave six more DRDC’s and they would be connected to the front of theMPC cards.H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-22Figure H-15: DRDC To C-CCP Cage MPC Boards Cable Connections5 RU RACKSPACERFDSEBAETIBSC 4812ETRF CabinetFW007101A2A3A1B2B3B1A - 3A: CABLE # 3086659H011B - 3B: CABLE # 3086659H01DRDC CAGECABLES CONNECT1A, 2A, 3A TO TOPMPC BOARD# 3086659H01MPC BOARDSCABLES CONNECT1B, 2B, 3B TOBOTTOM MPC BOARD# 3086659H01* Use Cable 3086659H02For Sectors 4 - 6H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-23RFDS Cabling DetailsFigure H-16 shows the components of the RFDS. Table H-2 depicts thecabling for a 3-Sector Duplexed configuration and Table H-3 depicts thecabling for a 6-Sector Duplexed configuration. Figure H-17 shows theconnection of the RFDS to the BTS combiners.Figure H-16: RFDS Component IdentificationASU1REFL/ANT PORTS 1THROUGH 6SUBSCRIBERUNIT ASSEMBLYAMR BUS/POWERCONNECTOR (LR485)FWTICFWD/BTS PORTS1 THROUGH 6HANDLEASU2P2P3MCXCONNECTORTO ASUSMA CONNECTORSTO DRDC BTS ORANT PORTSMCX CABLE DETAILKNURLEDLOCKSCREWSCONNECTS to P2 ANDP3 OF ASU1 AND ASU2FW00217-REFCable #3064794A05(See Figure H-9)(See Figure H-17)(See Figure H-17)(See Figure H-17)Table H-2: SC 4812ET Series 3-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling TableDRDC Label Directional Coupler Port Cobra RFDS PortASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX)1A BTS Sector 1 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-11B BTS Sector 1 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-22A BTS Sector 2 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-32B BTS Sector 2 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-43A BTS Sector 3 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-53B BTS Sector 3 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-6ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX)1A ANT Sector 1 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-11B ANT Sector 1 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-22A ANT Sector 2 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-32B ANT Sector 2 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-43A ANT Sector 3 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-53B ANT Sector 3 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-6H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-24Table H-3: SC 4812ET Series 6-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDS Cabling TableDRDC Label Directional Coupler Port Cobra RFDS PortASU 1 - FWD (six pack MCX)1A BTS Sector 1 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-11B BTS Sector 1 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-22A BTS Sector 2 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-32B BTS Sector 2 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-43A BTS Sector 3 Main BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-53B BTS Sector 3 Diversity BTS ASU1-FWD BTS-6ASU 2 - FWD (six pack MCX)4A BTS Sector 4 Main BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-14B BTS Sector 4 Diversity BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-25A BTS Sector 5 Main BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-35B BTS Sector 5 Diversity BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-46A BTS Sector 6 Main BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-56B BTS Sector 6 Diversity BTS ASU2-FWD BTS-6ASU 1 - REF (six pack MCX)1A ANT Sector 1 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-11B ANT Sector 1 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-22A ANT Sector 2 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-32B ANT Sector 2 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-43A ANT Sector 3 Main ANT ASU1-REF ANT-53B ANT Sector 3 Diversity ANT ASU1-REF ANT-6ASU 2 - REF (six pack MCX)4A ANT Sector 4 Main ANT ASU2-REF ANT-14B ANT Sector 4 Diversity ANT ASU2-REF ANT-25A ANT Sector 5 Main ANT ASU2-REF ANT-35B ANT Sector 5 Diversity ANT ASU2-REF ANT-46A ANT Sector 6 Main ANT ASU2-REF ANT-56B ANT Sector 6 Diversity ANT ASU2-REF ANT-6H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-25Figure H-17: SC 4812ET BTS Combiner DRDC/TRDC RFDS Cable Connection1A2A3A1B2B3B4A5A6A4B5B6BFW00709ANT COUPLEDTO RFDS ASU 1ANT COUPLEDTO RFDS ASU 2(See Figure H-16)(See Figure H-16)DRDC CAGEBTS COUPLEDTO RFDS ASU 2(See Figure H-16)BTS COUPLEDTO RFDS ASU 1(See Figure H-16)TO RFDSASU1 & ASU250 Pair Punchblock The 50 pair punchblock is the main interface point for RGPS, span lines,customer I/O, Power Cabinet alarm lines, and the modem. Thepunchblock provides primary protection for all lines. Refer toFigure H-18 and Table H-4 for punchblock pin-out.CAUTION SC4812ET Span Line Labeling for Span B and Span C isswapped- On the SC4812ET’s, the span cabel internal to the base stationthat connects the 50 pin header on the I/O plate to the CSU hasSpan B and Span C (RJ-45) connectors mis-labeled.- CFE will punch down the span on the 50 pair bunchblock asper Motorola documentation and punchdown chart. When con-ecting the span input to the CSU re-label “Span B” cableto”Span C” cable to “Span B”. Connect to CSU as per docu-mentation- Note: The labeling issue on the cable from the I/O plate to theCSU Part Number 3086601H01 Rev C shall be corrected onrevision “D” to address this issue. The cut over date to Rev. Dwill be approximately January 30, 2001.H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-26CAUTION A wiring discrepancy exists between the manuals and the framefor remote GPS.- The TX and RX are reversed in the ETIB, leading to inoper-ability of the RGPS. The RGPS will not work in either a singlestandalone or multiple frame configuration.- Swap the White and White/Bk wires to punch pins 44T and44R. The Green and Green/Bk go to 45T and 45R. This willcorrect non-expansion configurations.- Single frame and expansion BTSs without RGPS can use thisworkaround as a permanent solution.- For expansion with RGPS required a new cable (P/N3086433H10 ) will correct the problem.H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-27Figure H-18: 50 Pair PunchblockTOP VIEW OFPUNCH BLOCKSTRAIN RELIEVEINCOMING CABLE TOBRACKET WITH TIE WRAPS2T1T 1R 2T 2R121R2RLEGEND1T = PAIR 1 - TIP1R = PAIR 1 -RING ” ” ” ” ” ”RF Cabinet I/O Area50R50T49R49T1TFW00162-REFTO SPANCONNECTORTO ALARMSCONNECTORTO MODEMCONNECTORTO RGD/RGPSCONNECTORSeeTable H-4for Pin-Out.H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-28Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal InformationTable H-4 lists the complete pin/signal identification for the 50-pinpunch block.Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnector Function Signal Name Punch Pin Ext. Cable WireColorPower Cab Control - NC 1T BluePower Cab Control - NO 1R Blk/BluePower Cab Control-Com 2T YellowReserved 2R N/CRectifier Fail 3T Blk/YellowAC Fail 3R GreenPower Cabinet Power Cab Exchanger Fail 4T Blk/GrnPower Cab Door Alarm 4R WhitePower Cab Major Alarm 5T Blk/WhiteBattery Over Temp 5R RedPower Cab Minor Alarm 6T Blk/RedReticifier Over Temp 6R BrownPower Cab Alarm Rtn 7T Blk/BrnALARM LFR_HSO_GND 7RHSO/LFR EXT_1PPS_POS 8TExtension EXT_1PPS_NEG 8RCAL_+ 9TCAB_- 9RLFR Antenna LORAN_+ 10TLORAN_- 10RPilot Beacon Alarm - Minor 11TPilot Beacon Alarm - Rtn 11RPilot Beacon Alarm - Major 12TPilot Beacon Pilot Beacon Control-NO 12RPilot Beacon Control - COM 13TPilot Beacon Control - NC 13R. . . continued on next pageH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-29Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnectorExt. Cable WireColorPunch PinSignal NameFunctionCustomer Outputs 1 - NO 14TCustomer Outputs 1 - COM 14RCustomer Outputs 1 - NO 14TCustomer Outputs 1 - COM 14RCustomer Outputs 1 - NC 15TCustomer Outputs 2 - NO 15RCustomer Outputs 2 - COM 16TALARM Customer Outputs Customer Outputs 2 - NC 16RCustomer Outputs 3 - NO 17TCustomer Outputs 3 - COM 17RCustomer Outputs 3 - NC 18TCustomer Outputs 4 - NO 18RCustomer Outputs 4-COM 19TCustomer Outputs 4 - NC 19RCustomer Inputs 1 20TCust_Rtn_A_1 20RCustomer Inputs 2 21TCust_Rtn_A_2 21RCustomer Inputs 3 22TCust_Rtn_A_3 22RCustomer Inputs 4 23TCust_Rtn_A_4 23RCustomer Inputs 5 24TCust_Rtn_A_5 24RALARM Customer Inputs Customer Inputs 6 25TCust_Rtn_A_6 25RCustomer Inputs 7 26TCust_Rtn_A_7 26RCustomer Inputs 8 27TCust_Rtn_A_8 27RCustomer Inputs 9 28TCust_Rtn_A_9 28RCustomer Inputs 10 29TCust_Rtn_A_10 29R. . . continued on next pageH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-30Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnectorExt. Cable WireColorPunch PinSignal NameFunctionRCV_TIP_A 30TRCV_RING_A 30RSpan 1 XMIT_TIP_A 31TXMIT_RING_A 31RRCV_TIP_B 32TRCV_RING_B 32RSpan 2 XMIT_TIP_B 33TXMIT_RING_B 33RRCV_TIP_C (Note) 34TRCV_RING_C (Note) 34RSpan 3 XMIT_TIP_C (Note) 35TXMIT_RING_C(Note) 35RRCV_TIP_D (Note) 36TSPAN I/O RCV_RING_D (Note) 36RSpan 4 XMIT_TIP_D (Note) 37TXMIT_RING_D(Note) 37RRCV_TIP_E (Note) 38TRCV_RING_E (Note) 38RSpan 5 XMIT_TIP_E (Note) 39TXMIT_RING_E(Note) 39RRCV_TIP_F (Note) 40TRCV_RING_F (Note) 40RSpan 6 XMIT_TIP_F (Note) 41TXMIT_RING_F(Note) 41RNOTESpan 3 through 6 are spares for expansion purposes. . . continued on next pageH
Intra-Cabinet Cabling68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-31Table H-4: Pin-Out for 50-Pair PunchblockPunchblockCableConnectorExt. Cable WireColorPunch PinSignal NameFunctionGPS_Power_A 42T YellowFor frame GPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/Blackwithout RGD GPS_Power_B 43T BlueExpansionPunchblock GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/BlackSingle Frame GPS_TXD+ 44T WhiteRGD/RGPS BTS;RGPS Head GPS_TXD- 44R White/BlackConnection GPS_RXD+ 45T GreenORMultiple Frame GPS_RXD- 45R Green/BlackMultiple FrameBTS; RGD Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T RedConnection at Signal Ground (TDR-) 46R Red/BlackRGPS SecondaryFrame GPS_1PPS+ 47T BrownGPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/BlackGPS_Power_A 42T YellowGPS_Power_A_Return 42R Yellow/BlackGPS_Power_B 43T BlueFor frame with GPS_Power_B_Return 43R Blue/BlackRGD ExpansionPunchblock GPS_TXD+ 44T WhiteOR GPS_TXD- 44R White/BlackRGD/RGPS Multiple FrameBTS; RGPS Head GPS_RXD+ 45T GreenBTS; RGPS HeadConnection at GPS_RXD- 45R Green/BlackRGPS PrimaryFrame Signal Ground (TDR+) 46T RedMaster Frame (TDR-) 46R Red/BlackGPS_1PPS+ 47T BrownGPS_1PPS- 47R Brown/BlackReserved 48TMODEM Reserved 48RRGD/RGPS Chassis Ground 49T N/ANone No Connection 49R NoneReserved 50T NoneALARM Reserved 50R None H
Intra-Cabinet Cabling 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYH-32RF Cabinet Parts LocatorFigure H-19 illustrates the location of door switch interlocks, DC Powerdistribution and the EBA blower assembly.Figure H-19: SC 4812ET RF Cabinet Parts LocatorFW00440-REF2341INDEX:1. Door Switch2. Door Switch (Main)3. DC Power Distribution4. EBA Blower AssemblyH
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-1Appendix IGPIB AddressingI
GPIB 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-2GPIBGPIB IntroductionUse the procedures in this appendix to verify and/or change the GPIBaddresses of the applicable test equipment.HP437 Power Meter GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table I-1 to verify and, if necessary, change theHP437 GPIB address.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table I-1: Verify and/or Change HP437 Power Meter GPIB AddressStep Action1 Press Shift and PRESET (see Figure I-1).2Use the y arrow key to navigate to HP-IB ADRS and press ENTER.The HP-IB address is displayed.NOTEHP-IB is the same as GPIB.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:- Use the y b arrow keys to change the HP-IB ADRS to 13.- Press ENTER to set the address.4 Press Shift and ENTER to return to a standard configuration. Figure I-1: HP437 Power MeterENTERPRESETSHIFT (BLUE) PUSHBUTTON -ACCESSES FUNCTION ANDDATA ENTRY KEYS IDENTIFIEDWITH LIGHT BLUE TEXT ONTHE FRONT PANEL ABOVETHE BUTTONSFW00308REFI
GPIB68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-3Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table I-2 to verify and, if necessary, change theGigatronics 8541C power meter GPIB address.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table I-2: Verify and/or Change Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter GPIB AddressStep Action! CAUTIONDo not connect/disconnect the power meter sensor cable with AC power applied to the meter.Disconnection could result in destruction of the sensing element or miscalibration.1 Press MENU (see Figure I-2).2Use the b arrow key to select CONFIG MENU and press ENTER.3Use the b arrow key to select GPIB and press ENTER.The current Mode and GPIB Address are displayed.4If the Mode is not set to 8541C, perform the following to change it:Use the a ' arrow keys as required to select MODE.Use the by arrow keys as required to set MODE to 8541C.5If the GPIB address is not set to 13, perform the following to change it:Use the ' arrow key to select ADDRESS.Use the by arrow keys as required to set the GPIB address to 13.6 Press ENTER to return to normal operation.Figure I-2: Gigatronics 8541C Power Meter DetailMENU ENTER ARROWKEYS REF FW005641I
GPIB 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-4Motorola CyberTest GPIB AddressFollow the steps in Table I-3 to verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB address on the Motorola CyberTest. Changing the GPIB addressrequires the following items:SMotorola CyberTest communications analyzerSComputer running Windows 3.1/Windows 95SMotorola CyberTAME software program “TAME”SParallel printer port cable (shipped with CyberTest)NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table I-3: Verify and/or Change Motorola CyberTest GPIB AddressStep Action1On the LMF desktop, locate the CyberTAME icon. Double click on the icon to run the CyberTAMEapplication.2In the CyberTAME window taskbar, under Special, select IEEE.488.2.3CyberTAME software will query the CyberTest Analyzer for its current GPIB address. It then willopen the IEEE 488.2 dialog box. If the current GPIB address is not 18, perform the followingprocedure to change it:- Use the up or down increment arrows, or double-click in the field and type the number.- Click on the OK button.The new address will be written to the CyberTest via the parallel port and saved.NOTEVerify that the address has been set by repeating steps 2 and 3. The new address should now appear inthe IEEE 488.2 dialog box Address field.HP8935 Test Set GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table I-4 to verify and, if necessary, change theHP8935 GPIB address.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB AddressStep Action* IMPORTANTThe HP I/O configuration MUST be set to Talk & Listen, or NO device on the GPIB bus will beaccessible. (Consult test equipment OEM documentation for additional information as required.)1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8935 (seeFigure I-3). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP-IB is the same as GPIB.I
GPIB68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-5Table I-4: Verify and/or Change HP8935 GPIB AddressStep Action2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:- Press Shift and Inst Config.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to the HP-IB Adrs field.- Press the Cursor Control knob to select the field.- Turn the Cursor Control knob as required to change the address to 18.- Press the Cursor Control knob to set the address.3SPress Preset to return to normal operation.Figure I-3: HP8935 Test SetFW00885PresetCursor ControlShiftInst ConfigLocalI
GPIB 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-6Setting HP8921A and HP83236A/B GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table I-5 to verify and, if necessary, change theHP8921A HP83236A GPIB addresses.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table I-5: Verify and/or Change HP8921A and HP83236A GPIB AddressesStep Action1To verify that the GPIB addresses are set correctly, press Shift and LOCAL on the HP8921A (seeFigure I-4). The current HP-IB address is displayed at the top of the screen.NOTEHP-IB is the same as GPIB.2If the current HP-IB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to More and press the knob to select the field.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to I/O Config and press the knob to select thefield.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to move the cursor to Adrs and press the knob to select the field.- Turn the Cursor Control knob to change the HP-IB address to 18 and press the knob to set theaddress.- Press Shift and Preset to return to normal operation.3To set the HP83236A (or B) PCS Interface GPIB address=19, set the dip switches as follows:- A1=1, A2=1, A3=0, A4=0, A5=1, HP-IB/Ser = 1I
GPIB68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-7Figure I-4: HP8921A and HP83236A/BPresetCursor ControlShiftLocalAdvantest R3465 GPIB AddressTable I-6 describes the steps to verify and, if necessary, change the GPIBaddress for the Advantest R3465.NOTE This procedure assumes that the test equipment is set up andready for testing.Table I-6: Verify and/or Change Advantest R3465 GPIB AddressStep Action1To verify that the GPIB address is set correctly, perform the following procedure:- Press SHIFT then PRESET (see Figure I-5).- Press LCL.- Press the GPIB and Others CRT menu key to view the current address.2If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:- Turn the vernier knob as required to select 18.- Press the vernier knob to set the address.3To return to normal operation, press Shift and Preset.I
GPIB 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-8Figure I-5: R3465 Communications Test SetBNC“T”REF UNLOCK EVENSEC/SYNC IN CDMATIME BASE INPOWEROFF ONREF FW00337LCL Shift PresetGPIB and othersVernierKnobRS232 GPIB Interface BoxEnsure that the RS232 GPIB interface box dip switches are set as shownin Figure I-6.Figure I-6: RS232 GPIB Interface BoxRS232-GPIBINTERFACE BOXS MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRSONDIP SWITCH SETTINGSG MODEAdvantest R3267 Spectrum Analyzer GPIB AddressPerform the procedure in Table I-7 and refer to Figure I-7 to verify and,if necessary, change the Advantest R3267 spectrum analyzer GPIBaddress.I
GPIB68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-9Table I-7: Verify and Change Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressStep Action1If the REMOTE LED is lighted, press the LCL key.- The LED turns off.2Press the CONFIG key.- The CONFIG softkey labels will appear in the softkey label display area of the instrumentdisplay.- The current GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.33aIf the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:- Press the GPIB Address softkey.-- A GPIB Address entry window will open in the instrument display showing the currentGPIB address.3b - Enter 18 on the keypad in the ENTRY section of the instrument front panel.-- Characters typed on the keypad will replace the address displayed in the GPIB Addressentry window.NOTETo correct an entry, press the BS (backspace) key at the lower right of the keypad to delete onecharacter at a time.3c - Press the ENTR key to the lower right of the keypad to enter the address.-- The GPIB Address entry window closes.-- The new address is diplayed in the bottom portion of the GPIB Address softkey label. Figure I-7: Setting Advantest R3267 GPIB AddressonREMOTELEDLCL KeyCONFIGKeySoftkey LableDisplay Area SoftkeyButtonsKeypad BSKey ENTRKeyAdvantest R3562 Signal Generator GPIB AddressSet the GP-IB ADDRESS switch on the rear of the Advantest R3562signal generator to address 1 as shown in Figure I-8.I
GPIB 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-10Figure I-8: Advantest R3562 GPIB Address Switch Setting123 4567 854321GP-IP ADDRESS10GPIB Address set to “1”I
GPIB68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-11Agilent E4406A Transmitter Tester GPIB Address Follow the procedure in Table I-8 and refer to Figure I-9 to verify and, ifnecessary, change the Agilent E4406A GPIB address.Table I-8: Verify and Change Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressStep Action1In the SYSTEM section of the instrument front panel, press the System key.- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the Config I/O softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.- The softkey labels will change.- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 18, perform the following to change it:3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.-- In the on-screen Active Function Area, GPIB Address will be displayed followed by thecurrent GPIB address.3b - On the front panel Data Entry keypad, enter the communications system analyzer GPIB address of18.-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the display.NOTETo correct an entry, press the Bk Sp key at the upper right of the keypad to delete one character at atime.3c - Press the Enter softkey button or the keypad Enter key to set the new GPIB address.-- The Config I/O softkey labels will reappear.-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label. I
GPIB 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-12Figure I-9: Setting Agilent E4406A GPIB AddressSystemKey Bk SpKeyEnterKeyData EntryKeypadSoftkeyButtonsSoftkey LabelDisplay AreaActive FunctionAreaAgilent E4432B Signal Generator GPIB AddressFollow the procedure in Table I-9 and refer to Figure I-10 to verify and,if necessary, change the Agilent E4432B GPIB address.Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressStep Action1In the MENUS section of the instrument front panel, press the Utility key.- The softkey labels displayed on the right side of the instrument screen will change.2Press the GPIB/RS232 softkey button to the right of the instrument screen.- The softkey labels will change.- The current instrument GPIB address will be displayed below the GPIB Address softkey label.3If the current GPIB address is not set to 1, perform the following to change it:3a - Press the GPIB Address softkey button.-- The GPIB Address label and current GPIB address will change to boldface.-- In the on-screen Active Entry Area, Address: will be displayed followed by the currentGPIB address.. . . continued on next pageI
GPIB68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-13Table I-9: Verify and Change Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressStep Action3b - On the front panel Numeric keypad, enter the signal generator GPIB address of 1.-- The GPIB Address label will change to Enter.-- Digits entered with the keypad will replace the current GPIB address in the Active Entrydisplay.NOTETo correct an entry, press the backspace key at the lower right of the keypad to delete one character ata time.3c - Press the Enter softkey button to set the new GPIB address.-- The new GPIB address will be displayed under the GPIB Address softkey label. Figure I-10: Setting Agilent E4432B GPIB AddressNumericKeypadSoftkeyButtonsSoftkey LabelDisplay AreaActive EntryAreaBackspaceKeyUtilityKeyI
GPIB 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYI-14NotesI
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYJ-1Appendix JDownloading ROMJ
Downloading ROM Code 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYJ-2Downloading ROM CodeException Procedure - Downloading ROM CodeThis procedure is not part of a normal optimization.Perform this procedure only on an exception basis when no alternativeexists to load a BTS device with the correct version of ROM code.NOTE One GLI must be INS_ACT (bright green) before ROM codecan be downloaded to non-GLI devices.CAUTION The correct ROM and RAM codes for the software release usedon the BSS must be loaded into BTS devices. To identify thecorrect device ROM and RAM code loads for the softwarerelease being used on the BSS, refer to the Version Matrixsection of the SCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapeor CD-ROM containing the BSS software).All devices in a BTS must be loaded with the ROM and RAMcode specified for the software release used on the BSS beforeany optimization or ATP procedures can be performed.If a replacement device is loaded with ROM code which is notcompatible with the BSS software release being used, the deviceROM code can be changed using the LMF before performing theBTS optimization and ATPs. A device loaded with later releaseROM code can not be converted back to a previous release ROMcode in the field without Motorola assistanceIf it is necessary to download ROM code to a device from the LMF, theprocedure in Table J-1 includes steps for both ROM and RAM codedownload using LMF.PrerequisitesPrior to performing this procedure, ensure the correct ROM and RAMcode files exist in the LMF computer’s applicable lmf home directorycode folder for each of the devices to be loaded.CAUTION The Release level of the ROM code to be downloaded must bethe one specified for the software release installed in the BSS.The release level of the ROM code resident in the other devicesin the BTS must also be correct for the BSS software releasebeing used. ROM code must not be downloaded to a frameloaded with code for a BSS software release with which it is notcompatible.This procedure should only be used to upgrade replacementdevices for a BTS. It should NOT be used to upgrade all devicesin a BTS. If a BTS is to be upgraded from R15.x to R16.0, theupgrade should be done by the OMC-R using the DownLoadManager.J
Downloading ROM Code68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYJ-3Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to DevicesStep Action1Click on the device to be loaded.NOTEMore than one device of the same type can be selected for download by either clicking on each one tobe downloaded or from the BTS menu bar Select pull-down menu, select the device item that applies.Where: device = the type of device to be loaded (BBX, CSM, MCC)2From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status.- A status report window will appear.3Make a note of the number in the HW Bin Type column.NOTE“HW Bin Type” is the Hardware Binary Type for the device. This code is used as the last four digits inthe filename of a device’s binary ROM code file. Using this part of the filename, the ROM code filecan be matched to the device in which it is to be loaded.4 Click OK to close the status window.5Click on the device to be loaded.6* IMPORTANTThe LMF will not automatically select ROM code files for download. ROM code files must beselected manually.From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code Manual.- A file selection window will appear.7Double-click on the version folder with the desired version number for the ROM code file (forexample 2.16.0.x).8Double-click the Code folder.- A list of ROM and RAM code files will be displayed.! CAUTIONA ROM code file with the correct HW Bin Type must be chosen. Using a file with the wrong HW BinType can result in unpredictable operation and damage to the device.9Click on the ROM code file with the filename which matches the device type and HW Bin Typenumber noted in step 3 (for example, file bbx_rom.bin.0604 is the ROM code file for a BBX with aHW Bin Type of 0604).- The file should be highlighted.10 Click on the Load button.- A status report window is displayed showing the result of the download.NOTEIf the ROM load failed for some devices, load them individually by clicking on one device, performsteps 6 through 10 for it, and repeat the process for each remaining device.11 Click OK to close the status window.12 From the LMF window menu bar Tools pull-down menus, select Update NextLoad > CDMA.13 In the left-hand pane of the window which opens, click on the BTS number for the frame being loaded(for example, BTS-14 ).. . . continued on next pageJ
Downloading ROM Code 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYJ-4Table J-1: Download ROM and RAM Code to DevicesStep Action14 On the list of versions displayed in the right-hand pane, click the button next to the version number ofthe folder that was used for the ROM code download (for example, 2.16.0.x) and click Save.- A pop-up message will appear showing the CDF has been updated.15 Click on the OK button to dismiss the pop-up message.16 Click on the device that was loaded with ROM code.NOTERAM code is automatically selected for download.17 From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menus, select Download > Code/Data to download RAMcode and dds file data.- A status report is displayed showing the result of the download.18 Click OK to close the status window.19 Observe the downloaded non-GLI device to ensure it is OOS_RAM (yellow).20 Click on the device which was loaded with code.21 From the BTS menu bar Device pull-down menu, select Status.Verify that the correct ROM and RAM version numbers are displayed in the status report window.22 Click OK to close the status window. J
Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYK-1Appendix KCompanion Frame OptimizationK
Optimizing the Companion Frame 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYK-2Optimizing the Companion FrameOptimizing the TX sectionThe optimization/ATP procedure for the transmit side of the CompanionFrame is identical to that of the SC4812ET BTS.Table K-1: Optimizing the TX section of the Companion FramenStep Action1Please refer to the TX Optimization/ATP - Chapter 3 of this manual for step-by-step TXOptimization/ATP instructions for the standalone frame2Run the TX tests.SC4812ET CompanionC1 C2C3 C4RXTX1SSRXTX2RXTX3MPC-AEMPC-B1 A2 A3 ARX1ARX3ARX2ARX1ARX2ARX3AAnt-1A1 B2 B3 BAnt-2AAnt-3AFigure K-1: Cabling of SC 4812ET Companion BTS to SC 4812ET Companion BTS (3 Sector)C1 C2C3 C4C1 C2C3 C4FW00407SC4812ET CompanionRXTX1SSRXTX2RXTX3MPC-AEMPC-BRX1ARX3ARX2ARX1ARX2ARX3AAnt-1AAnt-2AAnt-3AC5C6 C7C8RX EXPANSION1 A2 A3 A1 B2 B3 BSURGEARRESTORS(Starter)C5C6 C7C8C5C6 C7C8K
Optimizing the Companion Frame68P09255A57-2Aug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYK-3Optimizing the RX sectionRX (Main) Optimization/ATPTo test the RX Main antenna system follow the instructions in Table K-2and refer to illustration Figure K-1(3-sector configuration).Table K-2: Optimizing the RX (Main) section of the Companion FramenStep Action1Connect the RX test cables to the antenna ports 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) orantenna ports 1A-6A (for 6-sector optimization).2Login the LMF and select MPC (see Figure K-2 for display screen and field location).3Run the RX tests.RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Single Frame)To test the RX Diversity antenna system follow the instructions inTable K-3.Table K-3: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Single FramenStep Action1Connect the RX test cables to the expansion ports on the I/O plates labeled 1B-3B (for3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for 6-sector optimization).2Login the LMF under EMPC (see Figure K-2 for display screen and field location).3Run the RX tests.RX (Diversity) Optimization/ATP (Two Frame)To test the RX Diversity antenna configuration on a two frameCompanion BTS system follow the instructions in Table K-4.Table K-4: Optimizing the RX (Diversity) on a Two Frame Companion SitenStep Action1Connect RX expansion cables from the expansion ports on the other Companion framelabeled 1A-3A (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1A-6A (for 6-sectoroptimization) to the 1B-3B (for 3-sector optimization) or expansion ports 1B-6B (for6-sector optimization) see Figure K-1 for an illustration of the configuration.NOTEConnect the cables from the 2nd frame A ports to the B ports of the 1st frame.2Login using the LMF select MPC (see Figure K-2 for field location on LMF display screen)NOTE- Although the test will be done to one frame, the RX cable will be connected to theother frame’s corresponding antenna ports.- The other frame has to be powered up and include all the RX Path Components.K
Optimizing the Companion Frame 68P09255A57-2Aug 2002SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYK-4Figure K-2: WinLMF Display Screen K
PRELIMINARYAug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x Index-1Index
Index 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYAug 2002Index-2Numbers10BaseT/10Base2 Converter, 1-122-way Splitter, 1-153-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDSCabling Table, H-234812ET RF Cabinet Internal FRU Locations, H-46-Sector Duplexed Directional Coupler to RFDSCabling Table, H-24AAcceptance Test Procedures ATP , 1-3Acronyms, 1-16ACTIVE LEDGLI, 6-41MCC, 6-44Advantest R3465, 3-64GPIB, I-9Alarm and Span Line Cable Pin/Signal Information,3-8ALARM LED, GLI, 6-41Alarm Monitor window, 3-130Alarm Reporting Display, 3-130All Cal/Audit Test, 3-113All inclusive, TX ATP test outline - CCP shelf 1,primary, 4-18All tests fail on a single antenna, Troubleshooting,RFDS, 6-35AMR, 1-21Applying AC Power, 2-6ATPgenerate failure report, 4-17generate report, 4-17test matrix/detailed optimization, B-3ATP - Reduced, 4-3ATP Report, 4-18ATP Test Procedure, 4-9BBasic Troubleshooting Overview, 6-2Battery Charge Test (Connected Batteries), 2-12Battery Discharge Test, 2-12Bay Level offset calibration failure, 6-10BBX, gain set point vs SIF output considerations, C-2BBX2, 1-21BBX2 Connector, 6-25BBX2 LED Status Combinations, 6-43Broad Band Receiver. See BBXBTSdownload, 3-42Ethernet LAN interconnect diagram, 3-25LMF connection, 3-12, 3-24system software download, 3-3BTS Cabinet, 1-28BTS directory, create, 3-28Create CAL File, 3-114CC-CCP Backplane, H-7C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, Procedure, 6-26C-CCP shelf, 1-21cable calibration, automatic, test set-up, 3-72Advantest R3267/R3562, 3-72Advantest R3465, 3-71Agilent 8935, 3-71Agilent E4406A/E4432B, 3-72CyberTest, 3-71HP 8921A, 3-71Cables Connection for 10 MHz Signal and GPIB ,F-4, F-6Calibrate BLO, 3-98Calibrating Cables, 3-90Calibrating Test Cable Setup, PCS InterfaceHP83236B, F-16Calibrating Test Equipment, 3-89Calibrationdata file calibration, BLO, 3-100In-Service, G-18power meter, Gigatronics 8542B, F-25Calibration Audit failure, 6-11calibration data file, description of, BLO, 3-100Cannot communicate to Communications Analyzer,6-5Cannot communicate to Power Meter, 6-4Cannot Download DATA to any device card, 6-6, 6-7Cannot ENABLE device, 6-8Cannot Log into cell-site, 6-3
Index68P09255A57-2PRELIMINARYAug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x Index-3Cannot perform carrier measurement, 6-16Cannot perform Code Domain Noise Powermeasurement, 6-15Cannot perform Rho or pilot time offsetmeasurement, 6-14Cannot perform Txmask measurement, 6-13CCD, 1-21CCP, shelf 1 - all inclusive TX ATP test outline,primary, 4-18CDFsite configuration, 3-3site equipage verification, 3-4site type and equipage data information, 2-2CDF filecreate, 3-31update device load version, 3-32, 3-33CDMAallocation diagram for the North American, cellulartelephone frequency spectrum, D-6optimization/ATP test matrix, B-2cdpower test, 4-14Cell Siteequipage verification, 2-2types configuration, 3-3Cell Site Data File. See CDFCell Site Field Engineer CFE, 1-3Channel Service Unit, 3-6CIO, 1-21CIO Connectors, 6-25CLI, 1-4Clock Sync Module. See CSMCode Domain Power and Noise Floor Levels, 4-15Code Domain Power/Noise, 4-14Communication test set, rear panel, F-4, F-6Communications System Analyzer, 1-13Communications system analyzer , 1-13Components Located on CIO Card, H-11Connecting test equipment to the BTS, 3-62Connector FunctionalityBackplane, Troubleshooting, 6-24Troubleshooting, Backplane, 6-24Copy CAL Files From Diskette to the CBSC, 5-4Copy CDF Files from CBSC, 3-19Copy Files from LMF to Diskette, 5-4Copying CAL files from CDMA LMF to the CBSC,5-4Copying CAL files to the CBSC, 5-4createBTS directory, 3-28CDF file, 3-31master-bts-cdma, 3-28CSM, 1-21and LFR primary functions, 3-52CSM frequency verification, 3-54CSM LED Status Combinations, 6-39Customer I/O, 1-21CyberTest, 3-64CyberTest Communication Analyzer, 1-13DDC Power Pre-test (BTS Frame), 2-8DC Power Problems, C-CCP BackplaneTroubleshooting, 6-30DC/DC Converter LED Status Combinations, 6-38Detailed, optimization/ATP test matrix, B-3Devices, download. See DownloadDigital Control Problems, 6-27C-CCP Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-27Digital Multimeter, 1-14Directional Coupler, 1-14DownloadSee also DevicesBTS, 3-42BTS system software, 3-3Download BLO Procedure, 3-106download ROM and RAM code. See ROM codeDownload/Enable MCCs, 3-51Download/Enable MGLIs, 3-45Duplexer/Directional Coupler DDC, 1-20, 1-21, 1-22,1-30EEnable CSMs & BDCs, 3-49Equipment Overview, 1-18Equipment warm-up, 3-68Ethernet LANinterconnect diagram, 3-25transceiver, 1-12ETIB I/O Connectors, H-13
Index 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYAug 2002Index-4Every test fails, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-33Ffer test, 4-16Files, calibration data file, BLO, 3-100Folder Structure Overview, 3-21, 3-23Foreword, xxFREQ Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-40Frequency counter, optional test equipment, 1-15GGain set point, C-2General Safety, xxiiGeneral optimization checklist, test data sheets, A-6Gigatronics 8542B power meter, illustration, F-25,I-4Gigatronics Power Meter, 3-64GLI. See Master (MGLI2) and Slave (SGLI2) GroupLine InterfaceGLI Connector, 6-25GLI Ethernet A and B Connections, 6-25GLI LED Status Combinations, 6-41GLI Pushbuttons and Connectors, 6-42GLI2, 1-21GLI2 Front Panel Operating Indicators, 6-42GPIB, F-3, F-7, F-11Advantest R3465, I-9HP83236A/B, I-7HP8921A, I-7HP8935, I-6power meterGigatronics 8542B, I-4HP437B, I-3set address, Motorola CyberTest, I-5GPIB Cables, 1-13GPS, receiver operation, test data sheets, A-7GPS Initialization/Verificationestimated position accuracy, 3-55surveyed position accuracy, 3-55GPS satellite system, 3-49Graphical User Interface Overview , 3-34, 3-35Group Line Interface. See GLIHHardware Requirements, 1-9High Stability 10 MHz Rubidium Standard, 1-15High-impedance Conductive Wrist Strap, 1-14HP 437B, 3-64HP 83236A, F-7HP 8921, 3-64HP83236A/B, GPIB, I-7HP8921A, F-7GPIB, I-7HP8935, GPIB, I-6HP8935 Analyzer, 1-13HSO, 1-21HSO Initialization/Verification, 3-53II and Q values, E-3In-Service Calibration, G-18Initial HP8921A setup, F-16Initial Installation of Boards/Modules, preliminaryoperations, 2-2Initial power tests, test data sheets, A-5Installation and Update Procedures, 3-16Intercabinet I/O, 1-22Internal FRU, 1-29Internal FRUs, 1-20IS-97 specification, E-3ISB Inter Shelf Bus connectors, 6-24LLAN, BTS frame interconnect, illustration, 3-25
Index68P09255A57-2PRELIMINARYAug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x Index-5LED Status Combinations for all Modules exceptGLI2 CSM BBX2 MCC24 MCC8E, 6-37LFR, 1-21receiver operation, test data sheets, A-8Line Build Out parametersconfigure, 5-8verify, 5-6LMF, F-3, F-11to BTS connection, 3-12, 3-24view CDF information, 3-4LMF Removal, 5-12Load Center Wiring, 2-5Local Area Network (LAN) Tester, 1-15Log into the BTS, 3-27Log into the LMF, 3-27Logging In to a BTS, 3-36Logging Out, 3-39LORAN-C Initialization/Verification, 3-60LPA errors, 6-9LPA Module LED, 6-45LPA Shelf LED Status Combinations, 6-45LPAC Interface Board, H-12Mmajor components, 1-19Manual, layout, 1-2Master Group Line Interface. See MGLIMASTER LED, GLI, 6-41master-bts-cdma directory, create, 3-28MCC LED Status Combinations, 6-44MCC/CE, 4-14MGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-7MMI common connections, 3-41MMI Connection, 3-41MMI ConnectorCSM, 6-40GLI, 6-42MMI Connectors, MCC, 6-44MMI equipment setup, 3-41Model SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit, 1-13Module status indicators, 6-36Motorola, SC9600 Base Transceiver Subsystem, 1-2MPC, 1-21Multi Channel Card. See MCCMulti-FER test Failure, 6-17NNew Installations, 1-6No AMR control, 6-28No BBX2 control in the shelf, 6-28No DC input voltage to Power Supply Module, 6-30No DC voltage +5 +65 or +15 Volts to a specificGLI2 BBX2 or Switch board, 6-31No GLI2 Control through span line connection, 6-27No GLI2 Control via LMF, 6-27No or missing MCC24 channel elements, 6-29No or missing span line traffic, 6-28North American, cellular telephone system frequencyspectrum, CDMA allocation, D-6Null modem cable detail, 1-12OOnline Help, 1-4Optimization, 1-3optimization/ATP, test set-up, 3-76Advantest R3267/R3562DRDCs, 3-79TRDCs, 3-81Advantest R3465, 3-76Agilent 8935DRDCs, 3-78TRDCs, 3-80Agilent E4406A/E4432BDRDCs, 3-78TRDCs, 3-80CyberTest, 3-76HP 8921A, 800 MHz, 3-77HP 8921A, 1.9 GHz, 3-77Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, 1-6Optional Test Equipment, 1-15Optional test equipment, frequency counter, 1-15Oscilloscope, 1-15PPilot Time Offset. See PNPing, 3-25
Index 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYAug 2002Index-6PNoffset programming information, E-2offset usage, E-3PN offset per sector, E-3PN Offset Usage , E-3Power Delta CalibrationAdvantest, G-7HP8921A, G-4HP8935, G-10Power Input, 6-24Power Meter, 1-13illustration, F-23, I-3Pre-calibration, F-23Power metercalibration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-25GPIBGigatronics 8542B, I-4HP437B, I-3illustration, Gigatronics 8542B, F-25, I-4Power Supply Module Interface, 6-24Pre-calibration, Power Meter, F-23Pre-power tests, test data sheets, A-5Preliminary operationscell Site types, 2-2test data sheets, A-4Prepare to Leave the SiteExternal test equipment removal, 5-2LMF Removal, 5-12Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-13Verify T1/E1, 5-13Prepare to leave the sitere-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-11re-connect BTS T1 spans, 5-11Procedures to Copy CAL Files From Diskette to theCBSC, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5, 6-6, 6-7Product Description, 1-4Pseudorandom Noise. See PNptoff test, 4-13Punch Block, 3-8PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LEDs, MCC, 6-44PWR/ALM LEDBBX2, 6-43CSM, 6-39DC/DC Converter, 6-38generic, 6-37MCC, 6-44MPC and EMPC Card, H-21RRAM code, described, 3-42Re-connect BTS IFM connector, 5-11Re-connect BTS T1 Spans, 5-11Receive Distribution Card RXDC, 1-30Reduced ATP, 4-3Reduced ATP passes but forward link problemprevails, 6-12Reestablish OMC-R control, 5-13Removing and Installing LPAs for the SC 4812ET,H-8Required documents, 1-7, 1-29Required Test EquipmentEthernet LAN transceiver, 1-12substitute equipment, 1-8RESET Pushbutton, GLI, 6-42Resetting BTS modules, 5-3Revision History, xxivRF Adapters, 1-14RF Attenuators, 1-1450 Pair Punchblock, H-27RF Path Bay Level Offset Calibration, 3-97RF Test Cable, 1-15RFDS Cabling Details, H-23RFDS calibrationdescription, 3-125procedure, 3-126RFDS FRU, H-15RFDS Location, SC 4812ET, 1-24RFDS parameters, 3-116checking, 3-117setting, 3-117RFDS Test Subscriber Unit, 3-43RFDS TSU Calibration Channel Frequencies, 3-125rho test, 4-12ROM codedescribed, 3-42downloading, J-2, K-2, K-3procedure, J-3
Index68P09255A57-2PRELIMINARYAug 2002 SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.x Index-7RS-232 to GPIB Interface, 1-12Rubidium Standard Timebase, 3-64RX, antenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-18RX and TX paths fail, Troubleshooting, RFDS, 6-34SSC 4812 BTS Optimization/ATP Test Matrix, B-4SC 4812ET BTS Combiner, H-9, H-10, H-17, H-18,H-19, H-20, H-22, H-23, H-25SCLPA, convergence test data sheets, A-9Selecting Test Equipment, 3-85Set Antenna Map Data, 3-123Set RFDS Configuration Data, 3-124Set Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-8Setting Cable Loss Values, 3-94Setting Control Port, 3-6Setting Coupler Loss Value, 3-95SGLI2, board detail, MMI port connections, 5-7SIF, output considerations vs BBX gain set point, C-2Site, equipage verification, 3-4Site checklist, verification data sheets, A-3site equippage, CDF file, 3-3Site Specific BTS Files, 3-28Span Framing Formatconfigure, 5-8verify, 5-6SPAN I/O Functional Description, Introduction, H-14Span Line (T1/E1) Verification Equipment, 1-15Span Line connector , 6-24Span Parameter Configurationset, procedure, 5-8verification, procedure, 5-6Span Problems no control link, Troubleshooting, 6-46SPANS LED, 6-41Spectrum Analyzer, 1-15Spectrum Analyzer , HP8594E, 3-64STATUS LED, GLI, 6-41SYNC Monitor Connector, CSM, 6-40System Connectivity Test, F-7TT1, isolate BTS from the T1 spans, 3-5, 3-14Telco Interface Board TIB, 1-30Test data sheetsAlarm verification, A-19general optimization checklist, A-6GPS receiver operation, A-7initial power tests, A-5LFR receiver operation, A-8pre-power tests, A-5preliminary operations, A-4RX antenna VSWR, A-18SCLPA convergence, A-9site checklist, A-3TX antenna VSWR, A-16TX BLO, A-10, A-15verification of test equipment used, A-2Test equipment, verification data sheets, A-2Test equipment connections , F-3preliminary Agilent E4406A/E4432B set-up, F-15Test Equipment Policy, 1-8Test Equipment Setup Calibration for TX Bay LevelOffset, 3-93, F-20Test Equipment Setup Chart, 3-66Test equipment setup RF path calibration, 3-103Timing Reference Cables, 1-13Transmit TX path audit, 3-109Transmit TX path calibration, 3-104Transmit/Receive Module TRX, 1-29TroubleshootingDC Power Problems, 6-30Span Problems no control link, 6-46Troubleshooting Forward Link Failure (BTS PassedReduced ATP), 6-12TSU NAM, programmingdescription, 3-120parameter ranges, 3-122parameters, 3-121procedure, 3-128TXantenna VSWR, test data sheets, A-16, A-19BLO test data sheets, A-10, A-15TX and RX Frequency vs Channel , D-4TX Audit Test, 3-110TX Bay Level Offset and TX ATP test equipmentsetup calibration, 3-92
Index 68P09255A57-2SCt4812ET Optimization/ATP Manual Software Release R16.1.x.xPRELIMINARYAug 2002Index-8TX calibration, set-up, 3-73Advantest R3267, 3-75Advantest R3465, 3-74Agilent 8935, 3-73Agilent E4406A, 3-75CyberTest, 3-73HP 8921A, 3-74tx fine adjust, E-3TX Mask Verification, spectrum analyzer display,illustration, 4-11TX Output Acceptance Tests - IntroductionCode domain power, 4-8Pilot time offset, 4-8Spectral purity TX mask, 4-8Waveform Quality (rho), 4-8TX Path Calibration, 3-99TX/RX OUT Connections, 4-5txmask test, 4-10UUpdating CDMA LMF Files, 5-4VVerify, test equipment used, test data sheets, A-2Verify GLI ROM code load, 3-44Verify Span Parameter Configuration, procedure, 5-6WWalsh channels, 4-14XXCVR Backplane Troubleshooting, 6-24Xircom Model PE3-10B2, LMF to BTS connection,3-24

Navigation menu